Mercedes-Benz SL 2008 Roadster Owner's Manual PDF ...

Disclaimer

Das folgende PDF-Dokument für dieses Fahrzeugmodell bezieht sich in allen Sprachversionen nur auf die Fahrzeuge, die für den deutschen Markt bestimmt sind und die den deutschen Vorschriften entsprechen. Bitte wenden Sie sich an Ihren autorisierten Mercedes-Benz Servicestützpunkt, um ein gedrucktes Exemplar für andere Fahrzeugmodelle und Fahrzeugmodelljahre zu erhalten.

Dieses PDF-Dokument stellt die aktuelle Version dar. Mögliche Abweichungen zu Ihrem konkreten Fahrzeug könnten nicht berücksichtigt sein, da Mercedes-Benz seine Fahrzeuge ständig dem neuesten Stand der Technik anpasst, sowie Änderungen in Form und Ausstattung vornimmt. Bitte beachten Sie daher, dass dieses PDF-Dokument in keinem Fall das gedruckte Exemplar ersetzt, das mit dem Fahrzeug ausgeliefert wurde.

Internal use only

Disclaimer

All language versions of the following PDF document for this vehicle model relate solely to vehicles intended for sale on the German market and which correspond to German regulations.

Please contact your authorised Mercedes-Benz Service Centre to obtain a printed version for other vehicle models and vehicle model years. This PDF document is the latest version. Possible variations to your vehicle may not be taken into account as Mercedes-Benz constantly updates their vehicles to the state of the art and introduces changes in design and equipment. Please therefore note that this PDF document in no way replaces the printed version which was delivered with your vehicle.

Internal use only

Disclaimer

The following version of the Owner‘s Manual describes all models, series and special equipment of your vehicle. Country-specific language variations are possible. Please note that your vehicle might not be equipped with all the described functions. This also affects safety-relevant systems and functions. Please contact your authorised Mercedes-Benz dealership if you would like to receive a printed Owner‘s Manual for other vehicle models and vehicle model years.

The online Owner‘s Manual is the current and valid version. It is possible that deviations affecting your specific vehicle could not be taken into account as Mercedes-Benz constantly adapts its vehicles according to the latest technology and makes changes to the form and the equipment.

Please also read the printed Owner‘s Manual, supplementary documents and the digital Owner‘s Manual in the vehicle.

CopyrightAll rights reserved. All texts, images and graphics are subject to copyright and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not be copied or changed for any commercial use or for the purpose of being passed on nor used on other webistes.

Thank you for choosing Mercedes-Benz.Before you drive off, familiarise yourself withyour vehicle and read the Operating Instruc-tions. This will help you to obtain the maxi-mum pleasure from your vehicle and to avoidendangering yourself and others.Items of optional equipment are marked withan asterisk *.The equipment in your vehicle may vary,depending on the model, the ordered items,the country specifications and availability.The illustrations in this manual show a left-hand-drive vehicle. The arrangement of theswitches, levers, stowage compartments,etc. will differ accordingly in a right-hand-drive vehicle.Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating itsvehicles to the state of the art and thereforereserves the right to introduce changes indesign, equipment and technical features atany time. You cannot, therefore, base anyclaims on the data, illustrations or descrip-tions in this manual.Please consult a Mercedes-Benz ServiceCentre if you have any questions.The Owner's Manual, Brief Instructions,Service Booklet and supplements specific tovehicle equipment belong with the vehicle.You should always keep them in the vehicle

and pass them on to the new owner if you sellthe vehicle.The technical documentation team atDaimler AG wishes you safe and pleasantmotoring.

i You can get to know the important fea-tures of your vehicle in German and inEnglish in the interactive Owner's Manualon the Internet at:www.mercedes-benz.de/betriebsanlei-tung

230_AKB; 5; 4, en-GBbjanott, Version: 2.9.6

2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 1Dateiname: 6515_3089_02_buchblock.pdf; preflight

2

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

At a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Practical advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Contents



3

AABC

see Active Body ControlABC (Active Body Control)

Display message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204, 205

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) . . . . . 53Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233, 234

AccelerationTechnical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

AccidentNotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Active Body Control (ABC) . . . . . . . . 139Active light system

see Light system (active)Active Light System

Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Active service system

see Service interval displayAdaptive brake lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Airbag

Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Driver's . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Head/thorax airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

PASSENGER AIRBAGOFFwarninglamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Air conditioningActivating/deactivating . . . . . . . . . 147Activating/deactivating air-recir-culation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Air-recirculation mode with con-venience opening/closing feature . 152Automatic air conditioning . . . . . . . 145Controlling automatically . . . . . . . . 148Cooling with air dehumidification . . 147Demisting the windscreen . . . . . . . 151Misted-up windows . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Rear window heating . . . . . . . . . . . 152Setting the air distribution . . . . . . . 150Setting the airflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Setting the air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Setting the temperature . . . . . . . . . 148Switching the residual heat func-tion on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153see Climate control

AIRSCARF neck-level heating . . . . . . . 76Antifreeze concentration . . . . . . . . . 306Anti-lock braking system

see ABSAnti-theft alarm system

see ATAAnti-theft systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

ASSYSTsee Service interval display

ASSYST service interval display . . . 193ATA (anti-theft alarm system) . . . . . . 59

Switching off the alarm . . . . . . . . . . 60Audible warning signal . . . . . . . . . . . 240AUTO lights

Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Automatic air conditioning

Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . 231Automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Automatic transmission

Changing gear yourself . . . . . . . . . . 99Display in the speedometer . . . . . . . 99Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Emergency running mode . . . . . . . 246Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246One-touch gearshifting . . . . . . . . . . . 99Program selector button . . . . . . . . 100Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . 99Shift ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Axle load, maximum permissible . . . 299

BBAS (Brake Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Basic display (on-board computer) . 110Battery

Changing (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Changing (KEYLESS GO key) . . . . . 259

Index



4

Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278Checking (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Checking (KEYLESS GO key) . . . . . 259Check lamp (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Check lamp (KEYLESS GO key). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 259Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277Display message . . . . . . . . . . 215, 216Maintenance (vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . 276Reconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278Removing/fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Belt force limitersActivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Belt tensionersActivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Belt warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Bonnet

Bonnet catch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Bonnet release leverRelease lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

BootEmergency release . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Locking separately . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Opening/closing (automatically) . . . 70Opening/closing (manually) . . . . . . . 69

Boot lidDisplay message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Boot separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

BrakeWarning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Brake Assistsee BAS

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Brake lampsAdaptive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Brake systemDisplay message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216, 217, 218Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98SBCTM brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

BulbChanging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261, 263Cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Licence plate lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264Main-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . 262Parking lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Rear foglamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263Reversing lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263Side lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Turn signal lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263see Lamp

BulbsOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

CCalling up a malfunction

see Message memory menuCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196High-pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . 195Parktronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Plastic trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Side windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Tail pipes (AMG vehicles) . . . . . . . . 197

CD player/CD changerOperation (on-board computer) . . . 114

Central lockingAutomatic locking (on-board com-puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64KEYLESS GO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 67

Central locking/unlocking button . . . 68Central unlocking

Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64KEYLESS GO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 67

Centre consoleLower section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Upper section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Changing a wheelsee Flat tyre

Index



5

ChildrenIn the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Restraint systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Child seatAutomatic recognition . . . . . . . . . . . 49Automatic recognition (malfunc-tion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Suitable positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Cockpit

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Collapsible emergency spare wheel

Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Collapsible wheel

Pumping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

COMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . 109see separate Operating Instructions

Constant headlamp modeSetting (on-board computer) . . . . . 118

Consumption statistics (on-boardcomputer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Checking the level . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Display message . . . . . . 214, 219, 220Mixture ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304Temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Cornering lightDisplay message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Display message . . . . . . . . . . 212, 213

Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

DDashboard

see Cockpitsee Instrument cluster

Daytime driving lightssee Constant headlamp mode

Delayed switch-offExterior lighting (on-board com-puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Interior lighting (on-board com-puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Digital speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Setting the unit (on-board com-puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Dipped beamDisplay message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Dipped-beam headlampsSymmetrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Service indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Symbol messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Text messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Up (AMG menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Distance recordersee Total distance recordersee Trip meter

Distance warning function . . . . . . . . 131Distance warning lamp . . . . . . . 131, 233Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Cleaning the sensors . . . . . . . . . . . 198Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Display message . . . . . . 206, 207, 213Distance warning function . . . . . . . 131Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

DoorAutomatic locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Emergency locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . 255Opening (from the inside) . . . . . . . . 67

Door control panelOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Draught stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Drinks holder

see Cup holderDriver's airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Driver's door

Unlocking (KEYLESS GO) . . . . . . . . . 67Driver's seat position . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Driving safety system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Index



6

Adaptive brake lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 54BAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54ESP® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54SBCTM brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Driving system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Active Body Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Parktronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142RACE START (SL 63 AMG) . . . . . . . 138SBC Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Driving tipBraking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Driving on wet roads . . . . . . . . . . . 192Fording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

DVD audioOperation (on-board computer) . . . 114

DVD videoOperation (on-board computer) . . . 115

EEasy-entry/exit feature

Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Easy-entry feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Easy-exit feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Electrical/electronic equipment

Retrofitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Electronic Stability Program

see ESP®e mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Emergency key element

Lost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Emergency locking

Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Emergency release

Interior stowage compartments . . . 257Emergency running mode

Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . 246Emergency unlocking

Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

EngineDisplay message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Running irregularly . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Starting problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Starting with KEYLESS GO . . . . . . . . 96Starting with the key . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Engine diagnostic warning lamp . . . 237Engine electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Checking the oil level (dipstick) . . . 179Checking the oil level (on-boardcomputer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Display message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178, 224, 225Filler neck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Temperature display (on-boardcomputer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) . 54Activating/deactivating (exceptSL 63 AMG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Activating/deactivating(SL 63 AMG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 234

Exterior lightingDelayed switch-off (on-boardcomputer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Exterior mirrorsAdjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) . . . . . 81Folding in/out (automatically) . . . . . 81Folding in/out (electrically) . . . . . . . 80Folding in when locking (on-boardcomputer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250Parking position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Index



7

Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Storing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Exterior viewOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

FFire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201First-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Flat tyre

Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266MOExtended run-flat system . . . . . 275Preparing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 266TIREFIT kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Floormat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Foglamps

Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223Fording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Frequencies

Garage door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Front-passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . 301, 302Fuel filler flap

Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Fuel lineMalfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Fuel tankMalfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Fuse allocation chart . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Fuse box

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . 283Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

GGarage door

Opening/closing (with the remotecontrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Garage door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Clearing the memory . . . . . . . . . . . 171Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Programming the remote control . . 169

Gear indicator (on-board computer) 111Gearshift program

Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 104SETUP (on-board computer) . . . . . 111

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts . . . . . 286Glass roof

Roller sunblind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . 257Gross vehicle weight, maximumpermissible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

HHead/thorax airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Headlamp

Misting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Headlamps

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Cleaning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Headlamps delayed switch-offsee Exterior lighting delayed switch-off

Head restraintAdjusting (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Heatingsee Air conditioning

High-pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . 195HomeLink®

see Garage door opener

IImmobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Indicator and warning lamp

Brakes (red) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236Distronic (red) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233DTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Engine diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237ESP® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF . . . . 49, 231Reserve fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Roll-over bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Index



8

Seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 235Tyre pressure monitor . . . . . . . . . . 238

Indicator and warning lamps . . . . . . 233Indicator lamp

see Indicator and warning lampInstrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Selecting the language (on-boardcomputer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Intelligent Light System . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222Menu (on-board computer) . . . . . . 120

Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Automatic control system . . . . . . . . 92Delayed switch-off (on-boardcomputer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Manual control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Reading lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Interior motion sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Priming/deactivating (on-boardcomputer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Interior stowage compartmentsEmergency release . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Intermittent wipeWindscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

JJack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

KKey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . 259Checking the battery . . . . . . . . . . . 259Closing the roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Display message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226, 227Factory setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 65Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Modifying the programming . . . . . . . 64Opening the roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

KEYLESS GO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . 259Checking the battery . . . . . . . . . . . 259Closing the boot lid automatically . . 71Factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Losing the key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Modifying the programming . . . . . . . 66Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Key positionsKey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73KEYLESS GO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Kickdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101, 103, 105

LLamp

Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Lamps

see Indicator and warning lampLicence plate lighting

Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222Lighting

see LightsLights

Active light function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Automatic headlamp mode . . . . . . . 88Constant headlamp mode . . . . . . . . 87Cornering light function . . . . . . . . . . 90Dipped-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . 87Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 91Hazard warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 90Headlamp flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Main-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . 89Motorway mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Rear fog lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Switching off (display message) . . . 223Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Index



9

LIM indicator lampCruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Variable Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Load compartment load, maximum 299Loading aid (boot) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Lowering manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258Locator lighting

Switching on/off (on-board com-puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

LockingAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Emergency locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256From the inside (central lockingbutton) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Luggage compartmentPower closing feature . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Luggage compartment (rear) . . . . . . 163Luggage cover

see Boot separatorLuggage net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

MMain-beam headlamps

Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222Maintenance

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Malfunction memorysee Message memory menu

Manual gearshift program . . . . 102, 104Maximum speed

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291Memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Operation (on-board computer) . . . 114see separate operating instructions

Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Menu (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . 109

AMG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Message memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Resetting to factory settings . . . . . 116Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Standard display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Submenu overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Messagesee Display messagesee Indicator and warning lampsee Message memory menu

MirrorSun visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Display message . . . . . . . . . . 209, 227Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Own number sending . . . . . . . . . . . 168Run-on time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Telephone menu (on-board com-puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Modifying the programmingKey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64KEYLESS GO key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

MOExtended run-flat system* . 183, 275MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Operation (on-board computer) . . . 114see separate operating instructions

Multi-contour seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Multi-function display . . . . . . . . 105, 108Multi-function steering wheel . . . . . 107

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

NNavigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Navigation menu (on-board com-puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115see separate operating instructions

Notes on drivingSBCTM brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Index



10

OOil

Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Oil levelChecking (dipstick) . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Checking (on-board computer) . . . 178

On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106AMG menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Audio menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Convenience submenu . . . . . . . . . . 117Display messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Distronic menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132DVD menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Instrument cluster submenu . . . . . 117Lighting submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Message memory menu . . . . . . . . . 115Navigation menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Standard display menu . . . . . . . . . 110Telephone menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Trip computer menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 122TV menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Vehicle submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

On-board computer language . . . . . 118One-touch gearshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Operating system

see On-board computer

Outside temperature display . . . . . . 106On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Own number sending (mobilephone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

PPaint code number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Parking aid

Exterior mirror on the front-passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Parktronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Parking lampsDisplay message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Parking positionExterior mirror on the front-passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Parktronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Activating/deactivating . . . . . . . . . 144Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Range of the sensors . . . . . . . . . . . 142Warning display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warninglamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 231Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291Permanent Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . 136

PetrolMinimum grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Plastic trimCleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Power closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Power windows

see Side windowProgram selector button

Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . 100Pulling away . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

RRACE START (SL 63 AMG) . . . . . . . . . 138RACETIMER (on-board computer) . . 112Radio

Changing a station (on-boardcomputer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113see separate operating instructions

Rain sensorWindscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Range (on-board computer) . . . . . . . 123Rear foglamp

Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223Rear-view mirror

Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) . . . . . 81

Rear windowCleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Index



11

Rear window heating . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . 231

Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Remote control

Garage door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Programming (garage dooropener) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Replacing the wiper blades . . . . . . . 264Reserve

Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227Reserve fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227Fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Reset button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Restraint system

see SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem)

Restraint Systemsee SRS

Restraint systemsFor children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Reverse gear

Engaging (automatic transmission) . 99Reversing lamp

Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Roller sunblind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Roll-over bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Closing (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Closing (switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Opening (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Opening (switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Relocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Roof switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Run-on time (mobile phone) . . . . . . . 168

SSBC Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212SBCTM brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Activation/Deactivation . . . . . . . . . . 58Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Notes on driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

SeatAdjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Correct driver's seat position . . . . . . 86Storing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Seat beltFastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 238

Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77Seat ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . 230Selector lever

Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Sensotronic Brake Controlsee SBCTM brake system

Service indicatorsee Service indicator

Service products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304Windscreen washer fluid . . . . . . . . 306

SettingsCalling up a stored setting . . . . . . . . 83Factory (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 65Factory (KEYLESS GO) . . . . . . . . . . . 66Factory (on-board computer) . . . . . 116

Setting the clocksee COMAND operating instructions

Setting the datesee COMAND operating instructions

Setting the timesee COMAND operating instructions

Setting the unit (on-board computer)Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

SETUP (on-board computer) . . . . . . . 111

Index



12

Shift rangesAutomatic transmission . . . . . . . . . 100Display in the speedometer . . . . . . . 99

Side windowFault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Side windowsCleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Soft top

see RoofSpare wheel

Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Storage location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

SpeedTechnical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Speed limiterSpeedtronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

SpeedometerDigital speedometer (on-boardcomputer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Setting the unit (on-board com-puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Display message . . . . . . . . . . 212, 213Permanent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Station

see RadioStatus line (on-board computer) . . . 108

Selecting the display . . . . . . . . . . . 118Steering

Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Steering wheel

Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Buttons (on-board computer) . . . . . 107Storing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Steering wheel gearshift paddles . . 102Stowage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Armrest (under) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Locking/unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Stowage compartmentsOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Stowage spaceCup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Stowage wellBoot floor (underneath) . . . . . . . . . 161

Submenu (on-board computer) . . . . 116Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Sun visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Supplemental Restraint System

see SRSSupplemental Restraint System (SRS)

Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Surround lightingsee Locator lighting

Suspension tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141SETUP (on-board computer) . . . . . 111

Switching off the alarmATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

TTail lamps

Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Tank contents

Calling up the range (on-boardcomputer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Technical dataAcceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293, 295Vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Index



13

Vehicle weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293, 295

Telephonesee Mobile phone

TemperatureCoolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Engine oil (on-board computer) . . . 111Outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Third brake lampDisplay message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Time

Lap time (on-board computer) . . . . 112Timer (on-board computer) . . . . . . . 112TIREFIT kit

Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Total distance recorder . . . . . . . 26, 108

Resetting the trip meter . . . . . . . . . 106Tow-away protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282Towing eye

Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Traction control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Transmission output (maximum)

Telephone/two-way radio . . . . . . . 287Transport (vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282Trip computer

Menu (on-board computer) . . . . . . 122

Trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Turn signal lampsDisplay message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

TVOperation (on-board computer) . . . 114

Two-way radioInstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Tyre grip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Calling up (on-board computer) . . 186Display message . . 209, 210, 211, 225Table (see Fuel filler flap) . . . . . . . . 175see Tyre pressure

Tyre pressure loss warning system 185Tyre pressure monitor

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Tyres

Direction of rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . 183General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . 293, 295

Tyre tread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

UUnladen weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299Unlocking

Emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . 255From the inside (central unlockingbutton) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Up (display message) . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

VVariable Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Vario-roof

see RoofVehicle

Emergency unlocking . . . . . . . 255, 256Individual settings (on-board com-puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Leaving parked up . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276Vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298Vehicle electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Vehicle identification number(VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288, 289Vehicle identification plates . . . . . . 288Vehicle level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Vehicle weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

WWarning and indicator lamp

ABS/ESP® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234ABS (yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233ESP® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Index



14

ESP® Sport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234LIM (Cruise control) . . . . . . . . . . . . 125LIM (Distronic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128LIM (variable Speedtronic) . . . . . . . 134

Warning signalAudible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Washer fluid

Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Wearing seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Wheel bolts

Tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Wheels

General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Interchanging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . 293, 295

WindowsCleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Cleaning the windscreen . . . . . . . . 196Side windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

WindscreenCleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Windscreen washer fluid . . . . . . . . . 306Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Windscreen washer fluid reservoir. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181, 306Windscreen washer reservoir

Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306Windscreen washer system . . . . . . . 306

Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Replacing the wiper blades . . . . . . 264

Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189, 190Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Limiting the speed (on-board com-puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Index



Protection of the environment

15

Protection of the environment

H Environmental noteDaimler's declared policy is one of integra-ted environmental protection.Our objectives are to use the naturalresources which form the basis of our exis-tence on this planet sparingly and in a man-ner which takes the requirements of bothnature and humanity into consideration.You too can help to protect the environ-ment by operating your vehicle in an envi-ronmentally responsible manner.Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,transmission, brake and tyre wear dependon the following factors:ROperating conditions of your vehicleRYour personal driving styleYou can influence both factors.Therefore, please bear the following inmind:Operating conditionsRAvoid short trips as these increase fuelconsumption.RMake sure that the tyre pressures arealways correct.

RDo not carry any unnecessary weight inthe vehicle.RKeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel con-sumption.RRemove roof racks once you no longerneed them.RA regularly serviced vehicle will contrib-ute to environmental protection. Youshould therefore adhere to the serviceintervals.RAlways have maintenance work carriedout at a qualified specialist workshop,e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Personal driving styleRDo not depress the accelerator pedalwhen starting the engine.RDo not warm up the engine when thevehicle is stationary.RDrive carefully and maintain a safe dis-tance from the vehicle in front.RAvoid frequent, sudden acceleration.RChange gear in good time and only useeach gear for up to 2 / 3 of its maximumengine speed.RSwitch off the engine in stationary traffic.

Returning used vehiclesMercedes-Benz will take back yourMercedes-Benz to dispose of it in an environ-mentally-responsible manner, in accordancewith the European Union (EU) End of LifeVehicles Directive.The End of Life Vehicles Directive applies tovehicles of up to 3.5 t gross vehicle weight, inaccordance with national regulations. Forseveral years, Mercedes-Benz has beenmeeting all the legal requirements for adesign which allows for recycling and re-use.There is a network of return points and dis-assembly plants which can recycle your vehi-cle in an environmentally-responsible man-ner. The options for recycling vehicles andparts are constantly being developed andimproved. This means that your Mercedes-Benz will also continue to meet even theincreased recycling quotas in the future ingood time. You can obtain further informationfrom your nationalMercedes-Benz homepageor your national hotline number.

Introduction


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 15

Z

Dateiname: 6515_3089_02_buchblock.pdf; preflight

Operating safety

16

Operating safety

Safety notes

G Risk of accident and injuryAlways havework on the vehicle carried outby a qualified specialist workshop. In par-ticular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems as well as maintenancework must be carried out at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. The workshop must havethe necessary specialist knowledge andtools to carry out the work required.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you usea Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for thispurpose.

G Risk of accident and injurySome safety systems only function whilethe engine is running. Therefore, do notswitch the engine off when driving. Other-wise, the safety systems in your vehiclemay no longer function correctly andthereby not provide you or others with theintended degree of protection. There is alsoa risk that you could lose control of thevehicle and cause an accident.

G Risk of accident and injuryWork carried out incorrectly or impermissi-ble modifications to the vehicle, for exam-ple cables laid under trim, can impair thefunction of the safety systems. The safetysystems may no longer be able to protectyou or others as they are designed to do.There is also a risk that you could lose con-trol of the vehicle and cause an accident.Have all work on and modifications to thevehicle, such as installations or conver-sions, carried out at a qualified workshop.

G Risk of accidentA heavy impact to the underbody, tyres orwheels, for examplewhen bottoming out onrough terrain or driving over an obstacle athigh speed, could damage your vehicle. Asa result, you could cause an accident. Thisalso applies to vehicles which are equippedwith underbody protection.For this reason, drive slowly over obstacles,avoid bottoming out the vehicle in roughterrain and, if necessary, have your vehiclechecked at a qualified specialist workshop.

G Risk of accidentIf work on electronic equipment and itssoftware is carried out incorrectly, theequipment could stop functioning. Theelectronic systems are networked via inter-faces. Tampering with these electronic sys-tems could cause malfunctions in systemswhich have not been modified. Such mal-functions can seriously compromise thevehicle’s operating safety and your ownsafety as well.Have all work on and modifications to elec-tronic components carried out at a qualifiedworkshop.

Vehicle registrationMercedes-Benz may ask its Service Centresto carry out technical inspections on certainvehicles to improve their quality or safety.If you did not purchase your vehicle from anauthorised specialist dealer and your vehiclehas never been inspected at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, it is possible that yourvehicle is not registered in your name withMercedes-Benz. Mercedes-Benz can onlyinform you about vehicle checks if it has yourregistration data.

Introduction



Operating safety

17

It is advisable to register your vehicle with aMercedes-Benz Service Centre.Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possibleabout any change in address or vehicle own-ership.

Correct useObserve the following informationwhen usingyour vehicle:RThe safety notes in this manualRThe "Technical data" section in this manualRNational road traffic regulationsRNational road traffic licensing regulations

G Risk of injuryVarious warning stickers are affixed to yourvehicle. Their purpose is to draw your atten-tion, and the attention of others, to variousdangers. Therefore, do not remove anywarning stickers unless the sticker clearlystates that you may do so.If you remove the warning stickers, you orothers could be injured by failing to recog-nise certain dangers.

Introduction


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 17

Z


18



19

Exterior view ....................................... 20Cockpit ................................................. 22Instrument cluster .............................. 26Multi-function steering wheel ............ 30Centre console .................................... 31Overhead control panel ...................... 33Door control panel .............................. 34Stowage compartments ..................... 36

At a glance



Exterior view

20

Exterior view

At a glance



Exterior view

21

Function Page

1 Boot

Opening and closing 68

Vehicle tool kit 200

Spare wheel* 200,

2 Rear window heating 152

3 Fuel filler flap 175

Fuel requirements 175

4 Doors


Opening/closing in anemergency 255

5 Exterior mirrors 80

6 Roof


Draught stop 158

Boot separator 156

Function Page

Roller sunblind for the glassroof* 159

7 Demisting the windscreen 151

Cleaning the windows 196

8 Windscreen wipers 92

9 Opening the bonnet 176

Engine oil 178

Coolant 180

Vehicle battery 276

a Front lights 261

b Headlamp cleaning system 90

c Fitting the front towing eye 280

d Wheels and tyres 182

Tyre pressure loss warningsystem 185

Function Page

Checking the tyre pressureelectronically* 186

Flat tyre 266

e Rear lights 263

f Fitting the rear towing eye 280

At a glance

* optional



Cockpit

22

Cockpit

Cockpit, left-hand-drive vehicles

At a glance



Cockpit

23

Function Page

1 Light switch 87

2 Cleans the headlamps 90

3 Cruise control lever:

• cruise control 125

• Distronic* 127

• Speedtronic 134

4 Left gearshift paddle*: shiftdown 102

5 Instrument cluster 22,105

6 Multi-function steeringwheel 30

7 Right gearshift paddle*:shift up 102

8 Linguatronic* lever – seeseparate operating instruc-tions

9 Parktronic* display 142

Function Page

a Clock – see COMAND oper-ating instructions

b 5 PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF warning lamp 43

c Locks/unlocks the stow-age compartments 161

d Overhead control panel 33

e Glove compartment 161

f Centre console 31

g Ignition lock 73

h Horn

j Adjusts the steering wheel 79

k Combination switch: 89

• main-beam headlamps 89

• turn signals 89

• windscreen wipers 92

Function Page

l Parking brake 98

m Releases the parking brake 98

n Opens the bonnet 176

o Door control panel 34

p Opens/closes the side win-dows 93

At a glance

* optional



Cockpit

24

Cockpit, right-hand-drive vehicles

At a glance



Cockpit

25

Function Page

1 Glove compartment 161

2 Locks/unlocks the stow-age compartments 161

3 Overhead control panel 33

4 Clock – see COMAND oper-ating instructions

5 5 PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF warning lamp

6 Parktronic* display 142

7 Left gearshift paddle*: shiftdown 102

8 Cruise control lever:

• cruise control 125

• Distronic* 127

• Speedtronic 134

9 Multi-function steeringwheel 30

Function Page

a Instrument cluster 26,

b Right gearshift paddle*:shift up 102

c Linguatronic* lever – seeseparate operating instruc-tions

d Cleans the headlamps 90

e Light switch 87

f Door control panel 34

g Opens/closes the side win-dows 93

h Opens the bonnet 176

j Releases the parking brake 98

k Horn

l Adjusts the steering wheel 79

m Ignition lock 73

n Parking brake 98

Function Page

o Combination switch: 89

• main-beam headlamps 89

• turn signals 89

• windscreen wipers 92

p Centre console 31

At a glance

* optional



Instrument cluster

26

Instrument cluster

Instrument cluster, kilometres

At a glance



Instrument cluster

27

Function Page

1 Coolant temperaturegauge with:

D Coolant warning lamp 236

2 Speedometer with:

3 Brake system warn-ing lamp 235

v ABS/ESP® warninglamp 234

E DTR* warning lamp(white/red)1 131

LK Turn signal indi-cator lamps 89

3 Multi-function display inthe speedometer with: 108

Digital speedometer or out-side temperature display2 111

Total distance recorder 110

Function Page

Stored speed display for:

• Cruise control or Dis-tronic*

125,127

• Speedtronic 134

4 Reset button

5 Rev counter with: 106

A Main-beam indicatorlamp 89

± Engine diagnosticswarning lamp 237

C Roll-over bar warninglamp 237

- ABS warning lamp 233

1 SRS warning lamp 235

< Seat belt warninglamp 238

Function Page

X Tyre pressure warn-ing lamp 238

6 Multi-function display inthe rev counter with:

Trip meter 110

Display for:

• Selector lever position 99

• Drive program 100,101

7 Fuel gauge with:

4 Reserve tank warninglamp 239

Arrow showing fuel fillercap location: cap is to therear on the right.

1 On vehicles without Distronic*, the symbol lights up briefly but has no function.2 Vehicles for the United Kingdom: the outside temperature is always displayed.

At a glance

* optional



Instrument cluster

28

Instrument cluster, miles

At a glance



Instrument cluster

29

Function Page

1 Coolant temperaturegauge with:

D Coolant warning lamp 236

2 Speedometer with:

3 Brake system warn-ing lamp 235

v ABS/ESP® warninglamp 234

E DTR* warning lamp(white/red)3 131

LK Turn signal indi-cator lamps 89

3 Multi-function display inthe speedometer with: 108

Digital speedometer or out-side temperature display4 111

Total distance recorder 110

Function Page

Stored speed display for:

• cruise control or Dis-tronic*

125,127

• Speedtronic 134

4 Reset button

5 Rev counter with: 106

A Main-beam indicatorlamp 89

± Engine diagnosticswarning lamp 237

C Roll-over bar warninglamp 237

- ABS warning lamp 233

1 SRS warning lamp 235

< Seat belt warninglamp 238

Function Page

X Tyre pressure warn-ing lamp 238

6 Multi-function display inthe rev counter with:

Trip meter 110

Display for:

• Selector lever position 99

• Drive program 100,101

7 Fuel gauge with:

4 Reserve tank warninglamp 239

Arrow showing fuel fillercap location: cap is to therear on the right.

3 On vehicles without DISTRONIC*, the symbol lights up briefly but has no function.4 Vehicles for the United Kingdom: the outside temperature is always displayed.

At a glance

* optional



Multi-function steering wheel

30

Multi-function steering wheel Function Page

1 Multi-function display in thespeedometer 108

2 Multi-function display in therev counter 108

3 st Accepts orrejects a call* 123

æ-

• Selects submenus in theSettings... menu 116

• Sets values

• Sets the volume

Operates the RACETIMER5 112

4 èÿ Selects menu:scroll forward and back 109

Function Page

jk Press briefly toscroll forward and back in amenu. 109

In the Audio/TV*/DVDmenu: selects a stored sta-tion, an audio track or avideo scene. 113

In the Telephone* menu:switches to the phone bookand selects a name orphone number. 124

jk Press andhold: In the Audio/TV*/DVD menu: selects thenext/previous station orselects an audio track usingrapid scrolling. 113

In the Telephone* menu:starts rapid scrollingthrough the telephonebook. 124

5 Only on AMG vehicles.

At a glance

* optional



Centre console

31

Centre console

Lower sectionFunction Page

1 Selector lever 99

2 Deactivates/activatesParktronic* 142

3 Adjusts the exterior mirrors 80

4 Sets ABC* 139

5 Deactivates tow-away pro-tection 60

6 Folds out the exterior mir-rors electrically* 80

7 Opens/closes the roof 154

Roll-over bar buttons 46

8 Deactivates the interiormotion sensor* 61

9 Sets the vehicle level 140

Function Page

a Deactivates/activatesESP® 54

b Distronic*: sets the speci-fied distance 130

c Distronic*: switches thedistance warning functionon/off 131

d Selects the drive program 99,102

At a glance

* optional



Centre console

32

Upper section Function Page

1 Locks the vehicle centrally 68

2 Unlocks the vehicle cen-trally 68

3 Switches the hazard warn-ing lamps on/off 90

4 Adjusts the centre and sideair vents 149

5 Operates COMAND – seeseparate operating instruc-tions 109

6 Cup holder, right 159

7 KEYLESS GO button* 73

8 Ashtray 165

Function Page

9 Operates the automatic airconditioning 145

a Cup holder, left 159

At a glance

* optional



Overhead control panel

33

Overhead control panel Function Page

1 X To switch the left-hand reading lamp on/off 92

2 Temperature sensor for theautomatic air conditioning

3 X To switch the right-hand reading lamp on/off 92

4 ð To switch the interiorlighting on/off 91

5 Rear-view mirror 80

6 Transmitter buttons for thegarage door opener* 169

7 ¤ To switch automaticinterior lighting control on/off 91

At a glance

* optional



Door control panel

34

Door control panel Function Page

1 Opens the door 67

2 Opens/closes the side win-dows 93

3 Stores settings for the seat,exterior mirrors and steer-ing wheel 82

4 Switches AIRSCARF* on/off 76

5 Adjusts seat heating* 77

Adjusts seat ventilation* 77

6 Adjusts the seat 74

7 Opens the boot lid 68

Closes the boot lid* 70

At a glance

* optional



35



Stowage compartments

36


At a glance




37

Function Page

1 Glove compartment 161

2 Stowage compartmentwithfirst-aid kit under the front-passenger seat 202

3 Stowage compartment inthe door 163

4 Stowage compartment inthe rear compartment 163

5 Side stowage compartmentin the boot

6 Stowage well under theboot floor 200

Loading aid 164

Boot separator 156

7 Side stowage compartmentin the boot

8 Stowage compartment inthe rear compartment 163

Function Page

9 Stowage compartment inthe door 163

a Stowage compartmentwithfire extinguisher under thedriver's seat* 201

b Luggage net in the front-passenger footwell 161

c Stowage compartmentunder the armrest 162

d Luggage compartment* inthe rear compartment 163

At a glance

* optional



38



39

Occupant safety .................................. 40Driving safety systems ....................... 53Anti-theft systems .............................. 59

Safety



Occupant safety

40

Occupant safety

Notes on occupant safetySeat belts, together with belt tensioners, beltforce limiters and airbags, are coordinatedrestraint systems. They reduce the risk ofinjury in defined accident situations andthereby increase occupant safety. However,seat belts and airbags generally do not pro-tect against objects penetrating the vehiclefrom the outside.To ensure that the restraint systems candeliver their full potential protection, youshould ensure that:Rthe seat and head restraint are adjustedproperly (Y page 74)Rthe seat belt has been fastened properly(Y page 83)Rthe airbags can inflate properly if they aredeployed (Y page 43)Rthe steering wheel is adjusted properly(Y page 78)Rthe restraint systems have not been modi-fied

i An airbag increases the protection ofvehicle occupants wearing a seat belt.

However, airbags are only an additionalrestraint system which complements, butdoes not replace, the seat belt. All vehicleoccupants must wear their seat belt cor-rectly at all times, even if the vehicle isequipped with airbags. This is because - onthe one hand - airbags are not deployed inall types of accident, as in some situationsairbag deployment would not increase theprotection afforded to vehicle occupants,provided they are wearing their seat beltcorrectly. On the other hand, airbag deploy-ment only provides increased protection ifthe seat belt is worn correctly because:Rthe seat belt helps to keep the vehicleoccupant in the best position in relationto the airbagRfor example, in a head-on collision, theseat belt can more adequately preventthe occupant from being propelledtowards the force of the impact, and isthus better suited to prevent injury

Therefore, in accident situations where anairbag is deployed, it only provides protec-tion in addition to the seat belt if the seatbelt is being worn correctly.

G Risk of accident and injuryAlways have maintenance work carried outat a qualified specialist workshop whichhas the necessary specialist knowledgeand tools to carry out the work required.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you usea Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for thispurpose.In particular, work relevant to safety or onsafety-related systems must be carried outat a qualified specialist workshop. If thiswork is not carried out correctly, the oper-ating safety of your vehicle may be affec-ted. There is a risk of an accident and injury.

G Risk of injuryThe restraint systemmay not work as inten-ded if the following components have beenmodified or work on these components hasnot been performed correctly:Rrestraint system, consisting of the seatbelts and anchorages, belt tensioners,belt force limiters, airbagsRwiringRnetworked electronic systemsAirbags or belt tensioners could then fail,e.g. in the event of an accident in which the

Safety



Occupant safety

41

deceleration force would normally be highenough to trigger the systems, or theycould be triggered unintentionally. Nevercarry out any modifications on the restraintsystems.Never tamper with electronic componentsand their software.

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)The SRS reduces the risk of occupants com-ing into contact with the vehicle's interior inthe event of an accident. It can also reducethe forces to which occupants are exposedduring an accident.The SRS consists of:RThe1 warning lampRbelt tensionersRbelt force limitersRairbags

The11 warning lampThe SRS functions are checked regularlywhen you turn on the ignition and when theengine is running. Malfunctions can thereforebe detected in good time.

The1 warning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the ignition is switchedon. It goes out no later than a few secondsafter the engine is started.G Risk of injuryIf SRS is malfunctioning, individual systemsmay be activated unintentionally or not betriggered in the event of an accident with ahigh rate of vehicle deceleration.A malfunction has occurred if the1warning lamp:Rdoes not light up when you switch on theignitionRdoes not go out after the engine has beenrunning for a few secondsRlights up again once the engine is runningIn this case, have SRS checked immedi-ately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Triggering of belt tensioners, belt forcelimiters and airbagsIn the event of a collision, the sensor in theairbag control unit evaluates important phys-ical data such as duration, direction and forceof the vehicle deceleration or acceleration.Based on the evaluation of this data and

depending on the vehicle's rate of longitudi-nal deceleration in a collision, in the firststage the airbag control unit pre-emptivelytriggers the belt tensioners.

i The belt tensioners can only be triggeredif the belt tongue is correctly engaged in theseat belt buckle.

The front airbags are only deployed if there isan even higher rate of vehicle deceleration ina longitudinal direction.Your vehicle has adaptive, dual stage frontairbags. When the first activation threshold isreached, the front airbag is filled with enoughpropellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries.The front airbag is only fully inflated if a sec-ond threshold is reached within a few milli-seconds, due to the control unit havingdetected further deceleration.

Criteria for triggering belt tensioners andairbagsIn the first stage of a collision, the airbag con-trol unit evaluates the duration and directionof vehicle acceleration or deceleration inorder to determine whether it is necessary totrigger the belt tensioner and/or airbag.The belt tensioner and airbag triggeringthresholds are variable and are adapted to therate of deceleration of the vehicle. This proc-

Safety


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 41

Z


Occupant safety

42

ess is pre-emptive in nature as the airbagmust be deployed during – and not at the endof – the collision.

i Airbags are not deployed in all types ofaccidents. They are controlled by complexsensor technology and evaluation logic.This process is pre-emptive in nature asairbag deployment must take place duringthe impact and must be adapted to providecalculated, additional protection for thevehicle occupants. Not all airbags aredeployed in an accident.The different airbag systems work inde-pendently of each other. However, eachindividual system depends on the type ofaccident determined by the control systemin the first stages of the collision (head-oncollision, side impact, rear-end collisionand overturn) and the extent of the acci-dent (in particular, the vehicle's rate ofdeceleration or acceleration).

The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelera-tion and the direction of the force are basi-cally determined by:Rthe distribution of forces during the colli-sionRthe collision angle

Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehi-cleRthe characteristics of the object with whichthe vehicle has collided, e.g. the other vehi-cle

Factorswhich can only be seen andmeasuredafter the collision has taken place do not playa decisive role in the deployment of an airbag,nor do they provide an indication of it.The vehicle may be deformed significantly,e. g. on the bonnet or the wing, without anairbag being deployed. This happens if onlyparts which are relatively easily deformed areaffected and the necessary deceleration doesnot occur. Conversely, airbags may bedeployed even though the vehicle suffers onlyminor deformations. This is the case if, forexample, very rigid vehicle parts such as lon-gitudinal body members are affected and suf-ficient deceleration occurs as a result.

Belt tensioners, belt force limitersThe seat belts are fitted with belt tensioners.

! Do not engage the seat belt tongue in thebuckle on the front-passenger seat if theseat is not occupied. Otherwise the belttensioner could be activated in an emer-gency.

If the seat belt is also equipped with a beltforce limiter, the force exerted by the seatbelt on the seat occupant is reduced.Belt tensioners tighten the seat belts in anaccident, pulling themclose against the body.

i Belt tensioners do not correct incorrectseat positions or incorrectly fastened seatbelts.Belt tensioners do not pull occupants backtowards the backrest.

The belt force limiters are synchronised withthe front airbags, which spread the forcesexerted by the belt force limiters on the occu-pant over a greater area.The seat belts have an automatic comfort-fitfeature. This reduces the retraction force ofthe seat belts, which results in increased seatbelt comfort.When the ignition is switched on, the belt ten-sioner is triggered:Ronly if the restraint systems are operational(the1 warning lamp lights up after theignition is switched on and goes out oncethe engine is running)(Y page 41)Rfor each three-point seat belt in the front ofthe vehicle when the belt tongue isengaged in the buckle

Safety



Occupant safety

43

Rin the event of a head-on or rear-end colli-sion if the vehicle decelerates or acceler-ates rapidly in a longitudinal directionduring the initial stages of the impactRin certain situations if the vehicle over-turns, and the system determines that itcan provide additional protectionRon the front-passenger side only if thefront-passenger seat is occupied and thebelt tongue is engaged in the buckle

If the belt tensioners are triggered you willhear a bang, which will not cause any harm toyour hearing, and a small amount of powdermay also be released. The1warning lamplights up.G Risk of injuryIf the seat belt tensioners have been trig-gered, they provide no additional protec-tion in the event of another accident.Therefore, have belt tensioners which havebeen triggered replaced at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.Comply with safety regulations when dis-posing of belt tensioners. Any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre can provide details ofthese regulations.

AirbagsAirbag deployment slows down and restrictsthe movement of the vehicle occupant.If the airbags are deployed you will hear abang, which will not cause any harm to yourhearing, and a small amount of powder mayalso be released. The1 warning lamplights up.The SRS/AIRBAG identification indicates thelocation of the airbags.G Risk of injuryAirbags provide additional protection; theyare not, however, a substitute for the seatbelts.Observe the following notes to reduce therisk of serious or even fatal injury if an air-bag is deployed:Rall vehicle occupants — in particular preg-nant women — must wear their seat beltcorrectly at all times and lean backagainst the backrest, which should bepositioned as close to the vertical as pos-sible. The head restraint must supportthe back of the head at about eye level.Ralways secure children less than 1.50 mtall or under 12 years of age in suitablechild restraint systems.

Rall vehicle occupants must select a seatposition that is as far away from the air-bag as possible. The driver's seat posi-tion must allow the vehicle to be drivensafely. The driver's chest should be as faraway from themiddle of the driver's frontairbag cover as possible.Rmove the front-passenger seat as farback as possible, in particular, if a childis secured in a child restraint system onthe seat.Rvehicle occupants – in particular, chil-dren – must not lean their head on thearea of the window from which a head/thorax airbag is deployed.Rrearward-facing child restraint systemsmust not be fitted to the front-passengerseat unless the front-passenger front air-bag has been disabled. The front-passenger front airbag is disabled if achild restraint system with automaticchild seat recognition is fitted to thefront-passenger seat. The5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warninglamp must be constantly lit.If you secure a forward-facing childrestraint system to the front-passenger

Safety


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 43

Z


Occupant safety

44

seat, youmust move the front-passengerseat as far back as possible.Rmake sure there are no heavy or sharp-edged objects in pockets of clothing.Rdo not lean forwards, e.g. over the coverof the driver's front airbag, particularlywhen the vehicle is in motion.Rdo not put your feet on the dashboard.Ronly hold the steering wheel by the rim.This allows the airbag to inflate fully. Youcould be injured if the airbag is deployedand you are holding the inside of thesteering wheel.Rdo not lean on the doors from inside thevehicle.Rmake sure that there are no people, ani-mals or objects between the vehicleoccupants and the area of deployment ofthe airbag.Rdo not place any objects between theseat backrest and the door.Rdo not hang any hard objects, for exam-ple coat hangers, on the grab handles orcoat hooks.Rdo not attach accessories, e.g. cup hold-ers, to the doors.

It is not possible to rule out the risk of inju-ries caused by an airbag due to the highspeed at which the airbag is required todeploy.

G Risk of injuryThe airbag's functionality can only be guar-anteed if the following parts are not cov-ered and no badges or stickers areattached to them:Rpadded steering wheel bossRfront-passenger front airbag coverRdoor trims

G Risk of injuryWhen an airbag deploys, a small amount ofpowder is released. The powder may causeshort-term breathing difficulties to personssuffering from asthma or other pulmonaryconditions.In order to prevent potential breathing dif-ficulties you should leave the vehicle assoon as it is safe to do so. You can also openthe window to allow fresh air to enter theinterior. The powder does not constitute ahealth hazard and does not indicate thatthere is a fire in the vehicle.

G Risk of injuryThe airbag parts are hot after the airbag hasbeen deployed. Do not touch them, other-wise you may burn yourself.Have the airbags checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. Otherwise, occupantsare not protected by the airbags in theevent of another accident.

Front airbagsThe front airbags are designed to increaseprotection for the driver's and front-passenger head and chest.The driver's front airbag and front-passengerfront airbag are deployed:Rat the start of an accident with a high rateof vehicle acceleration or deceleration in alongitudinal directionRif the system determines that airbagdeployment can offer additional protectionto that provided by the seat beltRif the seat belt is fastenedRindependently of other airbags in the vehi-cleRif the vehicle overturns, but only if the sys-tem detects high vehicle deceleration in alongitudinal direction

Safety



Occupant safety

45

1 Driver's front airbag2 Front-passenger front airbagDriver's front airbag1 deploys in front of thesteering wheel; front-passenger front airbag2 deploys in front of and above the glovecompartment.Front-passenger front airbag2 is onlydeployed if the front-passenger seat is occu-pied or if the5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFFwarning lamp in the centre console is not lit.(Y page 49) This means that a child restraintsystem with automatic child seat recogni-tion* has not been fitted to the front-passenger seat or has been fitted incorrectly.

! Do not place heavy objects on the front-passenger seat. The system might errone-ously interpret this as a person occupying

the seat and the restraint systems on thefront-passenger seatmay then be triggeredin the event of an accident and would haveto be replaced.

Head/thorax airbagsHead/thorax airbags are intended to offeradditional protection for the head and thoraxwhen deployed. However, they do not protectthe arms.

1 Head/thorax airbagHead/thorax airbags1 inflate in the doorarea.

Head/thorax airbags1 are deployed:Ron the side on which an impact occursRat the start of an accident with a high rateof lateral vehicle deceleration or accelera-tion, e.g. in a side impactRif the system determines that airbagdeployment can offer additional protectionto that provided by the seat beltRif the seat belt is fastenedRindependently of the front airbagsRindependently of the belt tensionersRon the front-passenger side only if thefront-passenger seat occupancy recogni-tion system detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied

Safety

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 45

Z


Occupant safety

46

Roll-over bar

G Risk of injuryMake sure that the roll-over bar's range ofmovement is free to prevent injuries whenthe roll-over bar is extended or retracted.

The roll-over bar extends automatically if sys-tems detect that the vehicle is in danger ofrolling over to the side. You will hear a ratch-eting noise when the roll-over bar extends.You can also extend and retract the roll-overbar manually with the buttons.

! If the ambient temperature drops below-5 †, you must extend the roll-over barmanually. Otherwise, the hydraulics couldbe damaged.

Extending and retracting the roll-overbar manually

1 Retracts the roll-over bar2 Extending the roll-over bar

G Risk of injuryIf theC roll-over bar warning lamp in theinstrument cluster is still on a long timeafter starting the engine, this means a faulthas occurred. The Raise roll-over barmessage appears in the multi-function dis-play.In this case, the roll-over bar is not exten-ded automatically in the event of an acci-dent if systems identify a risk of the vehicleoverturning sideways. You or other vehicleoccupants could be injured seriously oreven fatally. For safety reasons, therefore,

drive with the roll-over bar extended man-ually until the fault has been rectified.Have your vehicle checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop which has the neces-sary specialist knowledge and tools to carryout the work required. Mercedes-Benz rec-ommends that you use a Mercedes-BenzService Centre for this purpose. In particu-lar, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

X Make sure the key is in position 2 in theignition lock.

Extending the roll-over barX Lift the hardtop switch.X Press and hold button2 until the roll-overbar is extended.

i If you have extended the roll-over barusing the button, it will be retracted andextended automatically when the roof isclosed and opened.

Safety



Occupant safety

47

Retracting the roll-over barX If the roll-over bar was extended man-ually: lift the hardtop switch.

X Press and hold button1 until the roll-overbar is retracted.

X If the roll-over bar was extended auto-matically: press and hold button2 untilthe roll-over bar engages audibly.

X Press and hold button1 until the roll-overbar is retracted.

Children in the vehicleIf a child is travelling in your vehicle, securethe child using a child restraint system whichis appropriate to the size and age of the childand recommended for Mercedes-Benz vehi-cles. Ensure that the child is strapped inthroughout the trip.You can obtain information about the correctchild restraint system from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

i It is advisable to use Mercedes-Benz careproducts to clean child restraint systems.Information about this can be obtainedfrom any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

G Risk of injuryDo not leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system. Children could injurethemselves on parts of the vehicle. Theycould also be seriously or even fatallyinjured by prolonged exposure to extremeheat or cold.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The metallic parts of thechild restraint systemcould heat up and thechild could be burned by them.If a child opens a door, the child or otherpersons could be injured as a result. Thechild could get out and be injured in theprocess or be injured by a passing vehicle.Also observe the notes on SBC Hold. Youwill find further information in the index.

G Risk of injuryAnunsecured or incorrectly positioned loadincreases the risk of injury to the child inthe event of:Ran accidentRa braking manoeuvreRa sudden change of direction

Do not carry heavy or hard objects insidethe vehicle unless they are secured. Youwill find further information in the indexunder "Practical tips".

Child restraint systemsMercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyuse the child restraint systems listed on(Y page 51).G Risk of injuryTo reduce the risk of serious or even fatalinjury to the child in the event of a suddenchange in direction, braking or an accident:RChildren less than 1.50 m tall and undertwelve years of age must always besecured in special child restraint systemson a suitable vehicle seat. This is neces-sary because the seat belts are notdesigned for children of this size.RIf you secure a child restraint systemwithout automatic child seat recognitionto the front-passenger seat, you mustmove the front-passenger seat as farback as possible.RChildren must never travel sitting on thelap of another occupant. Due to the

Safety


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 47

Z


Occupant safety

48

forces occurring in the event of a suddenchange of direction, heavy braking or anaccident, it would not be possible torestrain the child. The child could bethrown against parts of the vehicle inte-rior and be seriously or even fatallyinjured.

G Risk of injuryIf the child restraint system is not correctlyfitted to a suitable vehicle seat, it cannotperform its protective function. The childcannot be restrained in the event of a sud-den change of direction, heavy braking oran accident. This may lead to serious oreven fatal injuries. For this reason, whenfitting a child restraint system, observe themanufacturer's installation instructionsand the correct use of the child restraintsystem.The entire base of the child restraint systemmust always rest on the seat cushion.Never place objects, e.g. a cushion, underthe child restraint system.Only use child restraint systems with theiroriginal covers. Only replace damaged cov-ers with genuine Mercedes-Benz covers.

For safety reasons, you should only usechild restraint systems which have beenapproved for use in Mercedes-Benz vehi-cles.

Child seat on the front-passenger seat

Warning on the front-passenger sun visor

Warning symbol for a rearward-facing childrestraint system

G Risk of injuryIf the front-passenger front airbag is notdisabled:Ra child secured in a child restraint systemon the front-passenger seat could beseriously and even fatally injured by thefront-passenger front airbag deploying.This is especially a risk if the child is inthe immediate vicinity of the front-passenger front airbag when it deploys.Ra child must never be secured on thefront-passenger seat in a rearward-facingchild restraint system.Ralways move the front-passenger seat tothe rearmost position if you secure a

Safety



Occupant safety

49

child in a forward-facing child restraintsystem on the front-passenger seat.

The front-passenger front airbag is not dis-abled:Rno child restraint system with automaticchild seat recognition is fittedRif the5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFFwarning lamp on the centre console isnot lit

To draw attention to this danger, there is anappropriate warning sticker on the dash-board as well as on both sides of the sunvisor on the front-passenger side.Information about recommended childrestraint systems is available at anyMercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Automatic child seat recognition on thefront-passenger seat

15 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warninglamp

The front-passenger seat sensor system forchild restraint systems detects whether aspecial Mercedes-Benz child seat with auto-matic child seat recognition has been fitted.In such cases,5 PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF indicator lamp1 lights up. The front-passenger airbag is deactivated.G Risk of injuryIf the5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warn-ing lamp does not light up when the childrestraint system is fitted, the front-passenger front airbag has not been disa-bled. If the front-passenger front airbag is

deployed, the child could be seriously oreven fatally injured.Proceed as follows:Rdo not use a rearward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passengerseat.

orRonly use a forward-facing child restraintsystem on the front-passenger seat andmove the front-passenger seat to its rear-most position.Rhave the automatic child seat recognitionchecked at a qualified specialist work-shop.

To ensure that the automatic child seat rec-ognition on the front-passenger seat func-tions correctly, never place objects (suchas a cushion) under the child restraint sys-tem. The entire base of the child restraintsystem must always rest on the seat cush-ion. An incorrectly fitted child restraint sys-tem cannot perform its intended protectivefunction in the event of an accident, andcould lead to injuries.

i The head/thorax airbag and the belt ten-sioner on the front-passenger side are still

Safety


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 49

Z


Occupant safety

50

active even if the front-passenger front air-bag is disabled.

G Risk of injuryDo not place items of electronic equipmenton the front-passenger seat, e.g.:Rlaptops, when switched onRmobile phonesRcards with transponders, e.g. ski passesor access cards

Signals from electronic equipment cancause interference in the automatic childseat recognition sensor system. This canlead to a system malfunction. This maycause the5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFFwarning lamp to light up without therebeing a child seat with automatic child seatrecognition fitted. This means that thefront-passenger airbag does not deployduring an accident. It is also possible that

the5PASSENGERAIRBAGOFFwarninglamp will not light up briefly if you turn thekey in the ignition lock to position 2.

Suitable positioning of the child restraint system

Weight categories and ages Child restraint system on the front-passenger seat

Group 0: up to 10 kg;Up to approximately 9 months

as recommended6, 7

Group 0+: up to 13 kg;Up to approximately 18 months

as recommended6, 7

Group I: 9 to 18 kg;Between approximately 8 months and 4 years

as recommended6, 7

Category II/III: 15 to 36 kgBetween approximately 3½ and 12 years

Universal7 or as recommended

6 Only use child restraint systems featuring automatic child seat recognition.7 Move the front-passenger seat to the rearmost position.

Safety



Occupant safety

51

"Universal" category child restraint systemscan be recognised by their orange approvallabel.

Example of an approval label on the child restraintsystem

Recommended child restraint systems

Weight categories andages

Manufacturer Type Approval number Daimler order num-ber

Automatic child seatrecognition

Group 0: up to 10 kg;Up to approximately9 months

Britax-Römer BABY SAFEPLUS8

E1 03 301146 A 000 970 10 00 Yes

Group 0+: up to 13 kg;Up to approximately18 months

Britax-Römer BABY SAFEPLUS8

E1 03 301146 A 000 970 10 00 Yes

8 Move the front-passenger seat to the foremost position.

Safety


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 51

Z


Occupant safety

52

Weight categories andages

Manufacturer Type Approval number Daimler order num-ber

Automatic child seatrecognition

Group I: 9 to 18 kg;Between approximately8 months and 4 years

Britax-Römer DUO PLUS8 E1 03 301133 A 000 970 11 00 Yes

A 000 970 16 00 No9

Group II/III: 15 to 36 kg;Between approximately3½ and 12 years

Britax-Römer KID8 E1 03 301148 A 000 970 12 00 Yes

A 000 970 17 00 No9

8 Move the front-passenger seat to the foremost position.9 For child restraint systems without automatic child seat recognition, move the front-passenger seat to the rearmost position.

Safety



Driving safety systems

53


Overview of driving safety systemsIn this section, you will find information aboutthe following driving safety systems:RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)RBAS (Brake Assist System)RAdaptive brake lampsRESP® (Electronic Stability Program)RSBCTM brake system (Sensotronic BrakeControl)

i In wintry road conditions, always use win-ter tyres (M+S tyres) and, where necessary,snow chains. Only in this way will the driv-ing safety systems described in this sectionwork as effectively as possible.

G Risk of accidentThe risk of an accident is significantlyincreased by driving too fast. This is partic-ularly the case when cornering on wet andslippery roads and when driving too closeto the vehicle in front.The driving safety systems described in thissection cannot reduce this risk nor overridethe laws of physics.

For this reason, always adapt your drivingstyle to suit prevailing road and weatherconditions. Maintain sufficient distancefrom other road users and objects on theroad.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)ABS regulates brake pressure in such a waythat the wheels do not lock when you brake.This allows you to continue steering the vehi-cle when braking.ABS works from a speed of about 8 km/hupwards, regardless of road surface condi-tions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, evenwhen you only brake gently.G Risk of accidentDo not depress the brake pedal severaltimes in quick succession (pumping).Depress the brake firmly and evenly. Pump-ing the brake pedal reduces the brakingeffect.

BrakingIf ABS intervenes while you are braking, thev warning lamp flashes in the instrument

cluster. You will not feel the brake pedal pul-sating as this happens.

X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress thebrake pedal with force until the braking sit-uation is over.

X To make a full brake application:depress the brake pedal with full force.

G Risk of accidentIf ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock whenbraking. This limits the steerability of thevehicle when braking and the braking dis-tance may increase.If ABS is deactivated due to a malfunction,then BAS and ESP are also deactivated.There is an increased risk of your vehicleskidding in certain situations.You should always adapt your driving styleto suit the prevailing road and weather con-ditions.

Safety


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 53

Z



54

BAS (Brake Assist)BAS operates in emergency braking situa-tions. If you depress the brake pedal quickly,BAS automatically boosts the braking force,thus shortening the stopping distance.X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed untilthe emergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once yourelease the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.G Risk of accidentIf BAS has malfunctioned, the braking sys-tem remains available with full brake boost-ing effect. However, braking force is notautomatically increased in emergencybraking situations and the stopping dis-tance may increase.

Adaptive brake lampsi Adaptive brake lamps are only available incertain countries.

If you brake sharply from a speed of morethan 50 km/h or if braking is assisted by BAS,the brake lamps flash rapidly. In this way,traffic travelling behind you is warned in aneven more noticeable manner.After bringing the vehicle to a halt after per-forming such a braking manoeuvre, when thebrake pedal is pressed again the brake lampswill once again light up continuously.

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)ESP® monitors driving stability and traction,i.e. power transmission between tyres andthe road surface.If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviatingfrom the direction desired by the driver, oneor more wheels are braked to stabilise thevehicle. The engine output is also modified, ifnecessary, to keep the vehicle on the desiredcourse within physical limits. ESP® assiststhe driver when pulling away on wet or slip-pery roads. ESP® can also stabilise the vehi-cle during braking.

When ESP® intervenes, thev warninglamp flashes in the instrument cluster.G Risk of accidentIf thev warning lamp in the instrumentcluster flashes, proceed as follows:RDo not deactivate ESP® under any cir-cumstances.ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as faras necessary when pulling away.RAdapt your driving style to suit the pre-vailing road and weather conditions.

The vehicle could otherwise go into a skid.ESP® cannot reduce the risk of an accidentif you drive too fast. ESP® cannot overridethe laws of physics.

! If:Rthe vehicle is being towed with the frontor rear axle raisedRthe parking brake is being tested using adynamometer

the ignition must be switched off (key inposition 0 or 1 in the ignition lock). Appli-cation of the brakes by ESP® could other-wise destroy the brake system on the frontor rear axle.

Safety




55

i Only use wheels with the recommendedtyre sizes. Only then will ESP® functionproperly.

Traction controlTraction control is part of ESP®.Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi-vidually if they spin. This enables you to pullaway and accelerate on slippery surfaces, forexample if the road surface is slippery on oneside.Traction control remains active when youdeactivate ESP®.G Risk of accidentTraction control cannot reduce the risk ofan accident if you drive too fast. Tractioncontrol cannot override the laws of physics.

Activating/deactivating ESP®, (exceptSL 63 AMG)ESP® is activated automatically when theengine is running.

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the fol-lowing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravel

G Risk of accidentActivate ESP® as soon as the situationsdescribed above no longer apply. ESP® willotherwise not be able to stabilise the vehi-cle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheelstarts to spin.

If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.Rengine torque is not limited and the drivewheels are able to spin. The spinningwheels produce a cutting effect for bettertraction.Rtraction control is still activated.RESP® still provides support when youbrake.

i If ESP® is deactivated and one or morewheels start to spin, thevwarning lampin the instrument cluster flashes. In such

situations ESP® will not stabilise the vehi-cle.

1 To deactivate/activate ESP®

X To deactivate: press button1.Thev warning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up.

G Risk of accidentIf thev warning lamp in the instrumentcluster is continuously lit when the engineis running, ESP® is deactivated or not avail-able due to a malfunction. There is anincreased risk of your vehicle skidding incertain situations.You should always adapt your driving styleto suit the prevailing road and weather con-ditions.

Safety


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 55

Z



56

X To activate: press button1.Thev warning lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

SL 63 AMG

Activating/deactivating ESP® SportESP® is activated automatically when theengine is running.It may be best to activate ESP® Sport in thefollowing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravel

Otherwise, you should only use ESP® Sporton designated race circuits.G Risk of accidentDeactivate ESP® Sport and activate ESP®as soon as the situations described aboveno longer apply. ESP® Sport will otherwiseonly be able to stabilise the vehicle to alimited degree if the vehicle starts to skidor a wheel starts to spin.

If you activate ESP® Sport:RESP® only improves driving stability to alimited degree.Rengine torque is only restricted to a limiteddegree and the drive wheels are able tospin. The spinning wheels produce a cut-ting effect for better traction.Rtraction control is still activated.RESP® still provides support when you brakefirmly.

i If ESP® Sport is activated and one ormorewheels start to spin, thevwarning lampin the instrument cluster flashes. ESP® onlystabilises the vehicle to a limited degree.

1 Activating/deactivating ESP® Sport

X To activate: briefly press button1.Thev warning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up. The message ESP Sportappears in the multi-function display.

X To deactivate: briefly press button1.Thev warning lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out. The message ESP Onappears in the multi-function display.

To deactivate/activate ESP®

ESP® is activated automatically when theengine is running.It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the fol-lowing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravel

G Risk of accidentActivate ESP® as soon as the situationsdescribed above no longer apply. ESP® willotherwise not be able to stabilise the vehi-cle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheelstarts to spin.

Safety




57

If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.Rengine torque is no longer limited and thedrive wheels are able to spin. The spinningwheels produce a cutting effect for bettertraction.Rtraction control is still activated.RESP® still provides support when you brakefirmly.

i If ESP® is deactivated and one or morewheels start to spin, thevwarning lampin the instrument cluster does not flash. Insuch situations ESP® will not stabilise thevehicle.

1 To deactivate/activate ESP®

X To deactivate: press button1 until thev and¯warning lamps in the instru-ment cluster light up.Themessage ESP Off appears in themulti-function display.

G Risk of accidentESP® is deactivated if thev and¯warning lamps in the instrument cluster arelit continuously when the engine is running.There is an increased risk of your vehicleskidding in certain situations.You should always adapt your driving styleto suit prevailing road and weather condi-tions.

X To activate: briefly press button1.Thev and¯ warning lamps in theinstrument cluster go out. The messageESP On appears in the multi-function dis-play.

SBC™ brake systemThe SBCTM brake system combines ahydraulic brake systemwith an electronically-controlled brake boosting effect. This pro-vides increased braking safety and comfort.In addition to the braking function, SBCTM alsoprovides the SBC Hold convenience function(Y page 137).G Risk of accidentThe3 indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up if there is a malfunction inthe SBCTM brake system or the brakes.Always observe the notes in the multi-func-tion display. Look up "SBCTM brake system"in the index and under that heading the"Malfunction" entry and follow the proce-dure described there in the event of a mal-function.If the SBCTM brake system malfunctions,Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe vehicle transported on a transporter ortrailer. If this is not possible, a towbar mustbe used. Always comply with the maximumpermissible speed and distance for towingin your country.

Safety


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 57

Z



58

G Risk of accidentIf there is a fault in the power supply or thevehicle's electrical system, the SBCTM

brake system enters emergency modebecause it requires electrical power tooperate. Greater braking force will then berequired and the brake pedal travel andbraking distance will be longer. If neces-sary, depress the brake pedal with maxi-mum force.

The SBCTM brake system is automatically acti-vated if you:Runlock the vehicle using the key or the KEY-LESS GO* systemRopen the driver's or front-passenger doorRswitch on the ignitionRpress the KEYLESS GO button* on theselector lever once on vehicles with KEY-LESS GORdepress the brake pedalRrelease the parking brake

i If you activate the SBCTM brake systemwith the brake pedal, pedal resistance isless than normal the first time you depressthe brake. There is also more pedal travel

than normal. Pedal travel returns to normalwhen you release the brake pedal. Youmayfeel the brake pedal pulsate when yourelease it, and hear a sound. This sound,which is produced by the SBCTM pump,ceases after a short time.

G Risk of injuryIf the SBCTM brake system is not deactiva-ted before maintenance work — especiallybrake pad/lining replacement — this couldresult in injury. If the system is active, itcarries out self-tests, automatically build-ing up high pressures in the brake systemfor test purposes. The brake calliper pis-tons are forced out, which can result incrush injuries. Brake fluid may escape,which can result in acid burns.The SBCTM brake system must be deacti-vated before maintenance work is carriedout. You can obtain information on how todeactivate the SBCTM brake system at anyMercedes-Benz Service Centre.

G Risk of injuryOnly have the brake pads/linings replacedand other work on the SBCTM brake systemcarried out at a qualified specialist work-shop. Consult a qualified specialist work-

shop which has the necessary specialistknowledge and tools to carry out the workrequired.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you usea Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for thispurpose. In particular, work relevant tosafety or on safety-related systemsmust becarried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.

The SBCTM brake system brake boost is auto-matically deactivated:Rafter approximately 20 seconds if you lockthe vehicle from the outsideRafter approximately two minutes if you turnthe key to position 0 in the ignition lock orremove it from the ignition lock

Tips for driving with SBCTM

RYou should downshift (1st,2nd or3rd gear)when driving on long and steep downhillgradients. This prevents the brakes fromoverheating or wearing too quickly.RContinue driving for a short time after sub-jecting the brakes to a heavy load. Thisallows the airflow to cool the brakes morequickly.

Safety

* optional



Anti-theft systems

59

G Risk of accidentMake sure that you do not endangerother road users when applying thebrakes.

RYou should apply the brakes firmly fromtime to time at a high vehicle speed if thevehicle's brake system has not been sub-jected to high loads for a long period oftime. This improves the grip of the brakepads/linings.RYou should brake firmly after driving on awet or snow-covered road surface beforestopping the engine. The brake discs dry asthey are warmed up, thus preventing cor-rosion.RFor safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use components, e.g.brake pads/linings, which have been spe-cially approved by Mercedes-Benz for yourvehicle. Brake pads/linings which have notbeen approved for Mercedes-Benz couldaffect your vehicle's operating safety.

Anti-theft systems

ImmobiliserThe immobiliser prevents your vehicle frombeing started without the correct key.

Activating the immobiliserX With the key: remove the key from theignition lock.

X With KEYLESS GO*: press the KEYLESSGO button on the selector lever.The engine switches off.

Deactivating the immobiliserX With the key: turn the key to position 2 inthe ignition lock.

X With KEYLESS GO*: press the KEYLESSGO button on the selector lever twice with-out depressing the brake.

i The immobiliser is always deactivatedwhen you start the engine.

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is primed and you open:Ra doorRa door using the emergency key elementRthe boot lidRthe bonnetRthe glove compartmentRthe stowage space under the armrestRa stowage compartment in the rearThe alarm is not switched off even if you closean open door again.

1 Indicator lamp

X To prime: lock the vehicle using the key.On vehicles with KEYLESS GO*, the locking

Safety

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 59

Z


Anti-theft systems

60

button on the door handle/boot lid can alsobe used.Indicator lamp1 flashes. The alarm sys-tem is primed after approximately 15 sec-onds.

X Todeactivate: unlock the vehicle using thekey. On vehicles with KEYLESS GO*, youcan also unlock the vehicle by opening thedoor/boot lid.

Switching off the alarmX With the key: insert the key into the igni-tion lock.The alarm is switched off.

orX Press theŒ or‹ button on the key.The alarm is switched off.

X With KEYLESS GO*: grasp the outsidedoor handle. The key must be outside thevehicle.The alarm is switched off.

orX Press the KEYLESS GO button on the selec-tor lever. The key must be inside the vehi-cle.The alarm is switched off.

Tow-away protectionAn audible and visual alarm is triggered if yourvehicle's angle of inclination is altered whiletow-away protection is primed. This happensif the vehicle is jacked up on one side, forexample.

Priming tow-away protectionX Lock the vehicle using the key. On vehicleswith KEYLESS GO*, the locking button onthe door handle/boot lid can also be used.Tow-away protection is primed afterapproximately 30 seconds.

To deactivate tow-away protectionWhen you unlock your vehicle using the keyor KEYLESS GO*, tow-away protection isautomatically deactivated.Deactivate tow-away protection manually toprevent a false alarm if your vehicle:Ris being transportedRis being loaded, e.g. onto a ferry or cartransporterRis being parked on a movable surface, e.g.split-level garages

1 To deactivate tow-away protection2 Indicator lamp

X Remove the key from the ignition lock.X Press button1.Indicator lamp2 lights up briefly.

X Lock the vehicle using the key. On vehicleswith KEYLESS GO*, the locking button onthe door handle/boot lid can also be used.Tow-away protection remains deactivateduntil the vehicle is unlocked and lockedagain.

Safety

* optional



Anti-theft systems

61

Interior motion sensor*If the interior motion sensor is primed, a vis-ual and audible alarm is triggered if move-ment is detected in the vehicle interior whilethe vehicle is locked. This occurs, for exam-ple, if someone breaks the side windows ofyour vehicle or reaches into the vehicle's inte-rior.

Priming the interior motion sensorX Make sure that:Rthe side windows are closedRthe roof is closedRthe stowage compartments under thearmrest are closedRthere are no objects, e.g. mascots, hang-ing on the rear-view mirror or on thegrasp handles on the roof trim.

This will prevent false alarms.X Make sure that the boot lid is closed.Only then can the interior motion sensor beprimed.

X Lock the vehicle using the key. On vehicleswith KEYLESS GO*, the locking button on

the door handle/boot lid can also be usedto lock the vehicle.The interior motion sensor is primed afterapproximately 30 seconds.

The factory setting is that the interior motionsensor is not primed if the roof is open. Youcan use the on-board computer to change thesettings so that the interior motion sensor isprimed even when the roof is open(Y page 121).

i You should always close the roof whenyou park your vehicle to prevent a falsealarm being triggered, for example by fall-ing leaves or insects. In certain countries,the interior motion sensor is primed evenwhen the roof is open.

i Do not place any objects on the armrestin the centre console. This could otherwiseinterfere with the interior motion sensor.Metallic objects coming into contact withother metallic objects may trigger a falsealarm. Therefore, do not leave objects suchas a bunch of keys in or next to the armrest.Use a different lockable stowage compart-ment for such items.

To deactivate the interior motion sen-sorTo prevent a false alarm, deactivate the inte-riormotion sensor if you lock your vehicle andRpeople remain in the vehicleRanimals remain in the vehicleRthe windows remain open.

1 Indicator lamp2 To deactivate the interior motion sensor

Safety

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 61

Z


Anti-theft systems

62

X Remove the key from the ignition lock.X Press button2.Indicator lamp1 flashes briefly.

X Lock the vehicle using the key. On vehicleswith KEYLESS GO*, the locking button onthe door handle/boot lid can also be used.The interior motion sensor remains deacti-vated until the vehicle is unlocked andlocked again.

Safety

* optional



63

Opening and closing ........................... 64Key positions ....................................... 73Seats .................................................... 74Steering wheel .................................... 78Mirrors ................................................. 80Memory functions ............................... 82Seat belts ............................................. 83Lights ................................................... 87Windscreen wipers ............................. 92Side windows ...................................... 93

Driving and parking ............................ 95Automatic transmission ..................... 98Instrument cluster ............................ 105On-board computer .......................... 106Driving systems ................................ 124Air conditioning ................................. 144Opening/closing the roof ................. 154Loading and stowing ........................ 159Features ............................................. 165

Controls



Opening and closing

64

Opening and closing

KeyThe vehicle's equipment includes two keyswith remote control. Each key contains anemergency key element.The key is configured at the factory to cen-trally lock and unlock the following:Rthe doorsRthe boot lidRthe fuel filler flapRthe glove compartmentRthe stowage compartment under the arm-restRthe stowage compartments in the rear

G Risk of accidentIf children are left unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could:Ropen a door from the inside at any time,even if it has been lockedRstart the vehicle using a key which hasbeen left in the vehicleRrelease the parking brakeThey could endanger themselves and oth-ers. Never leave children unsupervised in

the vehicle. Always take the key with youwhen leaving the vehicle, even if you areonly leaving it for a short time.

1j To lock the vehicle2i To unlock the boot lid3k To unlock the vehicle4 Battery check lamp

i You can also open and close the roof withthe key (Y page 155).

i When you unlock the vehicle, the SBC®

brake system is activated.

Factory settingsX To unlock centrally: press thek but-ton.The turn signals flash once. The lockingknobs in the doors pop up. The anti-theftalarm system* is deactivated.

i If you do not open either a door or theboot lid after you have unlocked the vehi-cle, it will automatically relock after approx-imately 40 seconds.

X To lock centrally: press thej button.The turn signals flash three times if thedoors and boot lid are closed. The lockingknobs in the doors drop down. The anti-theft alarm system* and the immobiliserare primed.

Individual settingsYou can change the settings of the lockingsystem so that pressing thek buttonunlocks only the driver's door, the lockablestowage compartments in the interior and thefuel filler flap. This could be useful if you fre-quently travel on your own.X To change the setting: press thekandj buttons simultaneously for

Controls

* optional



Opening and closing

65

approximately six seconds until the batterycheck lamp flashes twice.

The key now functions as follows:X To unlock the driver's door: press thek button once.

X To unlock centrally: press thek but-ton twice.

X To lock centrally: press thej button.

Restoring the factory settingsX Press thek andj buttons simulta-neously for approximately six seconds untilthe battery check lamp flashes twice.

KEYLESS GO key*The optional equipment supplied with yourvehicle includes two KEYLESS GO keys. Youcan start, lock or unlock the vehicle using theKEYLESS GO key. To do this, you need onlycarry the KEYLESS GO key on your person.When you touch the surface of the sensors onthe vehicle's door handles, KEYLESS GOestablishes a radio connection between thevehicle and the key. The distance betweenthe KEYLESS GO key and the vehicle's door

handle from which you wish to lock or unlockthe vehicle, must not be greater than 1 m.When you pull the door handle, the followingunlock centrally if the factory settings havenot been changed:Rthe doorsRthe boot lidRthe fuel filler flapRthe glove compartmentRthe stowage compartment under the arm-restRthe stowage compartments in the rearIf you pull on the handle of the boot lid, onlythe boot of your vehicle is unlocked.When starting the engine and whilst drivingKEYLESSGOalso checks by establishing briefperiods of radio contact whether a valid KEY-LESS GO key is in the vehicle.G Risk of accidentIf children are left unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could open a door from the inside,even if it has been locked. Or they couldstart the vehicle if a valid KEYLESS GO keyis in the vehicle and they press the KEY-LESS GO button on the gear selector lever.They could endanger themselves and oth-

ers. Never leave children unsupervised inthe vehicle. Switch off the engine and takethe KEYLESS GO key with you, even if youare only leaving the vehicle for a short time.

1j To lock the vehicle2i To unlock the boot lid3k To unlock the vehicle4 Battery check lamp

i You can also use the KEYLESS GO key toopen and close the roof (Y page 155).

i When you unlock the vehicle, the SBC®

brake system is activated.

i If the vehicle has been parked for a longtime, you must pull the door handle to acti-vate the KEYLESS GO functions.

Controls

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 65

Z


Opening and closing

66

Important notesRIf the KEYLESS GO key is removed from thevehicle (e.g. in luggage or an article ofclothing), it will no longer be possible tolock or start the vehicle.RIf the KEYLESS GO key is removed from thevehicle while the engine is running, e.g. ifthe front passenger leaves the vehicle withthe KEYLESS GO key, the following mes-sage will appear in the multi-function dis-play as you pull away: Key not detec-ted.RIf the KEYLESS GO key is in the vehicle, thevehicle can be started at any time. If youhave left the KEYLESS GO key in the vehi-cle, you will see the following message inthe multi-function display when you lockthe vehicle: Key still in vehicle.

Factory settingsX To unlock centrally: pull the door handle.The turn signals flash once. The lockingknobs in the doors pop up. The anti-theftalarm system* is deactivated.

i If you do not open either a door or theboot lid after you have unlocked the vehi-

cle, it will automatically relock after approx-imately 40 seconds.

i When a door is opened, the side windowon that side opens slightly. When the dooris closed, the side window closes again.

! The side windows will not open or closeif the battery is discharged or if the sidewindows have iced up. It will not then bepossible to close the door. Do not attemptto force the door to close. You could oth-erwise damage the door or the window.

i There is a danger of the vehicle beingunlocked unintentionally. This could occurif the KEYLESS GO key is within one metreof the vehicle and the door handle issplashed with water. This could also occurwhen cleaning the door handle.

1 Locking button on the door handle

X To lock centrally: press locking button1 on the door handle.The turn signals flash three times. The lock-ing knobs in the doors drop down. The anti-theft alarm system* and the immobiliserare primed.

Individual settingsYou can change the setting of the lockingsystem. If you now touch the inside surfaceof the door handle on the driver's door, youwill only unlock the driver's door, the fuel fillerflap and the lockable stowage compartmentsin the interior. This could be useful if you fre-quently travel on your own.

Controls

* optional



Opening and closing

67

X To change the setting: press thekandj buttons simultaneously forapproximately six seconds until the batterycheck lamp flashes twice.

The KEYLESS GO key will now function as fol-lows:X To unlock the driver's door: pull the doorhandle on the driver's door.

X To unlock centrally: pull the front-passenger door handle.

X To lock centrally: press locking button1 on the door handle.

Restoring the factory settingsX Press thek andj buttons simulta-neously for approximately six seconds untilthe battery check lamp flashes twice.

Locking from the boot*On vehicles with KEYLESS GO and remoteboot lid closing*, you can close the boot lidautomatically and thereby centrally lock yourvehicle (Y page 71).

Power closing featureThe power closing mechanism pulls the bootlid into its lock automatically even if it is onlypartly closed.G Risk of injuryMake sure that nobody can become trap-ped when closing the boot lid.If there is a danger of being trapped, pressthe boot lock.Do not activate the power closing functionby tamperingwith the lockmechanism. Youcould otherwise injure yourself.

G Risk of accidentMake sure the boot lid is always fullyclosed. Otherwise, the boot lid could openduring the journey and endanger yourselfor others.

X Lightly push closed the boot lid.The power closing mechanism will pull theboot lid closed completely.

Opening the doors from the insideYou can open a door from the inside at anytime, even if it has been locked.

1 Locking knob2 Door handle

X Pull door handle2.If the door is locked, locking knob1 popsup. The door is unlocked and can beopened.

i When a door is opened, the side windowon that side opens slightly. When the dooris closed, the side window closes again.

! The side windows will not open or closeif the battery is discharged or if the sidewindows have iced up. It will not then be

Controls

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 67

Z


Opening and closing

68

possible to close the door. Do not attemptto force the door to close. You could oth-erwise damage the door or the window.

Locking/unlocking the vehicle fromthe insideYou can centrally lock or unlock the vehiclefrom the inside. This feature may be useful if,for example, you wish to unlock thepassenger door from the inside or lock thevehicle before you pull away.G Risk of accidentDo not leave children unsupervised in thevehicle. They could open a door from theinside – even if it is locked – and therebyendanger themselves and others.

1 Locking button2 Unlocking button

X To lock: press button1.X To unlock: press button2.

i You may hear a brief noise when youunlock the vehicle as the SBC® brake sys-tem is activated.

Automatic locking featureThe vehicle will lock automatically once youhave pulled away.You can switch off the automatic lockingfunction via the on-board computer(Y page 120).

i The vehicle is locked automatically whenthe ignition is switched on and the wheelsbegin to turn. There is therefore a risk ofbeing locked out when the vehicle is beingpushed or tested on a dynamometer.

Boot (vehicles without remote bootlid closing feature*)

G Risk of poisoningExhaust fumes could enter the vehicle inte-rior if the engine is running and the boot lidis open. This could poison you. Therefore,you should make sure that the boot lid isalways closed when the engine is running.

! The boot lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there isenough space above the boot lid.

Controls

* optional



Opening and closing

69

Opening from the outsideYou can only open the boot lid after unlockingit first.

i You can only unlock the boot lid when thevehicle is stationary and the roof is fullyopened or closed.

X To unlock centrally: press thek but-ton on the key.

1 Handle

X Pull handle1.X Raise the boot lid.

i With the roof open, you can use the load-ing aid (Y page 164) to raise the folded-uproof in the boot, to enable you to load and

unload more easily. For this purpose, youcan also open the boot separator.Do not forget to close the boot separatoragain afterwards. Otherwise, it will not bepossible to close the roof.

Closing from the outside

G Risk of injuryMake sure that nobody can become trap-ped as you close the boot lid.

i Do not leave the key in the boot. Youcould otherwise lock yourself out.

1 Recess

X Pull the boot lid down firmly using recess1.

X If necessary, close the boot lid from theoutside by pushing down the edge.

i With the roof open, the boot lid can onlybe closed if the roof has been lowered(Y page 164).

X Lock the vehicle if necessary usingthej button on the key or with KEY-LESS GO*.

Opening from the insideYou can simultaneously unlock and open theboot from the driver's seat when the vehicleis stationary and the roof is fully opened orclosed.

Controls

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 69

Z


Opening and closing

70

1 Remote opening button2 Indicator lamp

X Pull remote operating button1 until theboot lid opens.Indicator lamp2 lights up and stays lituntil the boot is closed again.

i With the roof open, you can use the load-ing aid (Y page 164) to raise the folded-uproof in the boot, to enable you to load andunload more easily. For this purpose, youcan also open the boot separator.Do not forget to close the boot separatoragain afterwards. Otherwise, it will not bepossible to close the roof.

Locking the boot separatelyYou can lock the boot separately10. If you thenunlock the vehicle centrally, the boot remainslocked and cannot be opened.X Close the boot lid.X Remove the emergency key element fromthe key (Y page 255).

$ Basic position% To lock separately

X Insert the emergency key element fully intothe boot lock.

X Turn the emergency key element clockwiseto position%.

X Remove the emergency key element.

Boot (vehicles with remote boot lidclosing feature*)The remote boot lid closing feature* opensand closes the boot lid automatically. You canstop the automatic opening and closing pro-cedure at any time:Rby pulling or pressing the remote operatingbutton at the driver's seatRby pressing thei button on the keyRby pulling the handle on the boot lidRby pressing the closing button in the bootlid

G Risk of poisoningExhaust fumes could enter the vehicle inte-rior if the engine is running and the boot lidis open. This could poison you. Therefore,you should make sure that the boot lid isalways closed when the engine is running.

! The boot lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there isenough space above the boot lid.

i With the roof open, you can use the load-ing aid (Y page 164) to raise the folded-uproof in the boot, to enable you to load and

10 Not available in all countries.

Controls

* optional



Opening and closing

71

unload more easily. For this purpose, youcan also open the boot separator.Do not forget to close the boot separatoragain afterwards. Otherwise, it will not bepossible to close the roof.

Opening from the outsideYou can only open the boot lid after unlockingit first.

i You can only unlock the boot lid when thevehicle is stationary and the roof is fullyopened or closed.

X To unlock centrally: press thek but-ton on the key.

1 Handle

X Pull handle1.The boot lid opens automatically.

Opening from the outside using the keyX Press and hold thei button on the keyuntil the boot lid opens.

Closing from the outside (without KEY-LESS GO*)You can close the boot lid from the outsideusing the closing button in the boot lid.G Risk of injuryMonitor the boot lid closing procedure tomake sure that nobody can become trap-ped. Press the closing button in the boot lidagain or press thei button on the keyto halt the closing procedure.


1 Closing button

X Press closing button1.The boot lid closes automatically.

Closing from the outside and lockingcentrally (with KEYLESS GO*)You can close the boot lid from the outsideusing the closing button in the boot lid, or youcan close and centrally lock the vehicle simul-taneously with the KEYLESS GO button*.G Risk of injuryMonitor the boot lid closing procedure tomake sure that nobody can become trap-ped. Press the closing button in the boot lidagain or press thei button on the keyto halt the closing procedure.

Controls

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 71

Z


Opening and closing

72


1 Closing button2 KEYLESS GO button*

X To close: press closing button1.X To close and lock centrally: press KEY-LESS GO button*2.

i If you leave a KEYLESS GO key* in theboot, the boot lid will not lock.

Opening and closing from inside thevehicleYou can open and close the boot lid from thedriver's seat when the vehicle is stationary.

G Risk of injuryMonitor the boot lid closing procedure tomake sure that nobody can become trap-ped. Release the remote operating buttonto stop the closing procedure.

1 Remote operating button2 Indicator lamp

X To open: pull remote operating button1until boot lid opens.Indicator lamp2 lights up.

X To close: press remote operating but-ton1 until the boot lid is closed.Indicator lamp2 goes out.

Locking the boot separatelyYou can lock the boot separately11(Y page 70).

11 Not available in all countries.

Controls

* optional



Key positions

73

Key positions

Key

Ignition lock

} To remove the key$ Power supply for some consumers, such

as the windscreen wipers% Ignition (power supply for all consumers)

and drive position& To start the engine

KEYLESS GO*If you press the KEYLESS GO button repeat-edly without depressing the brake pedal, itsfunction corresponds to the different keypositions in the ignition lock.If you depress the brake pedal and press theKEYLESS GO button, the engine starts imme-diately.

i In order for the engine to be started usingthe KEYLESS GO button, the KEYLESS GOkey must be in the vehicle.

i If there is a key in the ignition lock, it haspriority over the KEYLESS GO function.

1 KEYLESS GO button

If KEYLESS GO button1 has not yet beenpressed, this corresponds to "key removed"or position 0.X Position 1: press KEYLESS GO button1once.It is now possible to switch on the wind-screen wipers, for example.

i If you now press KEYLESS GO button1twice, the power supply is disconnectedagain.

X Position 2 (ignition): press KEYLESS GObutton1 twice.

i If you now press KEYLESS GO button1once, the power supply is disconnectedagain.

Controls

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 73

Z


Seats

74

Seats

Points to remember

G Risk of injuryThe seats can still be adjusted when thereis no key in the ignition lock. For this rea-son, children should never be left unsuper-vised in the vehicle. They could becometrapped when adjusting a seat.

G Risk of accidentOnly adjust the driver's seat when the vehi-cle is stationary. You will otherwise be dis-tracted from the road and traffic conditionsand you could lose control of the vehicle asa result of the seat moving. This couldcause an accident.

G Risk of injuryMake sure that nobody can become trap-ped when you adjust the seat.Observe the notes concerning the airbagsystem.Secure children as recommended; see"Children in the vehicle" section.

! When youmove the seats, make sure thatthere are no objects in the footwell or

behind the seats. Otherwise, you coulddamage the seats and the objects.

i The head restraints cannot be removed.

Adjusting the seat electrically

1 Head restraint height2 Seat height3 Seat cushion angle4 Seat cushion length5 Seat fore-and-aft adjustment6 Backrest angle

i You can store the seat settings using thememory function (Y page 82).

Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentX Slide the button forwards or back in thedirection of arrow5.

Backrest angleX Slide the button forwards or back in thedirection of arrow6.

Seat heightX Slide the button up or down in direction ofarrow2.

Seat cushion angleAdjust the angle so that your thighs are gentlysupported.X Slide the button up or down in direction ofarrow3.

Seat cushion lengthX Slide the button forwards or back in thedirection of arrow4.

Controls



Seats

75

Head restraint height

G Risk of injuryMake sure that the central area of the headrestraint supports the back of your head atabout eye level. You could seriously injureyour neck if your head is not correctly sup-ported by the head restraint in the event ofan accident. Never travel without a cor-rectly adjusted and engaged head restraint.

X Slide the button up or down in the directionof arrow1.

Sliding the seats forwards and backYou can slide the seats back and forth in orderto load and unload the vehicle more easily.G Risk of injuryMake sure that nobody can become trap-ped when moving the seat. If there is a riskof someone becoming trapped, press thebutton again or press the seat adjustmentswitch on the door.

! Make sure that there are no containers inthe cup holder and no objects in the foot-well or behind the seats when adjusting the

seats. Otherwise, you could damage theseats and the objects.

1 To slide seat forwards2 To slide seat back

X To slide the seat forwards/back: press1 or2on the button.

Lumbar supportThe lumbar support for the driver's seat canbe adjusted to provide optimum support foryour back.

1 Thumbwheel

X Make sure that the key is in position 2 inthe ignition lock.

X Turn thumbwheel1 until the desired back-rest contour is reached.

Controls


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 75

Z


Seats

76

Multi-contour seat*You can set the contour of the seat to provideoptimum support for your back.

1 Shoulder region support2 Backrest side cushions3 Massage function (PULSE)4 Lumbar region support


Backrest contour in the lumbar regionAdjust the contour of the backrest in such away that the lumbar region of your back isproperly supported.

X Press rocker switch4 tok orj.The air cushion to be set is selected.

X Press rocker switch4 toæ orç.The selected cushion is inflated or deflated.

Backrest contour in the shoulder regionAdjust the contour of the backrest in such away that the shoulder region of your back isproperly supported.X Press switch1 toæ orç.The cushion is inflated or deflated.

Lateral support of the backrestAdjust the side cushions of the backrest insuch a way that you have good lateral sup-port.X Press switch2 to the left or right.The lateral support is either increased orreduced.

Massage functionThe massage function helps you to preventmuscle tension on long journeys.

X Press button3.The indicator lamp in button3 comes on.The air cushions in the lumbar region areinflated and then deflated.

i After about eight minutes, the massagefunction switches off automatically. Theindicator lamp goes out.

AIRSCARF neck-level heating*The AIRSCARF neck-level heating functionblows warm air around the heads of car occu-pants. The warm air flows out of the holes inthe head restraints.G Risk of injuryWhen AIRSCARF is in operation, very hot aircan flow from the vents in the headrestraints. This could cause burns to bareskin in the immediate vicinity of the vents.Make sure that you reduce the heater out-put in time.

The three red indicator lamps in the buttonindicate the heating level you have selected.

Controls

* optional



Seats

77

1 AIRSCARF neck-level heating

X Make sure the key is in position 2 in theignition lock.

X To activate: press button1.Three red indicator lamps in the button lightup. The blower starts up after a preheatingphase of ten seconds.

X Press button1 repeatedly until thedesired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button1 repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.

i The blower continues running for sevenseconds to cool down the heating ele-ments.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the AIR-SCARF neck level heating may switch off.

Seat ventilation*The three blue indicator lamps in the buttonindicate the ventilation level you have selec-ted.

1 Seat ventilation

X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or2 in the ignition lock.

X To switch on: press button1 repeatedlyuntil the required ventilation level is set.


i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatventilation may switch off.

Seat heatingThe two red indicator lamps in the buttonindicate the heating level you have selected.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatheating may switch off.

Vehicles without seat ventilation*

1 Normal heating2 Rapid heating

i The system automatically switches downfrom level 2 to level 1 after approximatelyeight minutes.

Controls

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 77

Z


Steering wheel

78

The system automatically switches offapproximately 30 minutes after it is set tolevel 1.


X To switch on rapid heating: press button2.

X To switch off rapid heating: press button2 twice.

X To switch on the seat heating: press but-ton1.

X To switch off seat heating: press button1.

Vehicles with seat ventilation*

1 Seat heating

i The system automatically switches downfrom level 2 to level 1 after approximatelyeight minutes.The system automatically switches offapproximately 30 minutes after it is set tolevel 1.


X To switch on: press button1 repeatedlyuntil the desired heating level is set.


Steering wheel

Points to remember

G Risk of injuryThe electrically adjustable steering wheelcan be adjusted when the key is removedfrom the ignition lock. Therefore, do notleave children unsupervised in the vehicleas they could become trapped as the steer-ing wheel is adjusted.

G Risk of accidentOnly adjust the steering wheel when thevehicle is stationary and do not pull awayuntil the steering wheel adjustment mech-anism is locked in position. You might oth-erwise drive without the steering wheeladjustment mechanism being locked inposition. As a result you could be distractedfrom road and traffic conditions by an unex-pected movement of the steering wheeland thereby cause an accident.The steerability of the vehicle is howevernot affected.

When you adjust the steering wheel, makesure that:

Controls



Steering wheel

79

Rthe steering wheel can be reached withyour arms slightly bentRyou can move your legs freelyRyou can see all the displays in the instru-ment cluster clearly

Adjusting the steering wheel

1 Steering column fore-and-aft adjustment2 Steering column height

X Press the lever in the direction of arrow1 or2 until the steering wheel hasmoved into the desired position.

You can find more information under:REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 79)RStoring settings (Y page 82)

Easy-entry/exit featureThe easy-entry/exit feature makes getting inand out of your vehicle easier.The steering wheel swings upwards whenyou:Rremove the key from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door when the key is inthe ignition lock or in position 1.

The steering wheel is moved automatically tothe position previously set when the key isinserted into the ignition lockwith the driver'sdoor closed.G Risk of injuryMake sure that nobody can become trap-ped when you activate the easy-entry/exitfeature.If there is a risk of becoming trapped, stopthe adjustment procedure. To halt the pro-cedure:Rpress the steering-column adjustmentswitchRpress one of the memory function posi-tion buttons

The steering column stops moving immedi-ately.

Never leave children unsupervised in thevehicle. They could open the driver's doorand thereby unintentionally activate theeasy-entry feature and become trapped.

The most recent position of the steeringwheel is stored when you switch off the igni-tion or when you store a memory position(Y page 82).You can activate and deactivate the easy-entry/exit feature via the on-board computer(Y page 121).

Controls


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 79

Z


Mirrors

80

Mirrors

Rear-view mirrorX Adjust the rear-view mirror by hand so youhave a good overview of the traffic condi-tions.

Exterior mirrors

G Risk of accidentThe exterior mirrors reduce the size of theimage. Objects are actually closer thanthey appear. You could misjudge the dis-tance from vehicles driving behind andcause an accident, e.g. when changinglane. For this reason, make sure of theactual distance from the vehicle drivingbehind by glancing over your shoulder.

The convex exterior mirrors give a larger fieldof vision.At low outside temperatures, the exterior mir-rors are heated automatically.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

1 Left-hand exterior mirror2 Right-hand exterior mirror3 Adjustment button


X Press button2 for the right-hand exteriormirror or button1 for the left-hand exte-rior mirror.

X Press adjustment button3 up, down, tothe right or to the left until the exterior mir-ror is set in a way which provides you witha good overview of traffic conditions.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outelectrically*

1 To fold the exterior mirrors in or out


X Briefly press button1.Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.

i If you are driving faster than 100 km/h,you can no longer fold in the exterior mir-rors.Make sure that the exterior mirrors arealways folded out fully while the vehicle isin motion; otherwise, they may vibrate.

Controls

* optional



Mirrors

81

Resetting the exterior mirrorsIf the battery has been disconnected or hasbecome discharged, the exterior mirrorsmust be reset. Otherwise, they will not fold inwhen you select the "Fold in mirrors whenlocking" function in the on-board computer(Y page 121).X Make sure that the key is in position 1 inthe ignition lock.

X Briefly press button1.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outautomatically*If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" functionis activated in the on-board computer(Y page 121):RThe exteriormirrors fold in automatically assoon as you lock the vehicle from the out-side.RThe exterior mirrors fold out again auto-matically as soon as you unlock the vehicleand then open the driver's or front-passenger door.

i If you have activated this function and foldin the exteriormirrors using button1, theywill not be folded out automatically. You

can then only fold out the exterior mirrorsusing button1.

Automatic anti-dazzle mirrorsThe rear-view mirror and the exterior mirroron the driver's side automatically go into anti-dazzle mode if the ignition is switched on andincident light fromheadlamps strikes the sen-sor in the rear-view mirror.The mirrors do not go into anti-dazzle mode ifreverse gear is engaged or the interior lightingis switched on.G Risk of accidentIf incident light from the headlamps of othervehicles is prevented from striking the sen-sor in the rear-view mirror, for instance ifthe draught stop is fitted, the mirror's auto-matic anti-dazzle function will not operate.Incident light could then dazzle you. Thismay distract you from the traffic conditions,and you may thereby cause an accident. Inthis case, adjust the rear-view mirror man-ually.

Passenger side exterior mirror park-ing positionTo make it easier to park, you can store thefront-passenger side exterior mirror positionin such a way that you can see the rear wheelon that side as soon as you engage reversegear.You can store a parking position for the exte-rior mirror on the front-passenger side usingthe memory button.

Adjusting and storing the exterior mir-ror parking position

1 Exterior mirror on the driver's side2 Exterior mirror on the front-passenger

side3 Adjustment button

Controls

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 81

Z


Memory functions

82

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary andthat the key is in position 2 in the ignitionlock.

X Press button2 for the exterior mirror onthe front-passenger side.

X Use adjustment button3 to adjust theexterior mirror to a position which allowsyou to see the rear wheel and the kerb.

X Press memory button M (Y page 82)onthe door control panel.

X Press one of the arrows on adjustment but-ton3 within three seconds.The parking position is stored if the exteriormirror does not move.

i If the mirror moves out of position, repeatthe steps. You can adjust the exterior mir-ror again after storing the setting.

Calling up a stored parking position set-tingX With the key in position 2 in the ignitionlock and with exterior mirror on the front-passenger side2 activated, engagereverse gear.Exterior mirror on the front-passenger2moves to the stored parking position.

The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves back to its original position:Ras soon as you exceed a speed of10 km/hRabout ten seconds after you have disen-gaged reverse gearRif you press button1 for the exterior mir-ror on the driver's side

Memory functions

Storing settingsYou can store up to three different settingsusing the memory button.The following settings are stored as a singlememory preset:Rposition of the seat, backrest and headrestraintRmulti-contour seat*: the backrest sidecushions of the seat cushion and the back-rest, contour of the backrest in the lumbarand shoulder regionsRdriver's side: steering-wheel positionRdriver's side: position of the exterior mir-rors on the driver's and front-passengersides

G Risk of injuryThememory function can be used when thekey has been removed. For this reason,children should never be left unsupervisedin the vehicle. They could otherwisebecome trapped when moving the seat orthe steering wheel.

Controls

* optional



Seat belts

83

G Risk of accidentOnly use the memory function on the driv-er's side when the vehicle is stationary. Youcould otherwise be distracted from the traf-fic conditions by the steering wheel andseat moving of their own accord, and causean accident.

1 Storage position switches 1, 2, 32 Memory button M

X Adjust the seat (Y page 74).X On the driver's side, also adjust the steer-ing wheel (Y page 78) and the mirrors(Y page 80).

X Press memory button M2.X Press one of storage position switches 1,2 or 31 within three seconds.The settings are stored in the selected pre-set position. A tone sounds when the set-tings have been completed.

Calling up a stored setting

G Risk of accidentOnly use the memory function on the driv-er's side when the vehicle is stationary. Youcould otherwise be distracted from the traf-fic conditions by the steering wheel andseat moving of their own accord, and causean accident.

X Press and hold the relevant storage posi-tion switch 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steeringwheel and mirrors are in the stored posi-tion.

i The setting procedure is interrupted assoon as you release the storage positionswitch.

Seat belts

Wearing seat beltsSeat belts are the most effective means ofrestraining the movement of vehicle occu-pants in the event of an accident. Thisreduces the risk of vehicle occupants cominginto contact with the vehicle interior.G Risk of injuryA seat belt which is not worn correctly, orwhich has not been engaged in the seat beltbuckle correctly, cannot perform its inten-ded protective function. Under certain cir-cumstances this could cause severe oreven fatal injuries.Make sure that all occupants – in particular,pregnant women – wear their seat belt cor-rectly at all times.RThe seat belt must pass closely over yourbody and must not be twisted. Youshould therefore avoid wearing bulkyclothing (e.g. a winter coat). The shoulderbelt section must be routed across themiddle of your shoulder – on no accountacross your neck or under your arm – andpulled tight against your upper body. Thelap belt must always pass across your lapas low down as possible, i.e. over your

Controls


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 83

Z


Seat belts

84

hip joints – not across your abdomen. Ifnecessary, push down the belt strapslightly and then retighten it in the roll-updirection.RDo not route the belt strap across sharpor fragile objects, especially if these arelocated on or in your clothing, e.g. spec-tacles, pencils, keys, etc. The seat beltstrap could be damaged and tear in anaccident and you or other vehicle occu-pants could be injured.ROnly one person should use each seatbelt at any one time. Childrenmust nevertravel sitting on the lap of other occu-pants. It would not be possible to restrainthe child in the event of a sudden changein direction, braking or an accident. Thiscould result in severe or even fatal inju-ries to the child and other occupants.RPersons less than 1.50 m tall cannotwear the seat belts correctly. For thisreason, secure persons less than 1.50 mtall in specially designed, suitablerestraint systems.RChildren less than 1.50 m tall or under12 years of age cannot wear the seatbelts properly. Therefore, always securethese children in suitable child restraint

systems on suitable vehicle seats. Youcan find more information under "Chil-dren in the vehicle" in the "Safety" sec-tion of the Owner's Manual. Follow themanufacturer's installation instructionswhen fitting the child restraint system.RDonot secure any objectswith a seat beltif the seat belt is also being used by oneof the vehicle's occupants.

G Risk of injuryThe seat belt does not offer the intendedlevel of protection unless the backrest isalmost vertical. Under certain circumstan-ces this could cause severe or even fatalinjuries.Before starting a journey, make sure thatthe seat is properly adjusted and that thebackrest is almost vertical.

G Risk of injuryA dirty or damaged seat belt or a seat beltthat has been subjected to a load in anaccident or modified no longer offers theintended level of protection. Under certaincircumstances this could cause severe oreven fatal injuries.

For this reason, check regularly that theseat belts are not damaged or dirty.Always have damaged seat belts or seatbelts that have been subjected to a load inan accident replaced at a qualified special-ist workshop. Choose a qualified specialistworkshop which has the necessary special-ist knowledge and tools for the workrequired. Mercedes-Benz recommendsthat you use a Mercedes-Benz ServiceCentre for this purpose.For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use seat belts whichhave been approved by Mercedes-Benz foryour vehicle.

Controls



Seat belts

85

1 Belt sash guide2 Belt tongue3 Buckle4 Release button

Routing the beltX Adjust the seat and move the backrest toan almost vertical position (Y page 74).

X Pull the belt smoothly through belt sashguide1.

X Route the belt over the centre of the shoul-der without twisting it.

X Engage belt tongue2 into buckle3.X If necessary, pull upwards on the shouldersection of the belt to tighten the belt acrossyour body.

Routing the beltX Press release button4 and guide belttongue2 back towards belt sash guide1.

Belt warning for driver and frontpassengerThe< seat belt warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster reminds you that all occupantsshould fasten their seat belts. The< seatbelt warning lamp may light up continuouslyor it may flash. Additionally, there may be awarning tone.The< seat belt warning lamp goes out andthe warning tone ceases when the driver andthe front passenger have fastened their seatbelt.For certain countries only: regardless ofwhether the driver or the front passenger isalready secured, the< seat belt warninglamp lights up for six seconds after the enginehas been started. The< seat belt warninglamp then goes out if both the driver and thefront passenger have fastened their seat belt.

i Further information about the< seatbelt warning lamp (Y page 233).

Controls


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 85

Z


Seat belts

86

Correct driver's seat position

1 Steering wheel2 Seat belt3 Seat

G Risk of accidentOnly adjust the driver's seat when the vehi-cle is stationary. You will otherwise be dis-tracted from the road and traffic conditionsand you could lose control of the vehicle as

a result of the seat moving. This couldcause an accident.

G Risk of accidentOnly adjust the steering wheel when thevehicle is stationary and do not pull awayuntil the steering wheel adjustment mech-anism is locked in position. You might oth-erwise drive without the steering wheeladjustment mechanism being locked inposition. As a result you could be distractedfrom road and traffic conditions by an unex-pected movement of the steering wheeland thereby cause an accident.The steerability of the vehicle is howevernot affected.

X Check whether seat3 and the headrestraint are adjusted properly(Y page 74).Make sure that:Ryou are as far away from the driver's frontairbag as possibleRyou are sitting in a normal upright posi-tionRyou can fasten the seat belt properlyRyou have moved the backrest to analmost vertical position

Ryou have set the seat angle so that yourthighs are gently supportedRyou can depress the pedals properlyRyou have adjusted the head restraint sothat the back of your head is supportedat eye level by the central area of thehead restraint

X Check whether steering wheel1 is adjus-ted properly (Y page 78).Make sure that:Ryou can hold the steeringwheel with yourarms slightly bentRyou can move your legs freelyRyou can see all the displays in the instru-ment cluster clearly

X Check whether you have fastened seat belt2 properly (Y page 83).It should:Rfit snugly across your bodyRbe routed across the middle of yourshoulderRrouted in your pelvic area across the hipjoints

Controls



Lights

87

Lights

Light switchFor reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you drive with the lights switchedon even during the daytime. In some coun-tries, daytime operation of headlamps variesdue to legal requirements and self-imposedobligations. In these countries, the dipped-beam headlamps are automatically switchedon when the engine is started.

i If you drive in countries in which trafficdrives on the opposite side of the road tothe country where the vehicle is registered,oncoming traffic may be dazzled by theasymmetrical dipped-beam headlamps.Have the headlamps changed to symmet-rical dipped beam when driving in thesecountries. You can obtain informationabout this fromanyMercedes-Benz ServiceCentre.

$a Left-hand parking lamp%g Right-hand parking lamp&M Lights off/constant headlampmode(U Automatic headlamp mode/con-

stant headlamp mode)C Side lamps, licence plate and instru-

ment lighting*B Dipped-beam headlamps or main-

beam headlamps,¥ Foglamps.† Rear foglamp

i The exterior lighting automaticallyswitches off when you remove the key fromthe ignition lock or open the door while theignition is switched off (ignition key in posi-tion 0).

! Switch off the side lamps or parking lampwhen you leave the vehicle. This preventsthe battery from discharging.

Dipped-beam headlampsX Make sure that the key is in position 2 ofthe ignition lock or that the engine is run-ning.

X To switch on: turn the light switch toB.The dipped-beam headlamps, parkinglamps and licence plate lamps are switchedon. The parking lamp indicator lamp next tothe light switch lights up.

Constant headlamp modeIn countries in which constant headlampmode is not a legal requirement, you canmake this setting using the on-board com-puter.You can activate or deactivate "constantheadlamp mode" using the on-board com-puter (Y page 116).

Controls


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 87

Z


Lights

88

X To switch on: turn the light switch toM orU.The dipped-beam headlamps, side lampsand licence plate lamp are switched onwhen the engine is running.

i When you turn the light switch to anyposition other thanM orU, the cor-responding light goes on.

Automatic headlamp modeThe side lamps, dipped-beam headlamps andlicence plate lamp are switched on or offautomatically, depending on the brightness ofthe ambient light.G Risk of accidentIf the light switch is set to theU posi-tion, the light will not come on automati-cally in foggy conditions. This could endan-ger you and others. Therefore, turn the lightswitch toB in the dark or in fog.The automatic headlamp feature is only anaid. The driver is responsible for the vehi-cle's lighting at all times.

G Risk of accidentWhen it is dark or foggy, turn the lightswitch fromU toB in good time.Otherwise, the headlamps could switch offtemporarily and you could cause an acci-dent.

X To switch on: turn the light switch toU.The side lamps are switched on and offautomatically when the key is in position1 in the ignition lock.The dipped-beam headlamps, side lampsand licence plate lamp are switched onautomatically when the engine is running.When the parking lamp or dipped-beamheadlamps are switched on, the indicatorlamp next to the light switch lights up.

Front foglamps/Rear foglamp

G Risk of accidentIf you suspect that driving conditionswill befoggy, turn the light switch toB beforeyou start your journey. Otherwise, yourvehicle may not be visible and you couldendanger yourself and others.

G Risk of accidentWhen it is dark or foggy, turn the lightswitch fromU toB in good time.Otherwise, the headlamps could switch offtemporarily and you could cause an acci-dent.

When the light switch is set toU you can-not switch on the front or rear foglamp.X Make sure that the key is in position 2 inthe ignition lock.

X To switch on the front foglamps: turn thelight switch to theB orC position.

X Pull the light switch out to the first stop.The¥ green indicator lamp next to thelight switch lights up.

X To switch on the rear foglamp: turn thelight switch toB orC.

X Pull the light switch out to the seconddetent.The† yellow indicator lamp next to thelight switch lights up.

X To switch off the front foglamps/rearfoglamp: push in the light switch to thestop.The corresponding indicator lamp goes out.

Controls



Lights

89

Combination switch (turn signals,main-beam headlamps and headlampflasher)

Turn signals

Combination switch1 Right-hand turn signal2 Left-hand turn signal

X To switch on: press the combinationswitch in the direction of arrow1 or2.The corresponding turn signal indicatorlampK orL in the instrument clus-ter flashes.

i If you onlywish to indicate aminor changeof direction, press the combination switch

briefly in the appropriate direction. The cor-responding turn signal flashes three times.

Main-beam headlamps/headlamp flas-her

Combination switch1 Main-beam headlamps2 Headlamp flasher

Main-beam headlampsX Make sure that the key is in position 2 ofthe ignition lock or that the engine is run-ning.

X Turn the light switch toB orU12.X To switch on: press the combinationswitch in the direction of arrow1.The main-beam indicator lampA in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X To switch off: move the combinationswitch back to its normal position.The main-beam indicator lampA in theinstrument cluster goes out.

Headlamp flasherX To switch on: briefly pull the combinationswitch in the direction of arrow2.

12 In theU position, the main-beam headlamps are only switched on when it is dark.

Controls


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 89

Z


Lights

90

Hazard warning lamps

Centre console1 Hazard warning lamp buttonThe hazard warning lamps still operate if theignition is switched off. They switch on auto-matically if an airbag is deployed or if youbrake sharply and bring the vehicle to a haltfrom a speed of more than 70 km/h.X To switch on: press button1.All turn signals flash. If you switch on theturn signals using the combination switch(Y page 89), the turn signals flash on thecorresponding side of the vehicle.

X To deactivate: press button1.

Headlamp cleaning system

1 Button for headlamp cleaning system

X Make sure that the key is in position 2 ofthe ignition lock or that the engine is run-ning.

X To switch on: briefly press button1.The headlamps are cleaned with a high-pressure water jet.

The headlamps are cleaned automatically ifthe "Wipewithwindscreenwasher fluid" func-tion is operated 15 times while the lights areon and the engine is running. When youswitch off the ignition, the automatic head-lamp cleaning system is reset and counting isresumed from 0.

Intelligent Light System*The Intelligent Light System adapts the light-ing of the front headlamps to the prevailingdriving conditions so that the road is betterilluminated.The Intelligent Light System is only activewhen it is dark.The Intelligent Light System comprises:Ractive light functionRcornering lightRmotorway modeRextended range foglamps

Active light functionFor the active light function, the dipped-beamheadlamps swivel horizontally. The swivelangle changes according to the respectivedriving situation. The active light function isnot active when the vehicle is stationary.

Cornering lightSpecially designed headlamps light up thearea into which you are driving when turningcorners.If you are driving at speeds below 40 km/h,the cornering light function is activated either

Controls

* optional



Lights

91

by the turn signal or when the steering wheelis turned. At speeds between 40 km/h and70 km/h, only a steering wheel movementactivates the cornering light function. If youare driving at speeds above 70 km/h the cor-nering light function is deactivated.

ActivatingX Make sure that the engine is running.X Switch on the dipped-beam headlamps.X Switch off the foglamp.X Switch on the turn signal.The cornering light on the same side as theindicator lamp comes on, even if you turnthe steering wheel in the opposite directionafter indicating.

orX Turn the steering wheel in the desireddirection.When in a forwards gear: the corneringlamp on the inside of the bend comes on.When in reverse gear: the cornering light onthe outside of the bend comes on.

DeactivatingX Turn the steering wheel back to the straightahead position.The indicator lamp goes out. The corneringlamp may remain lit for a short time.

orX Switch off the indicator lamp.The cornering lamp may remain lit for ashort time.

The cornering light will go out after a maxi-mum of three minutes.

Motorway modeMotorway mode optimises the illumination ofthe road by:Rcontrolling the brightnessRadapting the headlamp rangeMotorway mode is activated if you are drivingfaster than 110 km/h and do not make anylarge steering movements for 1,000 m.

Extended range foglampsThe extended range foglamps reduce theglare experienced by the driver and improvethe illumination of the edge of the carriage-way.

X To switch on: switch on the rear foglamp.The front foglamps and rear foglamp areswitched on. The extended range foglampsare activated if you are driving slower than70 km/h.

X To switch off: switch off the rear foglamp.

i The extended range foglamps switch offautomatically when you drive faster than100 km/h.

Interior lighting

Overhead control panel1X To switch the left-hand reading lamp

on/off2X To switch the right-hand reading

lamp on/off

Controls


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 91

Z


Windscreen wipers

92

3ð To switch the interior lighting on/off4¤ To switch the automatic interior

lighting control on/off

Automatic interior lighting controlX To switch on or off: slide the¤ switchto the left or right.

The interior lighting switches on when you:Runlock the vehicleRopen a doorRremove the key from the ignition lockThe interior lighting switches off after a delay.You can set the delayed switch-off using theon-board computer (Y page 119).

i If the door is left open, the interior lightinggoes out after approximately five minutes.

Manual control

Interior lightingX To switch on/off: press theð button.

i The setting applies simultaneously to theboot lighting. If you leave the boot lid open,the boot lighting goes out automaticallyafter approximately ten minutes.

Reading lampsX To switch on/off: press theX button.

Windscreen wipers

Combination switch1 To switch on the windscreen wipers2 Single wipe/to wipe thewindscreen using

washer fluidSettings:

0 Windscreen wipers off

I Intermittent wipe

II Continuous wipe, slow

III Continuous wipe, fast

! If the windscreen becomes dirty in dryweather conditions, the windscreen wipers

Controls



Side windows

93

may be activated inadvertently. This couldthen damage the windscreen wiper bladesor scratch the windscreen.For this reason, you should always switchoff the windscreen wipers in dry weather.

X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or2 in the ignition lock.The various wiper settings can be selectedas follows:

Single wipeX Briefly press the combination switch to thepressure point in the direction of arrow2.

Wiping with washer fluidX Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction of arrow2.

Intermittent wipe/rain sensorX Turn the combination switch in the direc-tion of arrow1 to position I.The rain sensor is activated. The appropri-ate wiping frequency is automaticallyadjusted according to the intensity of therain.

Continuous wipeX Depending on the intensity of the rain, turnthe combination switch in the direction ofarrow1 to position II or III.

Switching off the windscreen wipersX Turn the combination switch to position 0.

Side windows

Opening/closing the side windows

G Risk of injuryMake sure that nobody can become trap-ped between the side window and the doorframe as a side window is opened. Do nottouch or lean against the side window dur-ing the opening procedure. You couldbecome trapped between the side windowand the door frame as the window movesdown. If there is a risk of becoming trapped,release the switch immediately or pull theswitch up to close the side window again.

G Risk of injuryMake sure that nobody can become trap-ped as you close a side window. If there isa risk of becoming trapped, release theswitch immediately or push the switchagain to reopen the side window.

G Risk of injuryChildrenmay injure themselves if they openor close the side windows.Never leave children unsupervised in thevehicle. Always take the KEYLESS GOkey* with you when leaving the vehicle,

Controls

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 93

Z


Side windows

94

even if you are only leaving it for a shorttime.

G Risk of injuryDo not leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system. The children could:Rbe seriously or even fatally injured onparts of the vehicleRbe seriously or even fatally injured byprolonged exposure to extremely high orextremely low temperatures

If children open a door, they could:Rseriously or even fatally injure other peo-pleRget out of the vehicle, thereby injuringthemselves or be seriously or even fatallyinjured by a passing vehicle

The switches for all side windows are locatedon the driver's door. There is also a switch for

the front-passenger side window on the front-passenger door.

1 Front and rear, left2 Front and rear, right


i When the key is turned to position 0 orremoved from the ignition lock, it is stillpossible to operate the windows until thedriver's or front-passenger door is opened,but for no longer than five minutes.

Opening/closing the front side win-dowsi The front and rear side windows opensimultaneously if the roof is open.

X To open/close: press the switch down orpull it up beyond the pressure point andhold it until the corresponding window is inthe desired position.

X To open/close fully: press the switchdownor pull it up beyond the pressure pointand release it.

X To stop: briefly press the correspondingswitch down or pull it up.

i You can use the soft-top switch in thecentre console to close all the side win-dows at the same time.

Closing with increased force and withoutthe anti-entrapment featureG Risk of injuryMake sure that nobody can become trap-ped and possibly be seriously or fatallyinjured as you close a side window withincreased force or without the anti-entrap-ment feature.

Controls



Driving and parking

95

If a side window locks up during closing andhas reopened again slightly:X Immediately after the window locks up, pullthe switch upwards until the window isclosed.The side window is closed with more force.

If a side window locks up again during closingand has reopened again slightly:X Immediately after the window locks up, pullthe switch upwards until the window isclosed.The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.

Opening the rear side windowsYou can only open and close the rear sidewindows fully.X When the roof is open: open the frontwindow.The front and rear side windows opensimultaneously.

X When the roof is closed: press the corre-sponding switch for the front side windowsagain.

X To stop a side window: briefly press thecorresponding switch down or pull it up.

Closing the rear side windowsX Close the front windows.X Pull the switch upwards again.X To stop a side window: briefly press thecorresponding switch down or pull it up.

i If the window is obstructed during clos-ing, the closing procedure is interruptedand it opens again slightly.

Resetting the windowsEach side windowmust be reset if the batterywas disconnected or discharged.X Make sure that the key is in position 2 inthe ignition lock.

X Pull the switch upwards until the window isclosed, and hold it in this position foranother second.

Driving and parking

Starting the engine

G Risk of accidentDo not keep any objects in the driver's foot-well. If you use a floormat or carpet in thedriver's footwell, make sure that they arecorrectly secured and that there is suffi-cient clearance for the pedals.Objects could otherwise get between thepedals in the event of sudden braking oracceleration. You may then no longer beable to brake, change gear or accelerate asintended. Thismay result in an accident andinjury.

G Risk of poisoningNever leave the engine running in enclosedspaces. The exhaust gases contain carbonmonoxide. Inhaling exhaust fumes consti-tutes a health hazard and could lead to lossof consciousness or even death.

! Do not depress the accelerator pedalwhen starting the engine.

i If you depress the brakewhen starting theengine, pedal travel will be unusually longand there will be less pedal resistance.

Controls


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 95

Z


Driving and parking

96

Automatic transmission

P Park position with selector lever lockR Reverse gearN NeutralD Drive position

X Before starting, make sure P is selected.

i The engine can also be started when theselector lever is in position N.

Further information about the automatictransmission (Y page 99).

Starting the engine with the keyi You can also use the "touch-start" func-tion. To do this, turn the key to position 3and release it immediately. The engine thenstarts automatically.

X Turn the key to position 3 (Y page 73) inthe ignition lock and release it as soon asthe engine is running.

Starting the engine with KEYLESS GO*

G Risk of injuryYour vehicle can be started using a validKEYLESSGO key*. For this reason, childrenshould never be left unsupervised in thevehicle. Always take the KEYLESS GOkey* with you when leaving the vehicle,even if you are only leaving it for a shorttime.

The KEYLESS GO button can be used to startthe vehicle without inserting the key in theignition lock.

The KEYLESS GO button is on the selectorlever.

1 KEYLESS GO button

X Depress the brake pedal.The selector lever lock is released.

X Press KEYLESS GO button1 once.The engine starts automatically.

Controls

* optional



Driving and parking

97

Pulling away! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not usethe engine's full performance until it hasreached operating temperature.Only shift into reverse gear when the vehi-cle is stationary.Where possible, avoid spinning the drivewheels when pulling away on slipperyroads. You could otherwise damage thedrive train.

! SL 63 AMG: at low engine temperatures(under + 20†), themaximumengine speedis limited in order to protect the engine.Avoid driving at full throttle when theengine is cold in order to protect the engineand maintain smooth engine operation.

i The vehicle locks centrally once you havepulled away. The locking knobs in the doorsdrop down.You can open the doors from the inside atany time.You can also deactivate the automatic lock-ing feature (Y page 120).

i It is only possible to move the selectorlever to the desired position if you depress

the brake pedal. Only then is the selectorlever lock released.

X Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.X Pull the parking brake release handle torelease the parking brake.

X Move the selector lever to position D or R.

i Wait until the shift process is completedbefore pulling away.

X Release the brake pedal.X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.

i Upshifts take place at higher enginespeeds after a cold start. This helps thecatalytic converter to reach its operatingtemperature more quickly.

Parking

G Risk of accidentOnly remove the key from the ignition lockwhen the vehicle is stationary since youcannot steer the vehicle with the keyremoved.Never leave children unsupervised in thevehicle. They could release the parkingbrake. This could lead to a serious or fatalaccident.

G Risk of fireMake sure that the exhaust system doesnot under any circumstances come intocontact with easily ignitable material suchas dry grass or petrol. The material couldotherwise ignite and set the vehicle on fire.

Controls


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 97

Z



98

Parking brake

1 Release handle2 Parking brake

X To release: depress the brake pedal andkeep it depressed.

X Pull release handle1.X The3 indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

X To apply: depress parking brake2 firmly.The3 indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up if the engine is running.

i On steep slopes, turn the front wheelstowards the kerb.

Switching off the engine

G Risk of accidentIf the engine is not running, there is nopower assistance for the steering andbrakes. Steering and braking then takesmuch more effort.As a result, you might lose control of thevehicle, cause an accident and injure your-self and others.Do not switch off the engine while driving.

X Move the selector lever to P.

Using the keyX Turn the key to position 0 (Y page 73) inthe ignition lock and remove it.The immobiliser is activated.

Using KEYLESS GO*X Press and hold the KEYLESS GO button(Y page 73).The engine stops and all the lamps in theinstrument cluster go out (Y page 26).


Introduction to the transmission

G Risk of accidentThe movement of the pedals must not beimpaired in any way. Do not keep anyobjects in the driver's footwell. Make surethat floormats or carpets are correctlysecured and that there is sufficient clear-ance for the pedals.

G Risk of accidentDo not change down for additional enginebraking on a slippery road surface. Thiscould cause the drive wheels to lose theirgrip and the vehicle could skid. This couldcause you to lose control of your vehicleand cause an accident.

Controls

* optional




99


1 Shift range/selector lever position2 Gearshift program (S/C) or (S/C/M)*The current shift range and gearshift program(S/C) or (S/C/M)* appear in the display ofthe speedometer.

i SL 63 AMG: in addition, the current posi-tion is also indicated in red on the programselector.

When the selector lever is in position D, youcan influence the gearshifts made by theautomatic transmission by:Rrestricting the shift rangeRchanging gear yourself

Selector lever positions

ì Park positionPrevents the vehicle from rollingawaywhen stopped. Onlymove theselector lever toPwhen the vehicleis stationary.

i The key can only be removedwhen the selector lever is in posi-tion P. If the key is removed fromthe ignition lock, the selectorlever is locked in position P.

í Reverse gearOnly move the selector lever to Rwhen the vehicle is stationary.

ë NeutralReleasing the brakes will allow youto move the vehicle freely, e.g. topush it or tow it.Do not move the selector lever toN while you are driving. The auto-matic transmission could other-wise be damaged.If ESP® is deactivated or faulty:only move the selector lever to N ifthe vehicle is in danger of skidding,e.g. on icy roads.

ê DriveThe automatic transmissionchanges gear automatically. Allforward gears are available.

One-touch gearshiftingWhen the selector lever is in position D, youcan perform gearshifts yourself, even on vehi-cles with automatic transmission.X To shift up: briefly press the selector leverto the right towards D+.The automatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear, depending on the gearshift pro-

Controls

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 99

Z



100

gram selected. This also extends the shiftrange.

X To shift down: briefly press the selectorlever to the left towards D–.The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear, depending on the gear cur-rently selected. This also restricts the shiftrange.

i To prevent the engine from overrevving,the automatic transmission does not shiftdown if you push the selector lever towardsD– while driving at too high a speed.

X To derestrict the shift range: press andhold the selector lever towards D+ until Dis shown once more in the display.The automatic transmission shifts from thecurrent shift range directly to D.

X To select the most effective shiftrange: press and hold the selector lever tothe left towards D–.The automatic transmission will shift to arange which allows ideal acceleration anddeceleration. To do this, the automatictransmission will shift down one or moregears.

Shift rangesWhen the selector lever is in position D, it ispossible to restrict or derestrict the shiftrange for the automatic transmission.X Briefly press the selector lever to the righttowards D+ or to the left towards D–.The shift range selected is shown in thedisplay. The automatic transmission shiftsonly as far as the selected gear.

i If the maximum engine speed for the shiftrange is reached and you continue to accel-erate, the automatic transmission shifts upin order to prevent the engine from over-revving, even if the shift range is restricted.

Driving situation

è The braking effect of the engine canbe used in this position.

ç To use the braking effect of theengine on downhill gradients andfor driving:Ron steep mountain roadsRin mountainous terrainRin arduous conditions

æ To use the braking effect of theengine on extremely steep downhillgradients and long downhillstretches.

Program selector button

1 Program selector button

Controls




101

S Sport For all normal driving con-ditions

C Comfort For comfort mode

! Only press program selector button1when the selector lever is in position P, Nor D.

X Press program selector button1 repeat-edly until the letter (C/S) for the desiredgearshift program appears in the speed-ometer display.

Comfort mode C is characterised by the fol-lowing:Ran increase in traction. This improves thedriving stability of the vehicle on slipperyroad surfaces, for example.Rthe automatic transmission shifting upsooner. The vehicle is driven at lowerengine speeds and the wheels are lesslikely to spin.

SL 63 AMG program selector

1 Program selector

C For comfort mode

S For all normal driving con-ditions (Sport program)

S+ SportPlus mode (withshorter shift times)

M For manual gearshifting

RS RACE START

i RS cannot be selected during normal driv-ing. For further information on RACESTART, see (Y page 138).

! Only turn program selector1 when theselector lever is in position P, N or D.

X Turn program selector1 until the desiredprogram is shown in the display.The display on the program selector isshown in red.

Driving tips

Accelerator pedal positionYour style of driving influences how the auto-matic transmission shifts gear:Rlittle throttle: early upshiftsRmore throttle: late upshifts

KickdownUse kickdown for maximum acceleration.X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point.The transmission shifts to a lower geardepending on the engine speed.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal once thedesired speed is reached.The automatic transmission shifts back up.

Controls


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 101

Z



102

Steering wheel gearshift paddles*and manual gearshift program*i The full range of functions of the steeringwheel shift paddles and the manual gear-shift program are only available once oper-ating temperature is reached.

Steering wheel gearshift paddlesIt is possible to shift gear using either thesteering wheel gearshift paddles or the selec-tor lever.

1 Left-hand paddle: to shift down2 Right-hand paddle: to shift up

UpshiftingX Pull right-hand paddle2.The automatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear. If you are not driving in manualgearshift program M, then the shift rangewill be derestricted.

DownshiftingG Risk of accidentDo not change down for additional enginebraking on a slippery road surface. Thiscould cause the drive wheels to lose theirgrip and the vehicle could skid.

X Pull left-hand paddle1.The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear. If you are not driving in man-ual gearshift programM, the shift rangewillbe restricted.

i When the selector lever is in position P,N or R, you cannot change gear using thesteering wheel gearshift paddles.If manual gearshift program M has beenselected and you restart the engine, theautomatic transmission will switch to anautomatic gearshift program. If automaticgearshift programSorC has been selected,

the automatic transmission will resume thecorresponding gearshift programwhen yourestart the engine.

Manual gearshift programIn manual gearshift program M, you canchange gear using the steering wheel gear-shift paddles or the selector lever. Manualgearshift program M can be selected usingthe program selector button.

1 Program selector button

Controls

* optional




103

S Sport For all normal driving con-ditions

C Comfort For comfort mode

M Manual For manual gearshifting

X To activate: press program selector but-ton1 repeatedly until M appears in thespeedometer display.

If the selector lever is in position D, you canshift up or down through the gears. The gearcurrently selected and engaged is shown inthe speedometer display.X To deactivate: press program selectorbutton1 repeatedly until S or C appearsin the speedometer display.

UpshiftingX Briefly press the selector lever to the righttowards D+

orX Pull the right-hand steering wheel gearshiftpaddle (Y page 102).The automatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear.

SL 65 AMG! In manual gearshift programM, the auto-matic transmission does not shift up auto-matically even when the limiting speed forthe current gear is reached. When the lim-iting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cutto prevent the engine from overrevving.You must make sure that the engine speeddoes not reach the red area of the rev coun-ter. There is otherwise a risk of enginedamage.

X Shift up a gear if the colour in the displaychanges to red and UP appears in the revcounter.


X Briefly press the selector lever to the lefttowards D-

or

X Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshiftpaddle (Y page 102).The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear.

i For maximum acceleration, pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle untilthe transmission selects the optimum gearfor the current speed.

Kickdowni It is not possible to use kickdown in man-ual gearshift program M on vehicles withAMG engines.

You can also use kickdown for maximumacceleration in manual gearshift program M.X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point.The transmission shifts to a lower geardepending on the engine speed.

i It is not possible to shift gears using thesteering wheel gearshift paddles duringkickdown.

Controls


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 103

Z



104

Manual gearshift program on the SL 63AMGIn manual gearshift program M, you canchange gear using the steering wheel gear-shift paddles or the selector lever. Manualgearshift program M can be selected usingthe program selector.SL 63 AMG program selector

1 Program selector

C For comfort mode

S For all normal driving con-ditions (Sport program)

S+ SportPlus mode (withshorter shift times)

M For manual gearshifting

RS RACE START

i RS cannot be selected during normal driv-ing. For further information on RACESTART, see (Y page 138).

X To activate: turn program selector1clockwise untilM appears in the speedom-eter display.Indicator M1 on the program selectorlights up in red.

If the selector lever is in position D, you canshift up or down through the gears. The gearcurrently selected and engaged is shown inthe display.X To deactivate: turn program selector1until S or C appears in the display.

UpshiftingX Briefly press the selector lever to the righttowards D+

or

X Pull the right-hand steering wheel gearshiftpaddle (Y page 102).The automatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear.

! In manual gearshift programM, the auto-matic transmission does not shift up auto-matically even when the limiting speed forthe current gear is reached. When the lim-iting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cutto prevent the engine from overrevving.You must make sure that the engine speeddoes not reach the red area of the rev coun-ter. There is otherwise a risk of enginedamage.

X Shift up a gear if the colour in the displaychanges to red and UP appears in the revcounter.


X Briefly press the selector lever to the lefttowards D-

or

Controls



Instrument cluster

105

X Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshiftpaddle (Y page 102).The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear.

i For maximum acceleration, pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle untilthe transmission selects the optimum gearfor the current speed.

Kickdowni It is not possible to use kickdown in man-ual gearshift program M on vehicles withAMG engines.

Instrument cluster

Points to rememberYou will find an illustration of the instrumentcluster in the "At a glance" section(Y page 26).G Risk of accidentIf the instrument cluster or multi-functiondisplay fails, no display messages can bedisplayed.Thismeans that youwill not see informationabout the driving situation, such as thespeed, outside temperature, warning/indi-cator lamps, display messages or systemfailures. Handling characteristics may beaffected. Adapt your driving style andspeed accordingly.Immediately consult a qualified specialistworkshop which has the necessary special-ist knowledge and tools to carry out thework required. Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you use a Mercedes-BenzService Centre for this purpose. In particu-lar, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

Activating the multi-function displayX Switch on the ignition.The multi-function display is also activatedwhen you:Rswitch on the lightsRpress the reset button on the left-hand sideof the instrument clusterRopen a door

Adjusting the instrument clusterlightingX Brighter or dimmer: turn the reset buttonin the instrument cluster clockwise or anti-clockwise.

Controls


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 105

Z


On-board computer

106

Coolant temperature gaugeThe coolant temperature gauge is in theinstrument cluster on the left-hand side.Under normal operating conditions and withthe specified concentration of antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor, the coolant temperaturemay rise to 120 †

Resetting the trip meterX Select the standard display menu(Y page 110).

X Press and hold the reset button in theinstrument cluster until the trip meter isreset.

Rev counterThe red band in the rev counter indicates theengine's overrevving range. The fuel supply isinterrupted to protect the engine when thered band is reached.

! Do not drive in the overrevving range.Doing so will damage the engine.

H Environmental noteAvoid driving at high engine speeds, as thisincreases your vehicle's consumptionunnecessarily and pollutes the environ-ment through increased emissions.

Outside temperature display

G Risk of accidentThe road surface may be icy, especially inwooded areas or on bridges, even if tem-peratures are just above freezing point. Thevehicle could skid if you fail to adapt yourdriving style. You should therefore alwaysadapt your driving style and speed to suitthe weather conditions.

There is a short delay before a change in out-side temperature is displayed.

On-board computer

Points to rememberThe on-board computer is activated as soonas you turn the key to position1 in the ignitionlock. You can use the on-board computer tocall up information relating to your vehicleand to make and adjust settings.You can call up the next service due date,select the display language for the instrumentcluster and set other functions.G Risk of accidentOnly use the on-board computer when roadand traffic conditions permit. You wouldotherwise be distracted and unable to con-centrate properly on driving, and couldcause an accident.

The on-board computer shows information inthe multi-function display.

Controls



On-board computer

107

Multi-function steering wheelYou can control themulti-function display andthe settings in the on-board computer withthe buttons on the multi-function steeringwheel.

1 Multi-function display in the speed-ometer

2 Multi-function display in the revcounter

3 st

Accepts or rejects a call*

æçRSelects submenus in theSettings menuRChanges valuesRAdjusts the volumeROperates the RACETIMER13

4 èÿ

Selecting menus: scrolls backand forth

jk

Press briefly to scroll backand forth in a menu.Select the Audio/TV*/DVDmenu to select a stored sta-tion, an audio track or a videoscene.In the Telephone* menu:switches to the phone bookand selects a name or phonenumber.

jk

Press and hold: in theAudio/TV*/DVD menu toselect the next/previous sta-tion using rapid scrolling.Press and hold in the Tele-phone* menu: starts rapidscrolling through the tele-phone book.

Several functions are combined thematicallyin the menus.For example, the Audio/TV*/DVD menucontains functions for operating the radio orDVD player. The functions can be used eitherto look up information or to change settingsfor your vehicle.

13 Only on AMG vehicles.

Controls

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 107

Z


On-board computer

108

You can think of the configuration of themenus and the functions within a menu as acircle:X Press theè orÿ button repeatedlyto call up individual menus in sequence.

X Press thek orj button to call upthe functions within a menu.

Unlike othermenus, the Settingsmenu con-tains a number of submenus (Y page 116).The number of menus depends on the equip-ment in your vehicle.

Multi-function displayThe multi-function display shows you valuesand settings as well as any display messagesthat may have been generated.

1 Status bar with outside temperature orspeed (Y page 118)2 Engaged gear/selector lever position3 Trip meter4 Drive program5 Total distance recorder

Controls



On-board computer

109

Menus and submenus

Controls


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 109

Z


On-board computer

110

Function

1 Basic display menu (Y page 110)RDigital speedometer or outside tem-perature (Y page 111)RASSYST service interval display(Y page 193)RTyre pressure loss warning system(Y page 185) or tyre pressure mon-itor* (Y page 186)REngine oil level* (Y page 178)

2 AMG* menu (Y page 111)

3 Audio/TV*/DVD (Y page 113) menuRRadio station (Y page 113)RAudio drive or media (Y page 114)RTV* (Y page 114)RDVD video (Y page 115)

4 Navigation* menu (NAV)(Y page 115)

5 Distronic* menu (distance display)(Y page 131)

Function

6 Message memory menu14 (fault andwarning messages) (Y page 115)

7 Settings menu (Y page 116)RResets to factory settings(Y page 116)RSelects submenus (Y page 116)

8 Trip computer menu (Y page 122)RConsumption statistics(Y page 122)RRange (Y page 123)

9 Telephone* menu (Y page 123)

This is what the displays look like when youscroll through the menus.The generic terms in the table overview areintended to help you navigate through themenus. The terms themselves are not alwaysdisplayed in the multi-function display.

Standard display menui Menu overview: see (Y page 109).Use the buttons on the multi-function steer-ing wheel.X Press theè or· button to select thestandard display.

Standard display1 Status line with outside temperature or

speed2 Engaged gear/selector lever position3 Trip meter4 Drive program5 Total distance recorderYou can display the digital speedometerinstead of outside temperature1 (Y page 118).

14 This menu is only visible if there is a display message available.

Controls

* optional



On-board computer

111

You can select the following functions in theBasic display menu by pressing thej ork button:Rdigital speedometer or outside tempera-tureRASSYST service interval display(Y page 193)Rtyre pressure loss warning system(Y page 185) or tyre pressure moni-tor* (Y page 186)Rengine oil level* (Y page 178)

Displaying the digital speedometer oroutside temperatureIf you have selected the digital speedometerfor Status line1 (Y page 118), you canswitch the display to the outside temperaturehere15.X Press theè or· button to select thestandard display.

X Press thej ork button to select thedigital speedometer or the outside temper-ature.

AMG* menuThese functions are only available on AMGvehicles.

i Menu overview: see (Y page 109).Use the buttons on the multi-function steer-ing wheel.X Press theè or· button to select theAMG menu.

1 Engine oil temperature2 Gear indicator3 Upshift instructionIn the manual gearshift program, the menu isdisplayed in red when the engine reaches theoverrevving range. You will also see shift upinstruction3. Shift up instruction3 blocksother messages in the multi-function displayuntil you have shifted up.

The engine oil temperature gauge flashes ifthe engine oil temperature has not reached80 †. Avoid driving at full engine output dur-ing this time.

SETUPSETUP shows the gearshift program and thesuspension tuning.X Press theè or· button to select theAMG menu.

X Press thej button repeatedly untilSETUP is displayed.

orX Press the AMG button on the centre con-sole16.

1 Gearshift program (C/S/S+*/M)2 Suspension tuning (SPORT/COMFORT)

15 Vehicles for the United Kingdom: the outside temperature is always displayed.16 SL 63 AMG only.

Controls

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 111

Z


On-board computer

112

RACETIMERThe RACETIMER allows time measurementsto be saved.While you have the RACETIMER displayed,youwill not be able to adjust the volume usingtheæ andç buttons.X Press theè or· button to select theAMG menu.

X Press thej button repeatedly until theRACETIMER appears.

1 Lap2 RACETIMER3 Gear indicator4 Digital speedometerYou can start the RACETIMER when theengine is running or if the key is in position2 in the ignition lock.

X To start: press theæ button to start theRACETIMER.

X To display the intermediate time: presstheç button to show the intermediatetime.The intermediate time is displayed for fiveseconds.

X To stop: press theæ button to stop theRACETIMER.

The RACETIMER interrupts timing when youstop the vehicle and turn the key to position1 in the ignition lock. When you turn the keyto position 2 or 3 and then press theæbutton, timing is continued.

Storing the lap time and starting a new lapIt is possible to store a maximum of nine laps.X Press theç button to show the inter-mediate time during timing.The intermediate time is displayed for fiveseconds.

X Press theç button again within 5 sec-onds.The displayed intermediate time is storedas a lap time.

Timing starts for a new lap. The new lap istimed from when the intermediate time iscalled up.

1 Fastest lap time (best lap)2 Lap3 RACETIMER4 Gear indicator5 Digital speedometer

Resetting the current lapX Press theæ button to stop the RACE-TIMER.

X Press theç button to reset the lap timeto "0".

Deleting all lapsIf you have switched off the engine, the RACE-TIMER is reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All lapsare deleted.It is not possible to delete a single stored lapon its own.

Controls



On-board computer

113

X Press theæ button to stop the RACE-TIMER.

X Press the reset button on the instrumentcluster twice.

X Press theæ button to start the RACE-TIMER.All laps are deleted.

Overall evaluationThis function is only available if you havestored at least one lap and have stopped theRACETIMER.X Press theè or· button to select theAMG menu.

X Press thej button repeatedly until theoverall evaluation appears.

1 RACETIMER overall evaluation2 Total time driven3 Top speed

4 Average speed5 Distance covered

Lap evaluationThis function is only available if you havestored at least two laps and have stopped theRACETIMER.X Press theè or· button to select theAMG menu.

X Press thej button repeatedly until a lapevaluation appears.Each lap is shown in a separate submenu.The fastest lap is indicated by flashing sym-bol1.

1 Lap2 Lap time3 Top speed during lap4 Average lap speed5 Lap length

X Press thej ork button to select adifferent lap evaluation.

Audio/TV*/DVD menuUse the functions in the Audio/TV/DVDmenu to operate COMAND. If COMAND isswitched off, themulti-function display showsthe AUDIO off message.

i Menu overview: see (Y page 109).Use the buttons on the multi-function steer-ing wheel.

Selecting a radio stationYou can only store new stations usingCOMAND. Please refer to the separate oper-ating instructions for notes on how to do this.X Switch on COMAND and select Radio (seethe separate operating instructions).

X Use theè or· button to select theAudio/TV/DVD menu.

Controls

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 113

Z


On-board computer

114

X To select a stored station: briefly pressthej ork button.

X To select a channel from the channellist: press and hold thej ork but-ton.

X To select a station using the stationsearch (only if no station list is beingreceived): press and hold thej ork button.

1 Waveband (preset number, only if thechannel is stored)2 Station

i DAB* radio mode17 (Digital Audio Broad-casting) – see separate operating instruc-tions.

Operating the audio player or audiomediaAudio data from various audio devices ormedia can be played, depending on the equip-ment fitted in the vehicle.X Switch on COMAND and select the audioplayer or medium (see the separate oper-ating instructions).


X To select next/previous track: brieflypress thej ork button.

X To select a track from the track list(rapid scrolling): press and hold thej ork button.

Example1 Current CD (for DVD changer)2 Current track

In audio AUX mode, the current track is notdisplayed.

Operating the TV*X Switch on COMAND and select TV (see theseparate operating instructions).


X To select a stored station: briefly pressthej ork button.

X To select a channel from the channellist: press and hold thej ork but-ton.

X To select a channel with the channelsearch (only if COMAND is not receiving achannel list): press and hold thej ork button.

17 Only for certain countries.

Controls

* optional



On-board computer

115

1 Function (preset number, only if the chan-nel is stored)2 Current channel

Operating the DVD videoX Switch on COMAND and select DVD video(see the separate operating instructions).


X Press thej ork button to select ascene.

1 Disc number2 Current scene

Navigation* menuIn the Navigation menu, the multi-functiondisplay shows information from the naviga-tion system.

i Menu overview: see (Y page 109).Use the buttons on the multi-function steer-ing wheel.X Press theè orÿ button to select theNavigation menu.

X Switch on COMAND APS* (see the sepa-rate operating instructions).

Route guidance inactiveThe multi-function display shows the direc-tion of travel and the road name if it is knownto the navigation system.

Route guidance activeThe multi-function display shows the routeguidance and the distance to your destina-tion.

Distronic* menuYou can see the current Distronic settings inthe Distronic menu (Y page 127).

i Menu overview: see (Y page 109).

Message memory menuPrevious display messages can be called upin theMessage memorymenu. You will onlysee theMessage memorymenu if there areany display messages.G Risk of accidentThe on-board computer only records anddisplays messages and warnings from cer-tain systems. For this reason, you shouldalways make sure that your vehicle is safeto drive. You could otherwise cause an acci-dent by driving an unsafe vehicle.

i All possible display messages areexplained in the "Practical advice" section(Y page 202).

Switching off the ignition clears theMessagememory except for the highest priority dis-play messages. The on-board computer willonly delete these display messages after thecause of the message has been rectified.

Controls

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 115

Z


On-board computer

116

i Menu overview: see (Y page 109).

Displaying messagesUse the buttons on the multi-function steer-ing wheel.X Press theè or· button repeatedlyuntil either the original menu or the Mes-sage memory menu appears.If the Message memory menu does notappear, there are no display messages.If there are messages, the following mes-sage may appear in the multi-function dis-play, for example: 2 messages.

X Use thej ork button to scrollthrough the display messages.

Settings menuThere are two functions in the Settingsmenu. You can use the To reset: Pressreset button for 3 seconds function torestore most settings to factory settings. Youcan also use the submenus here tomake indi-vidual settings for your vehicle.


Resetting to factory settingsFor safety reasons, not all functions are reset:permanent Speedtronic can only be set in theVehicle submenu. The Headlamp modefunction in the Lighting submenu is onlyreset if the vehicle is stationary.X Press theè or· button to select theSettings menu.

X Press and hold the reset button on theinstrument cluster for approximately threeseconds.A prompt appears in the multi-function dis-play asking you to press the reset buttonagain to confirm.

X Press the reset button again.The functions of most submenus arerestored to factory settings.

orX If you want to retain the settings, do notpress the reset button a second time.The Settings menu appears again afterapproximately 5 seconds.

X Press theè or· button to select adifferent menu.

Submenus in the Settings menuX Pressè or· to select the Set-tings menu.

X Press thej button to select submenus.A list of submenus is displayed. More sub-menus are available than can be displayedat a time.

Controls



On-board computer

117

X Press theæ orç button to select asubmenu.The selected submenu is highlighted.

X Press thej button to select a functionwithin the submenu.

X Press theæ orç button to changethe setting.The changed setting is stored.

X Press theè orÿ button to select adifferent display.

The following tables show the settings youcanmake in the individual submenus. Youwillfind additional information on the pagesshown.

Instrument cluster submenu

Runit of measurement for distance(Y page 117)Rdistance units for digital speedometer(Y page 118)Rlanguage (Y page 118)Rstatus line display (Y page 118)

Lighting submenu

Rconstant headlamp mode (Y page 118)Rlocator lighting (Y page 119)Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off(Y page 119)Rinterior lighting delayed switch-off(Y page 120)RIntelligent Light System* (Y page 120)

Vehicle submenu

Rpermanent Speedtronic (Y page 136)Rautomatic locking feature (Y page 120)Rinterior motion sensor* (Y page 121)

Convenience submenu

Reasy-entry/exit feature (Y page 121)Rfold the exterior mirrors in when lockingthe vehicle* (Y page 121)

Selecting the unit of measurement fordistanceThis function is not available on vehicles withspeedometers in mph.The selected unit of measurement for dis-tance applies to:Rthe analogue speedometerRthe total distance recorder and the tripmeterRthe trip computerRcruise controlRSpeedtronicRDistronic*

X Pressè or· to select the Set-tings menu.

X Press thej button to select submenus.X Press theæ orç button to select theInst. cluster submenu.

X Press thej button to select Speedom-eter.

Controls

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 117

Z


On-board computer

118

X Press theæ orç button to selectkilometres or miles as the unit of meas-urement for distance.

X Press thej,è orÿ button toselect a different display.

Selecting the distance units for the dig-ital speedometerThis function is not available on vehicles withspeedometers in mph.X Pressè or· to select the Set-tings menu.


X Press thej button to select Digitalspeedometer.

X Press theæ orç button to selectkilometres or miles as the unit of meas-urement for distance.


Selecting the languageX Pressè or· to select the Set-tings menu.


X Pressj to select Language.X Press theæ orç button to select thedesired language.


Selecting the status line displayVehicles for the United Kingdom: this func-tion is not available.X Pressè or· to select the Set-tings menu.


X Press thej button to select Selectdisplay.

X Press theæ orç button to select thestatus line display: outside temperature(Outside temp.) or speed (Speed).The selected display now appears con-stantly in the status line of the speedome-ter. You can see the display you have notselected by scrolling through the Standarddisplay menu (Y page 110).


Setting constant headlamp modeIf you have set constant headlamp mode andthe light switch is in positionM orU,the side lamps, dipped-beam headlamps andlicence plate lighting are switched on auto-matically when the engine is running. Turningthe light switch to a different positionswitches on the corresponding lights. Makesure the light switch is set toB orU ifyou switch off the constant headlamp modewhile driving at night.In countries in which constant headlampmode is a legal requirement, Constant is thefactory setting.

Controls



On-board computer

119


X Press thej button to select submenus.X Press theæ orç button to select theLighting submenu.

X Press thej button to select Headlampmode.

X Press theæ orç button to set theswitch-on mode for the headlamps to Man-ual or Constant (constant headlampmode).


Switching the locator lighting on or offIf the locator lighting is switched on, the fol-lowing lights will be switched on automati-cally in the dark after you have unlocked thevehicle using the key:Rthe side lampsRthe tail lampsRthe licence plate lightingRthe front foglamps

The locator lighting switches off automati-cally if you open the driver's door or after40 seconds.X Pressè or· to select the Set-tings menu.


X Press thej button to select Locatorlighting.

X Press theæ orç to switch theLocator lighting on or off.


Activating or deactivating the exteriorlighting delayed switch-offUsing the Headlamps delayed switch-off function, you can setwhether the exteriorlighting should remain on for 15 seconds afterthe doors are closed when it is dark. If noneof the doors are opened after the engine isswitched off or if an open door is not closed,the exterior lighting goes out after 60 sec-onds.

When you have set a delayed switch-off timeand then switch off the engine, the followingremain lit:Rthe side lampsRthe tail lampsRthe licence plate lightingRthe front foglampsYou can reactivate this function by opening adoor within 10 minutes.X Pressè or· to select the Set-tings menu.

X Press thej button to select submenus.X Pressæ orç to select the Light-ing submenu.

X Press thej button to select Headlampsdelayed switch-off.

X Press theæ orç button to activateor deactivate the Headlamps delayedswitch-off function.


To temporarily deactivate the delayed switch-off:

Controls


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 119

Z


On-board computer

120

X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the key toposition 0 in the ignition lock.

X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock and back to position 0.Delayed switch-off is deactivated.

Delayed switch-off is reactivated as soon asyou restart the engine.

Activating/deactivating the interiorlighting delayed switch-offUsing the Interior lighting delayedswitch-off function, you can set whetherthe interior lighting should remain on for10 seconds after the key is removed from theignition lock when it is dark.X Pressè or· to select the Set-tings menu.


X Press thej button to select Interiorlighting delayed switch-off.

X Press theæ orç button to activateor deactivate Interior lightingdelayed switch-off.


Activating/deactivating the IntelligentLight System*When you activate the Intelligent LightSystem, you activate the following functions:Rmotorway modeRactive light functionRextended range foglamps



X Press thej button to select Intelli-gent Light System.

X Press theæ orç button to activateor deactivate the Intelligent LightSystem.

Activating/deactivating the automaticdoor locking featureThe Automatic door locking featureallows you to set whether your vehicle willlock centrally from a speed of about15 km/h upwards.

i For more information on automatic lock-ing, see (Y page 68).


X Press thej button to select submenus.X Press theæ orç button to select theVehicle submenu.

X Press thej button to select Automaticdoor locking.

X Press theæ orç button to activateor deactivate the Automatic door lock-ing feature.


Controls

* optional



On-board computer

121

Priming/deactivating the interiormotion sensor*Vehicles for the Netherlands: this function isnot available. The interior motion sensor isalways primed, even when the roof is open.This function allows you to prime the interiormotion sensor, even when the roof is open.However, false alarms can be caused by fall-ing leaves or insects, for example.X Pressè or· to select the Set-tings... menu.

X Press thej button to select submenus.X Press theæ orç button to select theVehicle submenu.

X Press thej button to select Interiormotion sensor with roof open.

X Press theæ orç button to prime ordeactivate the Interior motion sensorwith roof open.


Activating or deactivating the easy-entry/exit featurei For more information on the easy-entry/exit feature, see (Y page 79).

G Risk of injuryThe steering wheel moves when the easy-entry/exit feature is active. There is a riskof occupants becoming trapped. Beforeactivating the easy-entry/exit feature,make sure that nobody can become trap-ped.Do not leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system. The children could openthe driver's door and thereby unintention-ally activate the easy-entry/exit featureand become trapped.


X Press thej button to select submenus.X Press theæ orç button to select theConvenience submenu.

X Press thej button to select the EASY-ENTRY system.

X Press theæ orç button to activateor deactivate the EASY-ENTRY system.


Activating/deactivating the Fold in mir-rors when locking* functionThe Fold in mirrors when locking func-tion allows you to determine whether theexterior mirrors should fold in when you lockthe vehicle. When you switch on the ignition,the exterior mirrors fold out again.If you have switched the function on and youfold in the exterior mirrors using the buttonon the centre console (Y page 80), they willnot fold out automatically. The exterior mir-rors can then only be folded out using thebutton on the centre console.X Pressè or· to select the Set-tings menu.

X Press thej button to select submenus.X Pressæ orç to select the Conve-nience submenu.

X Pressj to select Fold in mirrorswhen locking.

Controls

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 121

Z


On-board computer

122

X Pressæ orç to activate or deacti-vate Fold in mirrors when locking.


Trip computer menuYou can use the Trip computer menu to callup or reset statistical data for your vehicle.

i You can select Kilometres or Miles asthe unit of measurement for distance(Y page 117).


Consumption statistics from startThe values refer to the start of the journey.X Pressè or· to select Fromstart.

1 Kilometres2 Average speed3 Time4 Average fuel consumptionIf the vehicle is parked for more than 4 hours,the From start consumption statistics arereset (key in position 0 of the ignition lock orremoved).The values will not be reset if you turn the keyto position 1 or 2 during this time.

Consumption statistics from the lastresetThe values refer to the last reset of the func-tion.X Press theè or· button to selectFrom start.

X Pressj ork to select Fromreset.

1 Kilometres2 Average speed3 Time4 Average fuel consumption

Resetting the consumption statisticsX Usingè or·, select From start.X Press thej ork button to select thefunction that you wish to reset.

X Press and hold the reset button on the leftof the instrument cluster until the valuesare reset to "0".

The From reset consumption statistics arereset automatically after 9,999 hours or99,999 kilometres.

Controls



On-board computer

123

Calling up the rangeX Usingè or·, select From start.X Press thej ork button to selectRange:.The multi-function display shows the esti-mated distance that can be covered by thevehicle, based on your current driving styleand the amount of fuel remaining in thetank.If there is only a small amount of fuel left inthe fuel tank, the display shows a vehiclebeing refuelled¿ instead of the range.

Telephone menu*Functions and displays depend on theoptional equipment installed in your vehicle.You can place your mobile phone in themobile phone cradle* (Y page 166), or set upa Bluetooth connection to COMAND; see theseparate operating instructions.G Risk of accidentObserve the legal requirements of thecountry in which you are currently drivingregarding the use of mobile phones in thevehicle.

If it is permitted to usemobile phones whilethe vehicle is inmotion, you should only usethem when the road and traffic conditionsallow. You may otherwise be distractedfrom the traffic conditions, cause an acci-dent and injure yourself and others.

i Menu overview: see (Y page 109).Use the buttons on the multi-function steer-ing wheel.X Switch on the mobile phone and COMAND;see the separate operating instructions.

X Press theè or· button to select theTelephone menu.

Mobile phone on

PIN code not yet enteredOnce you have inserted themobile phone intothe mobile phone cradle*, the multi-functiondisplay shows the message PIN.X Enter the PIN via the mobile phone, Lingua-tronic* or COMAND.Themobile phone will search for a network.

Mobile phone operationalThe multi-function display shows the mes-sage Ready or the name of the GSM networkprovider. If the operational readiness symbolgoes out, your vehicle is outside the trans-mission and reception range. In this case, themessage No service appears in the multi-function display.

Accepting a callIf someone calls you while you are in theTelephone menu, the following messageappears in the multi-function display:

X Press thes button to accept the call.

Rejecting or ending a callX Press thet button.

Controls

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 123

Z


Driving systems

124

Dialling a number from the phone bookIf your mobile phone is operational, you canselect and dial a number from the phone bookat any time. It is only possible to enter newnumbers into the phone book using themobile phone. Please refer to the separateoperating instructions for information on howto do this.X Press theè or· button to select theTelephone menu.

X Press thej ork button to call upthe phone book.

X Press thej ork button to select thedesired name. To scroll through the tele-phone book faster, press and hold thej ork button for longer than 1 sec-ond.

X Press thes button to start dialling.The Connecting call... messageappears in the multi-function display.The number dialled is stored in the redialmemory.When the connection is made, the name ofthe person you are calling (if it is stored inthe phone book) or the telephone number

you have dialled will appear in the multi-function display.

orX If you do not wish to make a call, press thet button.

RediallingThe on-board computer stores the last phonenumbers which were dialled.X Press theè or· button to select theTelephone menu.

X Press thes button to call up the mostrecently dialled number in the redial mem-ory.

X Press thej ork button to select thedesired name or number.

X Press thes button to start dialling.

Driving systems

Overview of driving systemsThe vehicle's driving systems are describedon the following pages:RCruise control, Distronic* and Speedtronic,which are used to control the speed of thevehicleRSBC Hold, which makes pulling away eas-ier, particularly on steep uphill gradientsRRACE START on the SL 63 AMG, whichmakes pulling away on race tracks easierR*Active Body Control* (ABC), which is usedto adjust the vehicle's suspension systemRParktronic*, which assists you in parkingand manoeuvring

The following driving safety systems: ABS,BAS, adaptive brake lights, ESP® and SBCTM

and SBC® are described in the "Safety" sec-tion (Y page 53).

Controls

* optional



Driving systems

125

Cruise controlCruise control maintains a constant roadspeed for you. It brakes automatically in orderto avoid exceeding the set speed. On long andsteep downhill gradients, especially if thevehicle is laden, you must select shift range1, 2 or 3 in good time. In this way you willmake use of the braking effect of the engine,which relieves the load on the brake systemand prevents the brakes from overheatingand wearing too quickly.G Risk of accidentDo not change down for additional enginebraking on a slippery road surface. Thiscould cause the drive wheels to lose theirgrip and the vehicle could skid.

Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-ditions make it appropriate to maintain asteady speed for a prolonged period. You canstore any road speed above 30 km/h.G Risk of accidentCruise control cannot take account of roadand traffic conditions.Always pay attention to traffic conditionseven when cruise control is activated.

Cruise control is only an aid designed toassist driving. You are responsible for thevehicle's speed and for braking in goodtime.

G Risk of accidentDo not use cruise control:Rin road and traffic conditions which donot allow you to maintain a constantspeed (e.g. heavy traffic or windingroads). You could otherwise cause anaccident.Ron slippery roads. Braking or accelerat-ing could cause the drive wheels to losetraction and the vehicle could then skid.Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due tofog, heavy rain or snow

Cruise control display in the instrumentclusterWhen cruise control is activated, the multi-function display in the speedometer showsCC and the stored speed.

1 Display for activated cruise control2 Stored speed

Cruise control leverYou can operate cruise control and variableSpeedtronic with the cruise control lever.The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise controllever indicates which system you have selec-ted:RLIM indicator lamp off:cruise control is selectedRLIM indicator lamp lit:variable Speedtronic is selected

Controls


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 125

Z


Driving systems

126

1 To store the current speed or a higherspeed2 LIM indicator lamp3 To select the current or last stored speed4 To store the current speed or a lower

speed5 To switch between cruise control and var-

iable Speedtronic6 To deactivate cruise control

Selecting cruise controlX Checkwhether LIM indicator lamp2 is off.If it is off, cruise control is already selected.If it is not, press the cruise control lever inthe direction of arrow5.LIM indicator lamp2 in the cruise controllever goes out. Cruise control is selected.

Storing and maintaining the currentspeedYou can store the current speed if you aredriving faster than 30 km/h.X Accelerate the vehicle to the desiredspeed.

X Briefly press the cruise control lever up1 or down4.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.Cruise control is activated. The vehicleautomatically maintains the stored speed.

i Cruise control may be unable to maintainthe stored speed on uphill gradients. Thestored speed is resumed when the gradientevens out. Cruise control maintains thestored speed on downhill gradients byautomatically applying the brakes.

To select the current or last storedspeed

G Risk of accidentOnly select a stored speed if you knowwhatthat speed is and whether it is suitable forthe current situation. Otherwise, sudden

acceleration or braking could endanger youor others.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou3.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.The first time cruise control is activated itstores the current speed or regulates thespeed of the vehicle to the previouslystored speed.

Setting a speedX Press the cruise control lever up1 for ahigher speed or down4 for a lower speed.

X Keep the cruise control lever pressed untilthe desired speed is reached.

X Release the cruise control lever.The new speed is stored.

i Cruise control is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. For exam-ple, if you accelerate briefly to overtake,cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speedto the last speed stored after you have fin-ished overtaking.

Controls



Driving systems

127

i Deceleration of the vehicle by means ofthe cruise control lever is assisted by auto-matic application of the brakes.On long downhill gradients, the automatictransmission shifts down as a furthermeas-ure.

Making fine adjustments in 1 km/hincrementsX Briefly press the cruise control lever up1 for a higher speed or down4 for alower speed.The last speed stored is increased orreduced.

Deactivating cruise controlThere are several ways to deactivate cruisecontrol:X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-wards6.

orX Brake.or

X Briefly press the cruise control lever in thedirection of arrow5.Variable Speedtronic is selected. LIM indi-cator lamp2 in the cruise control leverlights up.

Cruise control is automatically deactivated if,for example:Ryou depress the parking brakeRyou are driving at less than 30 km/hRESP® is intervening or you deactivateESP®

Ryou move the selector lever toNwhile driv-ing

If cruise control is deactivated, you will heara warning tone. You will see the Cruise con-trol off message in the multi-function dis-play of the speedometer for approximatelyfive seconds.

i The last speed stored is cleared when youswitch off the engine.

Distronic*Distronic regulates the speed and automati-cally maintains the distance to the vehicle infront. It brakes automatically in order to avoidexceeding the set speed. On long and steepdownhill gradients, especially if the vehicle isladen, you must select shift range 1, 2 or 3.By doing so you will make use of the brakingeffect of the engine, which relieves the loadon the brake system and prevents the brakesfrom overheating and wearing too quickly.G Risk of accidentDo not change down for additional enginebraking on a slippery road surface. Thiscould cause the drive wheels to lose theirgrip and the vehicle could skid.

G Risk of accidentDistronic is only an aid designed to assistdriving. The driver remains fully responsiblefor the vehicle's distance from other vehi-cles, the vehicle's speed and braking ingood time.

Controls

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 127

Z


Driving systems

128

Distronic does not react to:RpedestriansRstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. sta-tionary or parked vehiclesRoncoming and crossing trafficDistronic may not detect narrow vehiclesdriving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehi-cles driving on a different line. Therefore,always pay attention to traffic conditionseven when Distronic is activated. Other-wise, you may fail to recognise dangers intime, could cause an accident and injureyourself and others.

If a slower-moving vehicle is detected in front,Distronic causes your vehicle to brake andmaintain a preset distance to the vehicle infront.G Risk of accidentDistronic cannot take account of road andtraffic conditions. Deactivate, or do notactivate, Distronic if it does not detect thevehicle in front, or if it no longer detects it.This is especially the case:Rbefore cornersRon filter lanes

Rwhen changing to a lane with faster mov-ing trafficRin complex driving situations or wherethe lanes are diverted, e.g. at roadworkson a motorway.

Otherwise, Distronic maintains the currentspeed or accelerates up to the set speed.Distronic cannot take account of weatherconditions. Deactivate, or do not activate,Distronic:Rif the roads are slippery, snow-covered oricy. The wheels could lose their gripunder braking or acceleration. The vehi-cle could start to skid.Rif the sensors are dirty or there is poorvisibility, e.g. due to snow, rain or fog.Distance control may be impaired.

Always pay attention to traffic conditionseven when Distronic is activated. Other-wise, you may fail to recognise dangers intime, could cause an accident and injureyourself and others.

If there is no vehicle in front, Distronic oper-ates in the same way as cruise control. Dis-tronic functions in the 30 km/h to180 km/h range.

G Risk of accidentDistronic brakes your vehicle at amaximumof 2 m/s2, depending on its speed. Thiscorresponds to approximately 20% of yourvehicle's maximum braking power. Youmust also apply the brakes yourself if thisbraking power is not sufficient.If Distronic detects a risk of collision with avehicle in front, an intermittent warningtone sounds. Additionally, theE DTRwarning lamp in the speedometer lights upred. Brake to avoid a collision.

Cruise control leverWith the cruise control lever you can operateDistronic and variable Speedtronic.The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise controllever indicates which system you have selec-ted:RLIM indicator lamp off:Distronic is selectedRLIM indicator lamp lit:variable Speedtronic is selected

Controls



Driving systems

129

1 To store the current speed or a higherspeed2 LIM indicator lamp3 To select the current or last stored speed4 To store the current speed or a lower

speed5 To switch between Distronic and variable

Speedtronic6 Deactivating Distronic

Selecting DistronicX Checkwhether LIM indicator lamp2 is off.If it is off, Distronic is already selected.If it is not, press the cruise control lever inthe direction of arrow5.LIM indicator lamp2 in the cruise controllever goes out. Distronic is selected.

Switching on Distronic, storing andmaintaining the current speedIf Distronic is not activated after the cruisecontrol lever is pressed, you will see the mes-sage DTR - - - km/h in the multi-functiondisplay.You cannot activate Distronic in the followingcircumstances:Rif you are driving slower than 30 km/h orfaster than 180 km/hRwhen brakingRwhen you have applied the parking brakeRif ESP® is deactivatedRwhen the selector lever is in position P, Ror NRfor two minutes after the engine is started

X Accelerate the vehicle to the desiredspeed.

X Briefly press the cruise control lever up1 or down4.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.Distronic is activated. The vehicle main-tains the stored speed until the distance tothe vehicle in front becomes too small.

i If you do not fully release the acceleratorpedal, the DTR passive message appearsin the multi-function display. The distanceto a slower-moving vehicle in front will thennot be preset. You will be driving at thespeed you determine with the acceleratorpedal.

Setting a speedX Press the cruise control lever up1 for ahigher speed or down4 for a lower speed.

X Keep the cruise control lever pressed untilthe desired speed is reached.

X Release the cruise control lever.The new speed is stored.

i Deceleration of the vehicle by means ofthe cruise control lever is assisted by auto-matic application of the brakes.On long downhill gradients, the automatictransmission also shifts down.

Controls


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 129

Z


Driving systems

130

Making adjustments in 10 km/h incre-mentsX Briefly press the cruise control lever up1 for a higher speed or down4 for alower speed.The last speed stored is increased orreduced.

Making fine adjustments in 1 km/hincrementsX For a higher speed: briefly pull the cruisecontrol lever towards you3.

orX Keep the cruise control lever pulledtowards you3 until the desired speed isreached.

Storing the current speed or calling upthe last stored speed

G Risk of accidentOnly select a stored speed if you knowwhatthat speed is and whether it is suitable forthe current situation. Otherwise, suddenacceleration or braking could endanger youor others.


X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.Distronic is activated and accepts the cur-rent speed if it is activated for the first time,or adjusts the vehicle's speed to the lastspeed stored.

Setting the specifiedminimumdistancefor DistronicYou can set the specified minimum distancefor Distronic by varying the time spanbetween one and two seconds. This time spandetermines the distance that Distronic shouldmaintain from the vehicle in front, dependingon the road speed. You can read this distancein the multi-function display (Y page 132).

Example (except SL 63 AMG)1 To activate/deactivate the distancewarn-

ing function2 To adjust the set distanceIn the SL 63 AMG the button and thumbwheelcan be found on the right-hand side of thecentre console.

Controls



Driving systems

131

Adjusting the set distanceX To increase: turn thumbwheel2 towardsthe¯ symbol.Distronic thenmaintains a greater distancebetween your vehicle and the vehicle infront.

X To decrease: turn thumbwheel2 towardsthe® symbol.Distronic thenmaintains a shorter distancebetween your vehicle and the vehicle infront.

i Make sure that you maintain the mini-mum distance to the vehicle in frontrequired by law. Adjust the distance to thevehicle in front if necessary.

Distance warning functionEven if Distronic is deactivated, this functionwarns you at speeds above 30 km/h if:Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is tooshort for the speed you are driving at forseveral seconds. TheE DTR warninglamp in the speedometer lights up in red.Ryou are approaching a vehicle in front at toogreat a speed. You then hear an intermit-tent warning tone, and theE DTR warn-

ing lamp in the speedometer lights up inred.

You must apply the brakes yourself in ordertomaintain the correct distance to the vehicleand to avoid a collision.G Risk of accidentBe especially observant of traffic condi-tions when theE DTR warning lamp inthe speedometer lights up or an intermit-tent warning tone sounds.Brake or take evasive action as necessary.

i Distronic does not always clearly recog-nise complex road and traffic conditions.Youmay then receive a false distancewarn-ing tone or none at all.

X To activate/deactivate: press button1.When the function is activated, the indica-tor lamp in button1 lights up and a loud-speaker symbol appears in the display.When the function is deactivated, the indi-cator lamp in button1 goes out and theloudspeaker symbol disappears from themulti-function display.

Distronic displays in the speedometer

1 White/redE DTR warning lamp2 Stored speed

i For design reasons, the speed displayedin the speedometer may differ slightly fromthe speed set for Distronic.

When Distronic detects a vehicle ahead, theE DTR warning lamp in the speedometerlights up in white.

Controls


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 131

Z


Driving systems

132

Distronic menu in the on-board com-puterYou can read the current Distronic settingsin the Distronic menu. The reading in themulti-function display depends on if Distronicand the distance warning function are activa-ted or deactivated.X Press theè orÿ button repeatedlyuntil one of the following two displaysappears in the multi-function display.

Distronic deactivatedWhenDistronic is deactivated you will see thestandard Distronic display in the multi-func-tion display.

1 Vehicle in front, if detected2 Distance indicator, displaying current dis-

tance to the vehicle in front3 Specified minimum distance to the vehi-

cle in front, adjustable4 Own vehicle

5 Symbol for activated distance warningfunction

Distronic activatedWhen you activate Distronic, you will see theDTR symbol and the stored speed in the left-hand multi-function display.

1 Display for activated Distronic2 Stored speed

Deactivating Distronic

1 Deactivating Distronic2 LIM indicator lamp3 To switch between Distronic and variable

Speedtronic

There are several ways to deactivate Dis-tronic:X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-wards1.

orX Brake.or

Controls



Driving systems

133

X Briefly press the cruise control lever in thedirection of arrow3.Variable Speedtronic is selected. LIM indi-cator lamp2 in the cruise control leverlights up.

i You will see the DTR off message in themulti-function display for approximatelyfive seconds.The last speed stored is cleared when youswitch off the engine.

i Distronic is not deactivated if you depressthe accelerator pedal. If you acceleratebriefly to overtake, Distronic adjusts thevehicle's speed to the last speed storedafter you have finished overtaking.

Distronic is automatically deactivated if:Ryou depress the parking brakeRyou are driving at less than 30 km/hRESP® is intervening or you deactivateESP®

Ryou move the selector lever toNwhile driv-ing

If Distronic is deactivated, you will hear awarning tone. You will see the DTR off mes-

sage in the multi-function display for approx-imately five seconds.

Tips for driving with DistronicThe following contains descriptions of certainroad and traffic conditions in which you mustbe particularly attentive. In such situations,brake if necessary. Distronic is then deacti-vated.

Cornering, going into and coming out of abend

The ability of Distronic to detect vehicleswhen cornering is limited. Your vehicle maybrake unexpectedly or belatedly.

Vehicles travelling on a different line

Distronic may not detect vehicles travellingon a different line. The distance to the vehiclein front will be too short.

Other vehicles changing lane

Controls


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 133

Z


Driving systems

134

Distronic has not yet detected the vehiclecutting in. The distance to this vehicle will betoo short.

Narrow vehicles

Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle infront on the edge of the carriageway, becauseof its relatively narrow width. The distance tothe vehicle in front will be too short.

SpeedtronicSpeedtronic brakes automatically so that youdo not exceed the set speed. On long andsteep downhill gradients, especially if thevehicle is laden, you must select shift range1, 2 or 3 in good time. By doing so you willmake use of the braking effect of the engine,which relieves the load on the brake systemand prevents the brakes from overheatingand wearing too quickly. If you need addi-tional braking, depress the brake pedalrepeatedly rather than continuously.G Risk of accidentNever depress the brake pedal continu-ously while the vehicle is in motion, e.g.never cause the brakes to rub by applyingconstant slight pedal pressure. This causesthe brake system to overheat, increasesthe braking distance and can lead to thebrakes failing completely.

G Risk of accidentDo not change down for additional enginebraking on a slippery road surface. Thiscould cause the drive wheels to lose theirgrip and the vehicle could skid.

You can set a variable or permanent limitspeed:RVariable for speed limits, e.g. in built-upareasRPermanent for long-term speed restric-tions, e.g. for driving with winter tyres(Y page 136)

G Risk of accidentSpeedtronic is only an aid designed toassist driving. You are responsible for thevehicle's speed and for braking in goodtime.

i The speed indicated in the speedometermay differ slightly from the limit speedstored.

Variable SpeedtronicWith the cruise control lever, you can operatecruise control, Distronic* and variableSpeedtronic.The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise controllever indicates which system you have selec-ted:RLIM indicator lamp off:

Controls

* optional



Driving systems

135

cruise control or Distronic* is selectedRLIM indicator lamp lit:Variable Speedtronic is selected

You can use the cruise control lever to limitthe speed to any speed above 30 km/h whilethe engine is running.

1 To store the current speed or a higherspeed2 LIM indicator lamp3 To store the current speed or call up the

last stored speed or to make fine adjust-ments in 1 km/h increments4 To store the current speed or a lower

speed5 To switch between cruise control, Dis-

tronic* and variable Speedtronic6 To deactivate variable Speedtronic

Selecting variable SpeedtronicX Checkwhether LIM indicator lamp2 is on.If it is on, variable Speedtronic is alreadyselected.If it is not, press the cruise control lever inthe direction of arrow5.LIM indicator lamp2 in the cruise controllever lights up. Variable Speedtronic isselected.

G Risk of accidentIf there is a change of drivers, advise thenew driver of the limit speed stored.Only use Speedtronic when you do not haveto accelerate suddenly to a speed higherthan the stored limit speed allows. Youcould otherwise cause an accident.You can only exceed the limit speed storedif you deactivate variable Speedtronic:Rusing the cruise control lever.Rby depressing the accelerator pedalbeyond the pressure point (kickdown).

It is not possible to deactivate variableSpeedtronic by braking.

Storing the current speedYou can use the cruise control lever to limitthe speed to any speed above 30 km/h whilethe engine is running.X Briefly press the cruise control lever up1 or down4.The current speed is stored. You will seethe stored speed in the multi-function dis-play.

Storing the current speed or calling upthe last stored speed

G Risk of accidentOnly select a stored speed if you knowwhatthat speed is and whether it is suitable forthe current driving and traffic situation.Otherwise, sudden braking could endangeryou or others.


Controls

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 135

Z


Driving systems

136

Making adjustments in 10 km/h incre-mentsX Briefly press the cruise control lever up1 for a higher speed or down4 for alower speed.

orX Keep the cruise control lever pressed untilthe desired speed is set. Press the cruisecontrol lever, up1 for a higher speed ordown4 for a lower speed.

Making fine adjustments in 1 km/hincrementsX For a higher speed: briefly pull the cruisecontrol lever towards you3.

orX Keep the cruise control lever pulledtowards you3 until the desired speed isset.

Deactivating variable SpeedtronicThere are several ways to deactivate variableSpeedtronic:X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-wards6.

or

X Briefly press the cruise control lever in thedirection of arrow5.LIM indicator lamp2 in the cruise controllever goes out. Variable Speedtronic isdeactivated.Cruise control or Distronic* is selected.

Variable Speedtronic is deactivated automat-ically when you depress the accelerator pedalbeyond the pressure point (kickdown), butonly if your current speed does not differ bymore than 20 km/h from the stored speed.You will hear a warning tone if this is the case.G Risk of accidentIt is not possible to deactivate variableSpeedtronic by braking.

i The last speed stored is cleared when youswitch off the engine.

Permanent Speedtronici Permanent Speedtronic is only availablein certain countries.

You can use the on-board computer to limitthe speed permanently to a value between160 km/h (e.g. for driving with winter tyres)and the maximum speed.

Shortly before the stored speed is reached itappears in the multi-function display.You cannot exceed the stored limit speed,even if you depress the accelerator pedalbeyond the pressure point (kickdown).

Setting permanent SpeedtronicX Press theè or· button to select theSettings menu (Y page 116).

X Press thej button to call up the selec-tion of submenus.

X Press theæ orç button to select theVehicle submenu.

X Press thej button to select Speedlimit (winter tyres).

X Press theæ orç button to select thedesired setting.The following settings can be selected:ROff

Controls

* optional



Driving systems

137

Permanent Speedtronic is deactivated.RA limit speed between 240 km/h and160 km/h in increments of 10 km/h

X To select a different display, press thej,è orÿ button.

SBC HoldSBC® Hold assists the driver in the followingsituations:Rwhen pulling away, especially on steepslopesRwhen manoeuvring on steep slopesRwhen waiting in trafficThe vehicle is kept stationary without thedriver having to depress the brake pedal.The braking effect is cancelled and SBC Holddeactivated when you depress the accelera-tor pedal to pull away.

Activation conditionsYou can activate SBC Hold if:Rthe vehicle is stationaryRthe engine is runningRthe driver's door is closed

Rthe parking brake is not appliedRthe bonnet is closedRthe selector lever is in position D, R or N

Activating SBC HoldX Make sure that the activation conditionsare met.

X Depress the brake.X Depress the brake again quickly untilSBC H appears in the multi-function dis-play.SBC Hold is activated. You can release thebrake pedal.

1 SBC Hold is activated.

G Risk of accidentThe vehicle's brakes are applied when SBCHold is activated. For this reason, deacti-vate SBC Hold if the vehicle is to be set inmotion by other means (e.g. in a car washor by towing).

Deactivating SBC HoldSBC Hold is deactivated if:Ryou accelerate when the selector lever is inposition D or RRyou move the selector lever to position PRyou apply the brakes again with a certainamount of pressure until the SBC H mes-sage in the multi-function display goes out

G Risk of accidentNever get out of the vehicle when SBC Holdis activated.SBC Hold must never be operated or deac-tivated by a passenger or from outside thevehicle.SBC Hold does not replace the parkingbrake and must not be used for parking.The SBC Hold braking effect is cancelledand the vehicle could roll away if:

Controls


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 137

Z


Driving systems

138

RSBC Hold is deactivated by an occupantin the vehicle by depressing the acceler-ator pedal or the brake pedalRthere is a malfunction in the system or aninterruption in the power supply, e.g. bat-tery failureRthe electrical system in the engine com-partment or the fuses have been tam-pered withRthe battery is disconnected

G Risk of accidentIf you wish to leave the vehicle or park it,deactivate SBCHold and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

You will see a warning message in the multi-function display if SBC Hold is activated and:Rthe driver's door is opened and you releasethe seat beltRthe ignition is switched offRthe bonnet is openedSelector lever to P

X Immediately depress the brake or shift theselector lever to P to prevent the vehiclefrom rolling away.SBC Hold is deactivated. The warning mes-sage in the multi-function display disap-pears.

You will hear a continuous tone if SBC Hold isactivated and you:Rstop the engine and open the driver's doorRopen the bonnetThe sounding of the horn alerts you to the factthat the vehicle has been parked whileSBC Hold is still activated. The soundbecomes louder if you attempt to lock thevehicle. The vehicle is not locked until SBCHOLD is deactivated.

i If the ignition has been switched off, theengine cannot be started again untilSBC Hold has been deactivated.

If SBCHold is activated and has a system faultor there is a disruption in the power supply,themulti-function display shows themessageBrake immediately. Depress the brakefirmly, until the warning message in the multi-function display goes out, or move the selec-tor lever to position P. This deactivatesSBC Hold.

RACE START (SL 63 AMG)RACE START enables optimal accelerationfrom a standing start with suitable high-griproad surface conditions.G Risk of accidentRACE START is only available when ESP®Sports mode is activated. ESP® Sport sta-bilises the vehicle in a limited manner if thevehicle starts to skid or when a wheel isspinning.RACE START should only be used on closedoff circuits. Always adapt your driving styleto suit the prevailing road and weather con-ditions.

Conditions for activationRACE START can be activated whenRthe doors are closedRthe engine is running and it has reached anoperating temperature of approximately80 †. This is the case when the engine oiltemperature lamp in the multi-function dis-play stops flashingRESP® Sport is activated (Y page 56)Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-aheadposition

Controls



Driving systems

139

Rthe vehicle is at rest and the brake pedal isdepressed (left foot)Rthe gear selector lever is in position D.

Activating RACE STARTX Depress the brake pedal with your left foot,keep it depressed.

X Turn the program selector switch clock-wise (Y page 101), until the RS lamp lightsup.The left-hand multi-function display showsthe RACE START Cancel Paddle DOWNmessage and the right-hand display showsthe RACE START Confirm Paddle UPmessage.

X To cancel: pull the left paddle(Y page 102).

orX To confirm: pull the right paddle(Y page 102).The left-hand multi-function display showsthe RACE START message and the right-hand display shows the Depress accelpedal message.

X Depress the accelerator pedal fully.The engine speed rises to approximately4,000 rpm.The left-hand multi-function display showsthe RACE START message and the right-hand multi-function display shows theRelease brake to start message.

X Take your foot off the brake, but keep theaccelerator pedal depressed.The vehicle pulls away at maximum accel-eration.The left-hand multi-function display showsthe RACE START message and the right-hand multi-function display shows theactive message.

RACE START is deactivated when the vehiclereaches a speed of approximately 50 km/h.Drive program S+ is activated. ESP® Sportremains activated.

i If RACE START is used repeatedly in ashort period of time, it is only availableagain after having driven the vehicle a cer-tain distance.

Active Body Control* (ABC)

Vehicle levelYour vehicle automatically adjusts its rideheight to reduce petrol consumption andimprove driving safety.Depending on the vehicle height that hasbeen set, the vehicle automatically adjusts itsheight according to the current speed. Thevehicle is lowered as the speed increases. Asthe speed is reduced, the vehicle is raised upto the set vehicle height.G Risk of injurySL 63 AMG, SL 65 AMG:The vehicle is lowered from the normal levelwhen the engine is switched off. Make sure,therefore, that nobody is in the vicinity ofthe wheel housing or under the vehiclewhen you switch off the engine. Otherwise,limbs could become trapped.

! SL 63 AMG, SL 65 AMG:The vehicle is lowered from the normal levelwhen the engine is switched off. Make surewhen parking that you position your vehicleso that it does not make contact with thekerb as it descends. Otherwise, the vehiclecould be damaged.

Controls

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 139

Z


Driving systems

140

SL 63 AMG, SL 65 AMG: the vehicle is auto-matically lowered from the normal level whenthe engine is switched off. The vehicle is low-ered approximately 15 mm at the front andapproximately 10 mm at the rear.

Setting the vehicle levelG Risk of injuryMake sure that nobody is in the vicinity ofthe wheel housing or under the vehicle

while lowering the vehicle when it is sta-tionary. Otherwise, limbs could becometrapped.

The following vehicle heights can be set:

Vehicle height Suitable for Height above normal ata standstill

Automatic lowering Indicator lamps

Normal Normal operation None 15 mm at most Both off

Height 1 Use of snow chains Approx. 25 mm 25 mm at most One on

Height 2 Very uneven roads Approx. 50 mm 50 mm at most Both on

i The change is so slight that you may notnotice any difference.

Only use height 1 and height 2 when neces-sary. Otherwise fuel consumption increasesand the handling is affected.Your selection remains saved even when youswitch off the engine.

1 Indicator lamp 12 Indicator lamp 23 To set the vehicle level

X Make sure that the engine is running.X Press button3 repeatedly until thedesired vehicle level is set:Rthe normal level is selected when bothindicator lamps are off.Rwhen one indicator lamp is lit, height 1 isselected.Rwhen both indicator lamps are lit,height 2 is selected.

Controls



Driving systems

141

Suspension tuningThe suspension tuning depends on:Ryour driving styleRthe road surface conditionsRthe payloadRyour individual selectionThe suspension tuning can be set for a "com-fortable" or "sporty" driving style.Your selection remains saved even when youswitch off the engine.

Selecting the suspension tuning (exceptSL 63 AMG)

1 To select the suspension tuning2 Indicator lamp

X Make sure that the engine is running.

If indicator lamp2 is not lit:X Press button1.Indicator lamp2 lights up. You have selec-ted the suspension for a sporty drivingstyle.

If indicator lamp2 is lit:X Press button1.Indicator lamp2 goes out. You have selec-ted the suspension for a comfortable driv-ing style.

Selecting the suspension tuning(SL 63 AMG)

1 To select the suspension tuning2 To store AMG settings

X Make sure that the engine is running.

If indicator lamp1 is not lit:X Press button1.Button1 lights up red. You have selectedthe suspension for a sporty driving style.

If button1 is lit:X Press button1.Button1 is no longer lit. You have selectedthe suspension for a comfortable drivingstyle.

Storing and calling up settingsOnce the suspension tuning and gearshiftprogram have been selected, you can storeand call up your settings using AMG button2.X To store: press AMG button2 until youhear a tone.

X To call up: press AMG button2.The stored suspension tuning and gearshiftprogram are selected.

X To display: briefly press AMG button2.Your selection appears in the multi-func-tion display.

Controls


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 141

Z


Driving systems

142

Parktronic*

G Risk of accidentParktronic is only an aid andmay not detectall obstacles. It is not a substitute for atten-tive driving.You are always responsible for safety andmust continue to pay attention to yourimmediate surroundings when parking andmanoeuvring. You could otherwise endan-ger yourself and others.

G Risk of injuryMake sure that no persons or animals arein the manoeuvring range. Otherwise, theycould be injured.

Parktronic is an electronic parking aid. It indi-cates visually and audibly the distancebetween your vehicle and an object.Parktronic is automatically activated whenyou switch on the ignition and release theparking brake.Parktronic is deactivated at speeds above18 km/h. It is reactivated at lower speeds.Parktronic monitors the area around yourvehicle using six sensors in the front bumperand four sensors in the rear bumper.

1 Sensors in the front bumper

Range of the sensorsThe sensors must be free of dirt, ice andslush, otherwise they may not function cor-rectly. Clean the sensors regularly, takingcare not to scratch or damage them.

Side view

Top view

Controls

* optional



Driving systems

143

Front sensors

Centre Approximately 100 cm

Corners Approximately 60 cm

Rear sensors



! Pay particular attention to objects aboveor below the sensors when parking, suchas flower pots or trailer towbars. Parktronicdoes not detect such objects when they arein the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. Youcould damage the vehicle or the objects.Ultrasonic sources such as an automaticcar wash, a lorry's compressed-air brakesor a pneumatic drill could cause Parktronicto malfunction.

Minimum distance



If there is an obstacle within this range, allwarning displays light up and a tone sounds.If the distance falls below the minimum clear-ance, it may no longer be shown.

Warning displaysThe warning displays show the distancebetween the sensors and the obstacle. Thewarning display for the front area is locatedon the dashboard above the centre air vents.The warning display for the rear area is loca-ted below the draught stop in the rear wall ofthe rear compartment.

Front area warning display1 Left-hand side of the vehicle2 Right-hand side of the vehicle

The warning display for each side of the vehi-cle is divided into six yellow and two redsegments. Parktronic is operational when theframe lights up.The selector lever position determines whichwarning display is active:

Selector lever at Warning display

D Front area activated

R or N Rear and front areasactivated

P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicleapproaches an obstacle, depending on thevehicle's distance from the obstacle.RFront area: from the seventh segmentonwards, you will hear an intermittentwarning tone; from the eighth segmentonwards, you will hear a continuous warn-ing tone for a maximum of two seconds.You have reached the minimum distance.RRear area: from the first segment onwards,you will hear an intermittent warning tone.The interval gets shorter after each seg-ment. From the eighth segment you willhear a continuous warning tone. You have

Controls


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 143

Z


Air conditioning

144

reached the minimum distance. The con-tinuous warning tone is muted immediatelyif you shift to D or P.

Deactivating/activating Parktronic

1 Indicator lamp2 To deactivate/activate ParktronicIf indicator lamp1 is on, Parktronic is deac-tivated.

i Parktronic is automatically activatedwhen you turn the key to position 2 in theignition lock.

Air conditioning

General notesThe automatic air conditioning controls thetemperature and the humidity of the vehicleinterior and filters out undesirable substan-ces from the air.Automatic air conditioning is only operationalwhen the engine is running. Optimum opera-tion is only achieved when you drive with theside windows closed.

i When the weather is warm, ventilate thevehicle for a brief period. This will speed upthe cooling process and the desired interiortemperature will be reached more quickly.

i The integrated filter filters out most par-ticles of dust and completely filters outpollen. A clogged filter reduces the amountof air supplied to the vehicle interior. Forthis reason, you should always observe theinterval for replacing the filter, which isspecified in the Service Booklet. As it

depends on environmental conditions, e.g.heavy air pollution, the interval may beshorter than stated in the Service Booklet.

G Risk of accidentObserve the settings recommended on thefollowing pages. The windows could other-wise mist up. This may obstruct your viewof the traffic situation, thereby causing anaccident.

Controls



Air conditioning

145

Overview of air-conditioning system functions

Automatic air conditioning

Function Recommendation/Notes

1 Display for air distribution, left (Y page 150)

2 y Demists the windscreen i Only use the "demisting" function until the wind-screen is clear again.

(Y page 151)

Controls


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 145

Z


Air conditioning

146


3 , Activates/deactivates Thermatic i Only use this operating mode for a short time, e.g. ina tunnel. Otherwise, the windows can mist up due tolack of fresh air.

(Y page 152)

4 ¯ Switches the rear window heating on/off i At very low temperatures, the rear window heating isonly switched on once the vehicle interior has warmedup.

(Y page 152)

5 Display for air distribution, right (Y page 150)

6 Ñ Sets the air distribution, right (Y page 150)

7 Sets the temperature, right i Set the temperature to 22 †. (Y page 148)

8 9 Activates/deactivates cooling with air dehumidifi-cation

i Switch on the air conditioning with air dehumidifica-tion function. The indicator lamp in the9 buttonlights up.

(Y page 147)

9 Switches the residual heat function on/off i You can use the residual heat to heat or ventilate thevehicle interior after you have switched off the ignition.

(Y page 153)

9 ´ Activates/deactivates the automatic air condition-ing

i Activate automatic air conditioning. The indicatorlamp in the´ button goes out.

(Y page 147)

a Q Sets the airflow (Y page 151)

Controls



Air conditioning

147


b U Controls the air conditioning automatically i Activate the automatic air conditioning. The indicatorlamp in theU button comes on.

(Y page 148)

c Sets the temperature, left i Set the temperature to 22 †. (Y page 148)

d Ñ Sets the air distribution, left (Y page 150)

Switching the air conditioning on/offi When the air conditioning is switched off,the air supply and air circulation are alsoswitched off. Only select this setting briefly,otherwise the windows may mist up.

i Activate the air conditioning primarilyusing theU button.


X To activate: press the´ button.The indicator lamp in the´ button goesout. The previously selected settings comeinto effect again.

or

X Turn thumbwheel7 orc clockwise oranti-clockwise (Y page 145).The indicator lamp in the´ button goesout.

orX Press theU button.The indicator lamp in theU buttoncomes on. Airflow and air distribution areset to automatic mode.

orX Press they button.The indicator lamp in the´ button goesout.

X To deactivate: press the´ button.The indicator lamp in the´ buttoncomes on.

Switching cooling with air-dehumidi-fication on/offThe "cooling with dehumidification" functionis only available when the engine is running.The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehu-midified according to the temperature selec-ted. This prevents the windows from mistingup.G Risk of accidentIf the "cooling with air dehumidification"function is deactivated, the air inside thevehicle will not be cooled (during warmweather) or dehumidified. The windowscould mist up more quickly. This may pre-vent you from observing the traffic condi-tions, thereby causing an accident.

Controls


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 147

Z


Air conditioning

148

H Environmental noteThe cooling system uses the refrigerantR134A. This refrigerant does not damagethe earth's ozone layer.

i Condensation may drip from the under-side of the vehicle when Thermatic is incooling mode.

X To activate: press the9 button.The indicator lamp in the9 button lightsup.

X To deactivate: press the9 button.The indicator lamp in the9 button goesout. The cooling with air dehumidificationfunction has a delayed switch-off feature.

Controlling the air conditioning auto-maticallyIn automatic mode, the set temperature ismaintained at a constant level fully automat-ically. To do so, the system automaticallyregulates the temperature of the dispensedair, the airflow and the air distribution.The automatic air conditioning will achieveoptimal operation if "cooling with air dehu-midification" is also activated. If necessary,coolingwith air dehumidification can be deac-tivated.X Make sure that the key is in position 2 inthe ignition lock.

X Set the desired temperature.X To activate: press theU button.The indicator lamp in theU buttoncomes on. Automatic air distribution andairflow are activated.

X To deactivate: press theU button.The indicator lamp in theU button goesout. The airflow is set to level 3. The airflowis directed through the centre and side airvents.

or

X Press one of theÑ buttons.The indicator lamp in theU button goesout. The air conditioning is controlled man-ually for the corresponding side of the vehi-cle.

orX Turn theQ thumbwheel clockwise oranti-clockwise.The indicator lamp in theU button goesout. Automatic airflow is deactivated andthe airflow is controlled according to thelevel set. Automatic air distributionremains activated.

Setting the temperatureDifferent temperatures can be set for thedriver's and front-passenger sides.X Make sure that the key is in position 2 inthe ignition lock.

X To increase/reduce: turn thumb-wheels7 andc clockwise or anti-clock-wise to the desired level (Y page 145). Onlychange the temperature setting in smallincrements. Start at 22 †.

Controls



Air conditioning

149

Adjusting the air vents

G Risk of injuryVery hot or very cold air can flow from theair vents. This could cause burns or frost-bite to bare skin in the immediate vicinityof the vents. Keep bare skin away fromthese air outlets. If necessary, direct theairflow away to a different area of the vehi-cle interior.

Please observe the following notes to ensurethat the air can flow freely through the airvents:RKeep the air inlet between the windscreenand the bonnet free of deposits, such as iceand snow, to guarantee the supply of freshair into the vehicle interior.RNever cover the vents or air inlet and outletgrilles in the vehicle interior.

i Position the sliders for the centre airvents in the central position to provide vir-tually draught-free ventilation.

Setting the centre air vents

Centre air vents1 Fixed centre air vent2 Swivelling centre air vent, right3 Thumbwheel for centre air vents4 Swivelling centre air vent, left

X To open/close the swivelling centre airvent: turn thumbwheel3 up or down.

X To open/close the fixed centre air vent:turn thumbwheel3 up beyond the firstdetent position or turn it down.

Adjusting the side air vents

Side air vents1 Side window demister vent2 Side air vent3 Side air vent thumbwheel

X To open/close: turn thumbwheel3 up ordown.

i Demister vent1 is never shut com-pletely, even if side air vent2 is shut.

Setting the glove compartment air ventThe glove compartment can be ventilated, forinstance to cool its contents, when the auto-matic air-conditioning system is activated.The level of airflowdepends on the airflowandair distribution settings. The temperature of

Controls


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 149

Z


Air conditioning

150

the air is approximately the same as that ofthe air flowing from the centre air vents.

! Close the glove compartment air ventwhen heating mode is activated and acti-vate "cooling with air dehumidification" ifthe outside temperature is high. Otherwise,temperature-sensitive items stored in theglove compartment could be damaged.

Glove compartment air vent1 Air vent thumbwheel2 Air vent

X To open/close: turn thumbwheel1 up ordown.

Setting the AIRSCARF* vents

G Risk of injuryWhen AIRSCARF is in operation, very hot aircan flow from the vents in the headrestraints. This could cause burns to bareskin in the immediate vicinity of the vents.Make sure that you reduce the heater out-put in time.

1 AIRSCARF ventYou can adjust the blower output of the AIR-SCARF vents using the AIRSCARF button(Y page 76).

Setting the air distributionThe air distribution can be set individually forthe driver's and front-passenger sides.The symbols for the air distribution have thefollowing meanings:

Symbol Meaning

{ Directs the airflow through thedemister vents

a Directs the airflow through thecentre and side air vents

Y Directs the airflow through thefootwell air vents

Ú Directs the airflow through thecentre and side air vents and thefootwell air vents

[ Directs the airflow through thefootwell and demister vents


X Press one of theÑ buttons repeatedlyuntil the setting desired for the respectiveside of the vehicle is displayed.

Controls

* optional



Air conditioning

151

Setting the airflowX Make sure that the key is in position 2 inthe ignition lock.

X To increase/reduce: turn thumbwheela clockwise or anti-clockwise(Y page 145).

Demisting the windscreeni You should only select the "demisting"function until the windscreen is clear again.


X To activate: press they button.The indicator lamp in they buttoncomes on.The system automatically switches to thefollowing functions:Rcooling with air dehumidification onRhigh airflow18

Rhigh temperature18

Rair distribution to the windscreen andfront side windowsRair-recirculation mode off

X To deactivate: press they button.The indicator lamp in they button goesout. The previously selected settings comeinto effect again. The cooling with air dehu-midification function remains on. Air-recir-culation mode remains deactivated.

orX Press theU button.The indicator lamp in they button goesout. Airflow and air distribution are set toautomatic mode.

orX Turn thumbwheel7 orc clockwise oranti-clockwise (Y page 145).

orX Turn thumbwheela clockwise or anti-clockwise (Y page 145).

Demisting the windows

Windows misted up on the insideX Activate the "cooling function with air-dehumidification" function.

X Activate the automatic mode.X If the windows continue tomist up, activatethe "demisting" function.

Windows misted up on the outsideX Activate the windscreen wipers.X Press one of theÑ buttons repeatedlyuntil thea,Ú orY symbol is dis-played.

i You should only select this setting untilthe windscreen is clear again.

18 Depending on the outside temperature.

Controls


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 151

Z


Air conditioning

152

Switching the rear window heatingon/off

G Risk of accidentClear all windows of ice or snow before set-ting off. Impaired visibility could otherwiseendanger you and others.

i At very low temperatures, the rear win-dow heating is only switched on once thevehicle interior has warmed up.

i The rear window heating has a high cur-rent draw. You should therefore switch itoff as soon as the window is clear, as it onlyswitches off automatically after approxi-mately 30 minutes.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the rearwindow heating may switch off.


X Press the¯ button.The indicator lamp in the¯ button lightsup or goes out.

Activating/deactivating air-recircula-tion modeYou can deactivate the flow of fresh air ifunpleasant odours are entering the vehiclefrom outside. The air already inside the vehi-cle will then be recirculated.G Risk of accidentOnly switch over to air-recirculation modebriefly at low outside temperatures. Other-wise, the windows could mist up, thusimpairing visibility and endangering your-self and others. This may prevent you fromobserving the traffic conditions, therebycausing an accident.


X To activate: press the, button.The indicator lamp in the, buttoncomes on.

i Air-recirculation mode is activated auto-matically at high outside temperatures.When air-recirculation mode is activatedautomatically, the indicator lamp inthe, button is not lit.Outside air is added after about30 minutes.

X To deactivate: press the, button.The indicator lamp in the, button goesout.

i Air-recirculation mode switches off auto-matically:Rafter approximately five minutes at out-side temperatures below approximately5 †Rafter approximately five minutes if the airdehumidification is deactivatedRafter approximately 30 minutes at out-side temperatures above approximately5 †

Air-recirculation mode with the conve-nience opening/closing feature

G Risk of injuryMake sure that nobody can become trap-ped between the side window and the doorframe as the side windows are opened andclosed. Do not place objects or lean againstthe side window when it is being opened orclosed. You or the objects could be drawnin or become trapped between the sidewindow and the door frame as the window

Controls



Air conditioning

153

moves. If there is a risk of entrapment,press the, button again. If necessary,press the switch that stops, opens or closesthe side window in the opposite direction.

X Convenience closing: press and holdthe, button until the side windowshave closed.The indicator lamp in the, buttoncomes on. Air-recirculation mode is activa-ted.

X Convenience opening: press and holdthe, button until the side windowshave returned to their original position.The indicator lamp in the, button goesout. Air-recirculation mode is deactivated.

i If you open the side windows manuallyafter closing using the convenience closingfeature, it will remain in this position whenopened using the convenience opening fea-ture.

Switching the residual heat on and offIt is possible to make use of the residual heatof the engine to continue heating the station-ary vehicle for up to 30 minutes after theengine has been switched off. The heatingtime depends on the set interior temperature.

i The blower will run at a low speed regard-less of the airflow setting.

i If you activate the "residual heat" functionat high temperatures, only the ventilationwill be activated. The blower runs atmedium speed.

X Make sure that the key is in position 0 inthe ignition lock or that it has beenremoved.

X To switch on: press the9 button.The indicator lamp in the9 button lightsup.

X To deactivate: press the9 button.The indicator lamp in the9 button goesout.

i The residual heat automatically switchesoff after around 30minutes or if:Rthe ignition is switched onRthe battery voltage drops

Controls


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 153

Z


Opening/closing the roof

154


For safety reasons, the roof can only beopened and closed when the vehicle is sta-tionary.G Risk of accident and injuryAlways open or close the roof fully beforedriving.If the roof does not open or close fully, theroof hydraulic system is depressurised andthe roof is lowered:Rafter about seven minutes if the ignitionis switched onRafter about 15 seconds if the ignition isswitched off

A warning tone sounds shortly beforehand.TheK and the being loweredmessageappear in the multi-function display.Lock the roof again before driving on. Oth-erwise the unlocked roof could open duringthe journey and cause you to lose controlof your vehicle. You or other persons couldbe injured as a result.

! Never sit on the rear shelf or store heavyobjects there. You will otherwise damagethe roof and the rear shelf of your vehicle.

! When opening and closing the roof, makesure that:Rthere is sufficient upward clearance, asthe roof swings upwardsRthere is sufficient clearance behind thevehicle as the boot lid swings backwardsbeyond the bumperRthe boot is only loaded to below the bootseparatorRthe boot separator is not pushed up bythe loadRthe boot separator is closedRthe boot lid is closedRno roof rack is fittedRthe outside temperature is above -15 †Rthe roof is not dirty or wetYou will otherwise damage the roof and theboot of your vehicle.

Using the roof switch

G Risk of injuryWhen opening or closing the roof, makesure that nobody is trapped or injured bymoving parts such as the boot lid, thehinged roof or the roof linkage.If there is a risk of entrapment, release theroof switch immediately. The roof foldingmechanism stops immediately.

The switch is on the lower section of thecentre console.

1 To close the roof2 To open the roof

Controls




155

Openingi Make sure that the roof and rear windoware dry before opening the roof. Otherwise,water could enter the interior or boot.

X Engage the parking brake (Y page 98).X Make sure that the boot separator is closed(Y page 156).

X Close the boot lid.X Make sure that the key is in position 2 inthe ignition lock.

X Pull the roof switch in the direction of arrow2 until the soft-top has been fully retrac-ted into the boot and the Vario-roof inoperation message disappears from themulti-function display.

ClosingX Engage the parking brake (Y page 98).X Make sure that the boot separator is closed(Y page 156).

X Close the boot lid.


X Press the roof switch in the direction ofarrow1 until the soft-top has been fullyretracted into the boot and the Vario-roof in operation message disappearsfrom the multi-function display.

With the key

G Risk of injuryWhen opening or closing the roof, makesure that nobody is trapped or injured bymoving parts such as the boot lid, thehinged roof or the roof linkage.If there is a risk of entrapment, immediatelyrelease thek orj button on the key.The roof folding mechanism stops immedi-ately.

Using the key to open and close the roof

OpeningX Point the tip of the key at the door handle.X Press and hold thek button until theroof is fully opened.The seat ventilation* on the driver's seat isswitched on. The side windows open.

ClosingX Point the tip of the key at the door handle.X Press and hold thej button until theroof is fully closed.The roof and side windows close.

Controls

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 155

Z



156

Locking the roof againThe roof is unlocked when:RtheK Vario-roof in operationmessage appears in the multi-function dis-playRyou hear a warning tone or the indicatorlamp flashes for up to ten seconds whenpulling away or while driving

You can lock the roof again if it is not lockedfully.

Before driving onX Make sure that the key is in position 2 inthe ignition lock.

X Push the roof switch forwards(Y page 154).

While drivingX Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-tion to road and traffic conditions.

X Push the roof switch forwards(Y page 154).

Boot separatorThe boot separator can be used to cover lug-gage and loads in the boot.

! To avoid damaging the roof or luggagewhen folding back the roof, you should:Ronly load the boot to below the boot sep-aratorRnot place any objects on or in front of theboot separatorRnot place any objects on the coverbehind the roll-over barsRnot allow the load to push up the bootseparator

Closed boot separator1 Boot separator2 Zipper

3 Fastening eyelets4 Handle

Closing the boot separatorX Pull boot separator1 backwards in thedirection of the arrow by handle4.

X Hook boot separator1 into fastening eye-lets3 in the side panels.

Opening the boot separatorX Remove boot separator1 from fasteningeyelets3 in the side panels.

X Push boot separator1 forwards againstthe direction of the arrow by handle4.

Removing the boot separatorX Fold the material cover of the zipper over ifnecessary.

X Open zipper2 completely while the bootseparator is closed.

X Remove boot separator1 from fasteningeyelets3 in the side panels.

X Push boot separator1 forwards againstthe direction of the arrow by handle4.

Controls




157

The straps in the boot are on the right and left.

1 Strap2 Bracket

G Risk of injuryOnly undo the straps when the boot sepa-rator is completely opened.You could otherwise get trapped.

X Pull straps1 downward to open.X Unhook brackets2 from the cradles andswing them upwards as far as possible.

1 Boot separator2 Material edge3 Material fastening

X Tilt boot separator1 backwards carefullyin the direction of the arrow into the boot.

X Roll up front edge of material2 in the bootto the front and store it in front of materialfastening3.

X Lift boot separator1 out of the boot com-pletely.

Fitting the boot separator! Ensure that the end of the material isstored in front of the material fasteningbefore fitting. It could otherwise be dam-aged.

X Place the boot separator carefully into theboot.

1 Boot separator2 Attachment hooks3 Guide rail

X Insert boot separator1 by attachmenthooks2 into guide rails3 on both sides.

X Tilt boot separator1 forward in the direc-tion of the arrow.

X Pull down the retainer springs of the catchand hang both sides in the brackets(Y page 157).

X Push the straps upwards on both sides toclose.

X Pull boot separator1 backwards by thehandle.

Controls


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 157

Z



158

X Hook boot separator1 into the fasteningeyelets in the side panels.

X Fully close the zipper (Y page 156).X Fold back the material covering of the zip-per along the whole length of the bootseparator if necessary.

Draught stopThe draught stop is a wind protection devicefor driving with the soft top open. It is storedin a bag or sheath in the boot*.G Risk of accidentFold back the top part of the draught stopif it restricts your vision or when it is dark.It could otherwise impair your rear view.and you could cause an accident.

FittingX Take the draught stop out of the bag.X Leave the draught stop folded and place iton the roll-over bar.

1 Lateral guide

X Push the draught stop into the roll-over baron both sides as far as it will go, so that bothlateral guides1 reach under the roll-overbar.Make sure that the fastening straps arenot trapped.

X Put up the roll-over bar (Y page 46) so farthat you can easily reach under it.

2 Buckle

X Route the fastening straps around the topof the roll-over bar and close buckle2.

X Tighten the straps if necessary.X Fold down the roll-over bar again.X Fold the top part of the draught stop in thedirection of the head restraints as far as itwill go.

RemovingX Fold back the top part of the draught stop.X Put up the roll-over bar (Y page 46) so farthat you can easily reach under it.

Controls

* optional



Loading and stowing

159

1 Release button

X Release the buckle at the top of the roll-over bar. To do this, press release button1.

X Fold down the roll-over bar again. Makesure that the fastening straps are not trap-ped.

X Pull the draught stop out to the front. Makesure that you do not damage the interiortrim of the vehicle with the lateral guide.

X Store the draught stop so that it is protec-ted from damage, for example, in thesheath or bag* in the boot.

Roller sunblind for the glass roof*The roller sunblind protects you from exces-sive glare caused by the sun shining throughthe glass roof.

1 Catches2 Handle

ClosingX Push the roller blind forwards by handle2.

OpeningX Push catches1 together and pull the rollerblind back.

Loading and stowing

Cup holder

G Risk of injuryKeep the cup holder closed while the vehi-cle is in motion. Otherwise, vehicle occu-pants could be injured by objects beingthrown around if you:Rbrake sharplyRchange direction suddenlyRare involved in an accidentOnly use the cup holders for containers ofa suitable size and which have lids. Other-wise, the drinks could spill.Cup holders should not be used for hotdrinks. Otherwise, you may scald yourself.

Controls

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 159

Z


Loading and stowing

160

1 Left-hand cup holder2 Right-hand cup holder

X To open: press lightly on the cover of cupholder1 or2.The cup holder slides out automatically.

Roof rack system*

G Risk of accidentOnly use the roof rack when basic carrierbars are fitted. The left and right rails areonly stabilised by the basic carrier barsbeing fitted.An incorrectly secured roof rack or loadcould work loose from the vehicle andthereby cause an accident. Follow the roofrack manufacturer's installation instruc-tions and special instructions for use.The roof load raises the vehicle's centre ofgravity, thereby affecting vehicle handling.You must observe the maximum roof loadof 75 kg. Always adapt your driving style tothe prevailing road, traffic andweather con-ditions and drive with particular care if theroof is laden.

! Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use roof rack systems which havebeen tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This helps to prevent dam-age to the vehicle.Position the load on the roof rack in such away that the vehicle will not sustain dam-age even when it is in motion.

Do not open the roof if a roof rack is fitted.You will otherwise damage the roof.Leave the boot separator in the boot openfor protection.Make sure that you can open the boot lidcompletely.

1 Front cover2 Cover on the trim strip

X Push cover1 firmly at the corrugated end.X Prise the upper end out carefully, using anold credit card, for example.

X Fold rear cover2 out from the trim strips.X Fasten the carrier bar to this location.Observe the manufacturer's installationinstructions.

Controls

* optional



Loading and stowing

161

G Risk of injuryOnly use the roof rack when the roof isclosed. The roof rack or the load couldendanger the occupants of the vehiclewhen the roof is open.

Luggage net in the front-passengerfootwell

G Risk of injuryOnly place lightweight items in the luggagenet. Do not use it to transport heavy, bulky,sharp-edged or fragile objects. In the eventof an accident, the luggage net will notsecure the transported goods.

Stowage well under the boot floorTIREFIT, the vehicle tool kit, etc. are locatedin the stowage well.

1 Boot separator2 Hooks with Velcro attachment3 Loop4 Boot floor

X To open: open the boot separator(Y page 156).

X Swing boot floor4 up by loop3.X Pull hook with Velcro attachment2 off theunderside of boot floor4.

X Attach hook with Velcro attachment2 toboot separator1 by its handle.


G Risk of injuryThe stowage compartmentsmust be closedwhen items are stored in them. Luggagenets are not designed to secure heavyitems of luggage.You or other vehicle occupants could beinjured by objects being thrown around ifyou:Rbrake sharplyRchange direction suddenlyRare involved in an accidentSharp-edged and fragile objects must notbe placed in the luggage net.

Glove compartmenti Depending on the vehicle's equipment, aCD storage compartment* or a walkmanconnection* is installed in the glove com-partment.

Controls


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 161

Z


Loading and stowing

162

1 Button2 Glove compartment

X To open: press button1.Glove compartment2 folds down.

! If the glove compartment contains a CDstorage compartment*, this should beclosed before closing the glove compart-ment.

Locking and unlocking stowage com-partments separatelyYou can lock the:RGlove compartmentRStowage compartments under the armrestRStowage compartments in the rear

separately, for example when leaving yourvehicle at a workshop. These stowage com-partments can only be unlocked using theemergency key element, not the key or KEY-LESS GO* (Y page 255).

$ To unlock% To lock separately

X To lock: insert the emergency key element(Y page 255) in the lock and turn to posi-tion%.

X To unlock: insert the emergency key ele-ment in the lock and turn to position$.

Stowage compartment under the arm-resti The stowage compartment is locked andunlocked via the central locking.A mobile phone bracket* and coin holderare located in the stowage compartment.

1 Armrest2 Button

X Press button2 and pull armrest1upwards.

Controls

* optional



Loading and stowing

163

Stowage compartments in the doors

G Risk of injuryKeep the stowage compartments in thedoors closed. You could otherwise changethe position of the seat belt.

1 Release button2 Cover

X To open: press release button1.Cover2 opens.

Stowage compartments in the reari Depending on the vehicle's equipment,the left-hand compartment contains a CDchanger*.

1 Release button2 Cover

X To open: press release button1.Cover2 folds upwards.

Luggage compartment* in the rear

G Risk of injurySecure all items of luggage in the rear usingthe luggage tensioning straps. Unsecureditems of luggage could otherwise causeinjury when the driver brakes suddenly, andthe risk of injury in the event of an accidentis increased.Never carry passengers in the rear.

The luggage tensioning straps can onlysecure light items of luggage. Transport anyheavy luggage in the boot.

1 Luggage tensioning strap2 Retainer3 Fastener4 Release button

Controls


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 163

Z


Loading and stowing

164

X To fasten the luggage tensioningstrap: pull luggage tensioning strap1 outof retainer2.

X Secure the luggage using luggage tension-ing strap1 so that it cannot slip.

X Insert luggage tensioning strap1 into fas-tener3.

X To release the luggage tensioningstrap: press release button4 and retractluggage tensioning strap1.

Loading aid in the bootTo make it easier to load your luggage, youcan raise the stowed roof after you haveopened the boot lid.

1 Stowed roof

2 Boot separator3 Switch for the loading aid

Raising the roofG Risk of injuryMake sure that nobody can become trap-ped. If there is a risk of entrapment, pressthe switch again. The loading aid stopsimmediately.

You can only raise the roof if boot separator2 is closed and the boot is opened com-pletely.X Press switch3.The roof is raised slightly. Switch3 lightsup brightly.

X Slide boot separator2 back(Y page 156).

Lowering the roofYou can only lower the stowed roof if bootseparator2 is closed and the boot is openedcompletely.X Close the boot separator (Y page 156).X Press switch3.The roof is lowered slightly. Switch3lights up dimly.

! Only close the boot once the roof is low-ered completely. Otherwise, you coulddamage the roof.

Controls



Features

165

Features

Sun visors

G Risk of accidentKeep the mirrors in the sun visors coveredwhile driving. You could otherwise be daz-zled by bright lights, impairing your view oftraffic conditions. You could cause an acci-dent as a result.

1 Mirror light2 Retainer3 Retaining strip, e.g. for a car park ticket4 Vanity mirror5 Mirror cover

Mirror in the sun visorMirror light1 only functions if the sun visoris clipped into retainer2 and mirror cover5 has been folded up.

Glare from the sideX Fold down the sun visor.X Pull the sun visor from retainer2.X Swing the sun visor to the side.X Slide the sun visor forwards and back asrequired.

Ashtray

1 Cover2 Sliding knob

X To open: lightly press the bottom of thecover1.The ashtray opens.

Removing the insert

G Risk of accidentMake sure that the engine has beenswitched off and that the parking brake isapplied so that the vehicle cannot pull awayunintentionally.

X Make sure that the engine is not runningand that the vehicle is secured against roll-ing away.

X Move the selector lever to N.X Push sliding knob2 to the right.The ashtray insert slides out slightly.

X Remove the insert.

Replacing the insertX Press the insert into the holder until it clicksinto place.

Controls


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 165

Z


Features

166

Cigarette lighter

G Risk of injury and fireOnly hold the hot cigarette lighter by itsknob. Otherwise, you might burn yourself.Make sure that children travelling in thevehicle are not able to injure themselves onthe hot cigarette lighter or cause a fire withit.

1 Cigarette lighter


X Press the bottom of the cover lightly.The ashtray opens.

X Press in cigarette lighter1.Cigarette lighter1 will pop out automati-cally when the heating element is red-hot.

i You can use the cigarette lighter's powersocket for accessories up to 180 W.

12V socketYou can use the socket for accessories up toa maximum of 180 W.

1 12V socket

Mobile phone*

G Risk of accidentObserve the legal requirements of thecountry in which you are currently drivingregarding operating mobile communica-tions equipment in a vehicle.If it is permitted by law to operate commu-nications equipment while the vehicle is inmotion, you must only do so when the traf-fic situation allows. You could otherwise bedistracted from the traffic conditions,cause an accident and injure yourself andothers.Two-way radios and fax equipment usedwithout low-reflection exterior aerials caninterfere with the vehicle's electronics andthereby jeopardise the operating safety ofthe vehicle and your safety. Youmust there-fore only use this equipment if it is correctlyconnected to a separate reflection-freeexterior aerial.

G Risk of injuryExcessive electromagnetic radiation maycause damage to your health and the healthof others. Using an exterior aerial takes intoaccount current scientific discussions

Controls

* optional



Features

167

relating to the possible health risk posed byelectromagnetic fields.

i In order to ensure optimum signal qualityfor mobile phones and to minimise mutualinterference between the vehicle electron-ics andmobile phones,Mercedes-Benz rec-ommends the use of an approved exterioraerial. An exterior aerial conducts the elec-tromagnetic fields generated by a wirelessdevice to the exterior of the vehicle; thefield strength within the vehicle interior islower than in a vehicle that does not havean exterior aerial.

i There are various mobile phone bracketsthat may be fitted to your vehicle; in somecases these are country-specific. You canobtain these mobile phone brackets from aqualified specialist workshop, e.g. aMercedes-Benz Service Centre. The func-tions and services available when you usethe phone depend on your mobile phonemodel and service provider.

The mobile phone bracket is in the armrest.X Open the telephone compartment(Y page 162).

Inserting the mobile phone into themobile phone bracketIf themobile phone is inserted into themobilephone bracket, you can only speak to the per-son you are calling using the hands-free sys-tem.

! Do not attempt to remove the mobilephone and the telephone bracket together.You could otherwise damage the mobilephone bracket.

X Remove the cover of the aerial plug fromthe back of the mobile phone and keep it ina safe place.

Example illustration1 To engage the mobile phone2 Connector contact

3 Mobile phone bracket

X Slide the lower end of the mobile phoneinto connector contact2 in mobile phonebracket3.

X Push the top part of the mobile phone inthe direction of arrow1 until it engages inmobile phone bracket3.The mobile phone is connected to thehands-free system and to the multi-func-tion steering wheel.The battery is charged depending on thecharge status and the position of the key inthe ignition lock. The charging process isshown in the mobile phone display.

i The system reads the phone book storedon the SIM card and in the mobile phonememory. If the same entry is stored in bothof the phone books, both of these entrieswill be shown in the multi-function display.

You can make a call using thes andt buttons on the multi-function steeringwheel. You can control other mobile phonefunctions via the on-board computer(Y page 123).

i When you remove the key from the igni-tion lock, the mobile phone remains

Controls


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 167

Z


Features

168

switched on for approximately ten minutes(run-on time). If you make a call during thistime, the mobile phone will be switched offapproximately ten minutes after you haveended the call.Run-on time:You can change the run-on time by makingan additional phone book entry on the SIMcard. For the name, enter "Idletime" and forthe number, enter a figure between "1" and"30" (minutes). If you have not entered anumber or have entered a different num-ber, the run-on time of ten minutes will stillapply.For information on how to create a phonebook entry, refer to the mobile phone oper-ating instructions.Own number sending:The hands-free system does not recognisewhether own number sending is enabled ordisabled in the mobile phone. The phonenumber is therefore always sent by default.By creating an additional phone book entryon the SIM card, you can switch the ownnumber sending function on and off. Forthe name, enter "CALLID" and for the num-ber, enter a "0" or a "1". Entering "0" willprevent the telephone number from beingsent; entering "1" will allow it to be sent.

For information on how to create a phonebook entry, refer to the mobile phone oper-ating instructions.

Removing the mobile phone from themobile phone bracket

Example illustration1 To release the mobile phone2 Mobile phone bracket

X Press the release catch in the direction ofarrow1 and remove the mobile phoneupwards from mobile phone bracket2.

Fitting a differentmobile phone bracketIf you require a different mobile phonebracket for your mobile phone, remove the

existingmobile phone bracket and then fit thenew one.

Removing the existing mobile phonebracket

Example illustration1 To release the mobile phone bracket2 To remove the mobile phone bracket3 Mobile phone bracket

X Press the release button in the direction ofarrow1 and remove mobile phonebracket3 in the direction of arrow2.

Controls



Features

169

Fitting a different mobile phone bracket

Example illustration1 Contact plate2 Recesses3 Mobile phone bracket

X Insert mobile phone bracket3 intorecesses2 of contact plate1.

X Slide mobile phone bracket3 forwardsuntil it engages.

Garage door opener*The remote control integrated in the rear-viewmirror allows you to operate up to three dif-ferent door and gate systems.

i The garage door opener is only availablefor certain countries. Observe the legalrequirements in all countries concerned.The HomeLink® garage door opener iscompatible withmost European garage andgate opener drives. More information onHomeLink® and/or compatible products isavailable from:Rany Mercedes-Benz Service CentreRthe HomeLink® hotline(0) 08000 466 354 65 (free of charge) or+49 (0) 6839 907-277 (at a charge)Rthe internet: www.homelink.com

Remote control in the rear-view mirror1 Indicator lamp2 Transmitter button3 Transmitter button4 Transmitter button

G Risk of accidentOnly press the transmitter button on theintegrated remote control if there are nopersons or objects present within thesweep of the garage door. Persons couldotherwise be injured as the door moves.

Programming the remote controli You will achieve the best results by insert-ing new batteries in the garage door'sremote control before programming it.

Controls

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 169

Z


Features

170

X Erase the memory of the integrated remotecontrol (Y page 171) before programmingit for the first time.

X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock.

X Press and hold one of transmitter buttons2 to4 on the integrated remote control.Indicator lamp1 starts to flash after ashort while. It flashes about once a second.

i Indicator lamp1 flashes immediatelythe first time the transmitter button is pro-grammed. If this transmitter button hasalready been programmed, indicatorlamp1 will only start flashing at a rate ofonce a second after 20 seconds haveelapsed.

X Keep the transmitter buttons depressed.X Point the garage door's remote control withthe transmitter towards the left-hand sideof the rear-view mirror from a distance of 5to 20 cm.

i The distance between the garage door'sremote control and the integrated garagedoor opener depends on the system of thegarage door drive. You might require sev-eral attempts. You should test every posi-

tion for at least 20 seconds before tryinganother position.

X Keep the transmitter button on the garagedoor's remote control depressed until indi-cator lamp1 starts to flash rapidly.The programming was successful if indica-tor lamp1 flashes rapidly.

X Release the transmitter buttons on thegarage door's remote control and the inte-grated remote control.

If indicator lamp1 goes out after approxi-mately 20 seconds and did not flash rapidlybefore this:X Release the transmitter buttons on theintegrated and portable remote controls.

X Repeat the programming procedure. At thesame time change the distance betweenthe garage door's remote control and thetransmitter buttons in the rear-view mirror.

i If the garage door system works with arolling code, after programming you mustsynchronise the remote control integratedin the rear-viewmirror with the garage doorsystem receiver.You will find further information in thegarage door opening system's operating

instructions, e.g. the sections on "Synchro-nising the transmitter" or "Registering anew transmitter". You can also call the hot-line mentioned above.

Opening or closing the garage doorOnce programmed, the integrated remotecontrol will assume the function of the garagedoor system's remote control. Please readthe operating instructions for the garage doorsystem.X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock.

X Press the transmitter button on the rear-view mirror that you have programmed tooperate the garage door.Garage door system with fixed code: indi-cator lamp1 lights up continuously.Garage door system with rolling code: indi-cator lamp1 flashes briefly and then lightsup for approximately two seconds. This isrepeated for up to 20 seconds.

i The transmitter will transmit a signal foras long as the transmitter button is beingpressed. The transmission will be haltedafter a maximum of 20 seconds and indi-

Controls



Features

171

cator lamp1 will flash. Press the trans-mitter button again if necessary.

Clearing the remote control memoryX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock.

X Press and hold transmitter buttons2 and4 for approximately 20 seconds until indi-cator lamp1 flashes rapidly.The memory is cleared.

i You should clear the remote controlmem-ory before selling the vehicle.

Floormat* on the driver's side

G Risk of accidentMake sure that there is sufficient clearancearound the pedals when floormats areused, and that the floormats are properlysecured.The floormats must be secured at all timesusing retainers and studs.Before you drive off, make sure that thefloormats are secure and rectify if neces-sary. A floormat which is not properly

secured can slip and thereby interfere withthe movement of the pedals.Do not place floormats on top of oneanother.

1 Press-studs2 Retainers

X Slide seat backwards.X To fit: place the floormat in position.X Press stud1 onto retainer2.

X To remove: pull floormat off retainers2.X Remove the floormat.

Controls

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 171

Z


172



173

The first 1,500 km ............................ 174Running-in notes for SL 65 AMGand AMG vehicles with a differen-tial lock .............................................. 174Refuelling ........................................... 175Engine compartment ........................ 176Tyres and wheels .............................. 182Winter driving ................................... 189Driving tips ........................................ 190Driving abroad ................................... 193Service ............................................... 193Care .................................................... 194

Operation



Running-in notes for SL 65 AMG and AMG vehicles with a differential lock

174

The first 1,500 km

If you treat the engine with sufficient carefrom the very start, you will be rewarded withexcellent performance for the remainder ofthe engine's life.RYou should therefore drive at varying roadand engine speeds for the first 1,500 km.RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throt-tle, during this time. Do not exceed 2/3 ofthe maximum permissible engine speed foreach gear.RChange gear in good time.RDo not shift down a gear manually in orderto brake.RTry to avoid depressing the acceleratorpedal beyond the pressure point (kick-down).ROnly use ranges 3, 2 or 1 for slow driving,e.g. in mountainous terrain.

Additional driving tips for AMG vehicles:RDo not drive faster than 140 km/h for thefirst 1,500 km.ROnly bring the engine up to a maximumspeed of 4,500 rpm for a brief period.

i You should also observe these notes if theengine or rear axle transmission on yourvehicle has been replaced.

Running-in notes for SL 65 AMG andAMG vehicles with a differential lock

Your vehicle is equipped with a self-lockingdifferential on the rear axle.To better protect the differential gear on therear axle, you should perform an oil changeafter a running-in phase of 3,000 km. This oilchange will increase the service life of yourdifferential. Have the oil change performed ata qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose.

Operation



Refuelling

175

Refuelling

Refuelling

G Risk of explosionFuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flamesand smoking are therefore prohibited whenhandling fuels.Switch off the engine before refuelling.

G Risk of injuryAvoid any contact with fuels.You can damage your health if your skincomes into direct contact with fuel or if youinhale the vapours.

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with apetrol engine. Even small amounts of dieselwill damage the injection system. Damagecaused by using diesel to refuel vehicleswith a petrol engine or mixing petrol withdiesel is not covered by the warranty.

! Do not start the engine if you accidentallyrefuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, thefuel could enter the fuel lines. The fuel tankand fuel lines would then have to bedrained. In this case, notify a qualified spe-cialist workshop and have the fuel tank andfuel lines drained completely.

When you open or close the vehicle with thekey or KEYLESS GO*, the fuel filler flap isautomatically unlocked or locked.The fuel filler flap is to the rear on the right.

1 To open the fuel filler flap2 To insert the fuel cap3 Tyre pressure table4 Fuel type

X To open: press the fuel filler flap in thedirection of arrow1.The fuel filler flap opens slightly.

X Open the fuel filler flap.X Turn the fuel filler cap to the left andremove it.

X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holderbracket on the inside of filler flap2.

X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzleswitches off.

! Overfilling the tank could damage the fuelsystem.

X To close: replace the fuel filler cap and turnit clockwise. The fuel filler cap audiblyengages.

X Close the fuel filler flap.

Petrol (EN 228)! Refuel using only unleaded premiumgrade petrol with a minimum octane num-ber of 95 RON/85 MON conforming toEuropean standard EN 228.You could otherwise impair engine outputor damage the engine.You will find further information about pet-rol under "Fuel" in the index.

i As a temporary measure, but only whenthe recommended fuel is not available, youmay also use regular unleaded petrol,91 RON/82.5 MON. This may reduce per-

Operation

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 175

Z


Engine compartment

176

formance and increase petrol consump-tion. Avoid driving at full throttle.In some countries, the available petrol qual-ity may not be sufficient and could causecoking around the inlet valve. In suchcases, and in consultation with aMercedes-Benz Service Centre, the petrolmay be mixed with the additive recommen-ded by Mercedes-Benz (part no.A000989254510). You must observe thenotes and mixing ratios given on the con-tainer.

AMG vehicles and twelve-cylinderengines! Refuel using only super unleaded petrolwith a minimum octane number of98 RON/88 MON conforming to Europeanstandard EN 228.You could otherwise impair engine outputor damage the engine.You will find further information about pet-rol under "Technical data" in the index.

i If the recommended fuel is not availableand only as a temporary measure, you mayalso use premium unleaded petrol,95 RON/85 MON. This may reduce per-

formance and increase petrol consump-tion. You must avoid driving at full throttle.

! In emergencies, and only when the rec-ommended fuel is not available, you mayalso use standard unleaded petrol,91 RON/82.5 MON. However, using thisfuel results in considerably higher petrolconsumption and significantly reduced per-formance. Avoid driving at full throttle, andonly drive in drive program C.If no fuel other than regular petrol fuel91 RON/82.5 MON or a lower grade is per-manently available, you should have thevehicle adapted to run on this fuel by thelocal after-sales service.

Engine compartment

Bonnet

G Risk of accidentDo not pull the release lever while the vehi-cle is in motion. If you do so, the bonnetmay open up and block your view.

Opening

G Risk of injuryThere is a risk of injury if the bonnet is open,even if the engine is not running.Some engine components can becomevery hot.To avoid the risk of burns, only touch thosecomponents described in theOwner’sMan-ual and observe the relevant safety notes.

G Risk of injuryThe radiator fan between the radiator andthe engine can start automatically, even ifthe key has been removed from the ignitionlock. For this reason you must not reachinto the turning area of the fan. You canotherwise be injured.

Operation



Engine compartment

177

The electronic ignition system uses highvoltage. For this reason, you must nevertouch components of the ignition system(ignition coil, ignition cable, spark plug con-nector or test socket) when:Rthe engine is runningRthe engine is being startedRthe ignition is switched on and the engineis being cranked by hand

X Make sure that the windscreen wipers areswitched off.

G Risk of injuryThe windscreen wipers and wiper linkagecould be set in motion.When the bonnet is open, you or otherscould be injured by the wiper rods.Make sure that the windscreen wipers areswitched off and that the key has beenpulled out of the ignition lock before open-ing the bonnet.

The bonnet release lever is located in thedriver's footwell.

1 Bonnet release lever

X Pull bonnet release lever1.The bonnet is released.

! Make sure that the windscreen wipersare not folded out away from the wind-screen. You can otherwise damage thewindscreen wipers or the bonnet.

The handle for opening the bonnet is locatedabove the radiator grille.

2 Bonnet catch handle

X Reach into the gap, pull bonnet catch han-dle2 up and lift the bonnet.

Closing

G Risk of injuryMake sure that nobody can become trap-ped as you close the bonnet.

X Lower the bonnet and let it fall from aheight of approximately 20 cm.

X Check that the bonnet has engaged prop-erly.

Operation


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 177

Z


Engine compartment

178

i If the bonnet can be raised slightly, it isnot properly engaged. Open it again andclose it with a little more force.

Engine oilDepending on driving style, the vehicle con-sumes a maximum of 0.8 l oil per 1,000 km.The oil consumption may be higher than thiswhen the vehicle is new or if you frequentlydrive at high engine speeds. You can onlyestimate the oil consumption after you havedriven a considerable distance.You will find further information about engineoil in the "Technical data" section(Y page 303).

Checking the engine oil levelTo do so:Rthe vehicle should be parked on levelground.Rthe engine should be switched off for atleast five minutes if the engine was at nor-mal operating temperature.Rthe engine should be switched off for atleast 30 minutes if the engine was not atoperating temperature (i.e. if you only star-ted the engine briefly).

Via the on-board computer*i Only possible on the SL 600 andSL 65 AMG. On all other models, a dipstickis used to check the engine oil level(Y page 179).

X Make sure that the key is in position 2 inthe ignition lock (Y page 73).

X Press thej ork button to select theMeasurement correct only if vehi-cle is level. message.

After about three seconds, the Engine oillevel Measuring now message appears.The measurement takes a few seconds. Youwill see one of the following messages in thedisplay:

REngine oil level OKRAdd 1.0 litre to reach maximum oillevelRAdd 1.5 litres to reach maximum oillevelRAdd 2.0 litres to reach maximum oillevel

X Top up the oil if necessary (Y page 179).

Other messages in the multi-function dis-playIf the engine is at normal operating tempera-ture and there is toomuch oil, you will see thefollowing message:Eng. oil levelReduce oil levelX Have excess oil siphoned off.

! There is a risk of damage to the engine orthe catalytic converter if there is excess oilin the engine.

If the Switch ignition on to checkengine oil level message appears:X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 73).

Operation

* optional



Engine compartment

179

You will see the following message if you didnot observe the required waiting time:Observe waiting periodX Repeat the measurement after about fiveminutes if the engine is at normal operatingtemperature.

X Repeat the measurement after about30 minutes if the engine is not at normaloperating temperature (if the engine wasonly started briefly).

The following message appears if the engineis running:Engine oil level Not when engine onX Switch off the engine and wait for fiveminutes if the engine is at normal operatingtemperature, or for about 30 minutes if theengine is not at normal operating temper-ature (if the engine was only startedbriefly), before measuring.

i If you wish to cancel the measurement,press thek orj button on themulti-function steering wheel.

Using the oil dipstick

Example of a vehicle with a petrol engine (SL 350)1 Oil dipstick2 Maximum mark3 Minimum mark

X Pull oil dipstick1 out of the oil dipsticktube.

X Wipe off oil dipstick1.X Insert oil dipstick1 into the oil dipsticktube to the stop, and take it out again.The oil level is correct if the level is betweenminimum mark3 and maximum mark2.

X Top up the oil if necessary.

i On vehicles with 8-cylinder and 12-cylin-der engines, the difference between MINmark3 and MAX mark2 is approxi-mately 1.5 litres. On vehicles with a 6-cylinder engine, the difference is 2.0 litres.

Topping up the engine oil

Example (SL 500)1 Cap

Operation


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 179

Z


Engine compartment

180

Example (SL 600)1 Cap

X Unscrew cap1 and remove it.X Top up with the amount of oil required.

! Do not add too much oil. If too much oilis added and the oil level is above the max-imum mark on the dipstick, the engine orcatalytic converter could be damaged.Have excess oil siphoned off.

X Screw cap1 onto the filler neck.

H Environmental noteWhen topping up the oil, take care not tospill any. Oil must not be allowed to escapeinto the soil or waterways. You would oth-erwise be damaging the environment.

Coolant

G Risk of injuryThe cooling system is pressurised. There-fore, only unscrew the cap once the enginehas cooled down. The coolant temperaturegauge must display less than 70 °C. Youcould otherwise be scalded by escaping hotcoolant.

Coolant consists of water and antifreeze/cor-rosion inhibitor. Only check the coolant levelwhen the vehicle is on a level surface and theengine has cooled down.

Checking the coolant levelThe expansion tank is located in the enginecompartment on the right-hand side of thevehicle when viewed in the direction of travel.

1 Expansion tank

X Slowly turn the cap by half a turn anti-clockwise to allow excess pressure toescape.

X Turn the cap further anti-clockwise andremove it.There is sufficient coolant in expansiontank1 if the coolant is level with the markin the filler neck when cold or approxi-mately 1.5 cm higher when hot.

X Top up the coolant if necessary.X Position the cap and screw tight.

Operation



Engine compartment

181

! SL 600: open only the cover of expansiontank1. Never open the cover between thetwo charge-air coolers. This can damagethe engine.

Youwill find further information about coolantin the "Technical data" section(Y page 304).

Windscreen washer system/head-lamp cleaning system*The washer fluid reservoir is located in theengine compartment on the right whenviewed in the direction of travel. The head-lamp cleaning system is also supplied fromthe washer fluid reservoir.

1 Cover

X Add windscreen washer concentrate to thewasher fluid all year round.

G Risk of fireWindscreen washer concentrate is highlyflammable. Fire, naked flames and smokingare prohibited when windscreen washerconcentrate is being handled.

UseRa windscreen washer fluid additivesuch as MB Summerwash to preventsmearing (for temperatures above freez-ing).Ra windscreen washer fluid additive withantifreeze properties such as MB Winter-wash (if there is a risk of frost).

X Mix the windscreen washer fluid in a con-tainer beforehand. Adapt the mixing ratioto the outside temperatures.

! Only use windscreen washer fluid whichis suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Unsuit-able windscreen washer fluid could dam-age the plastic lamp lenses of the head-lamps.

X To open: pull cap1 upwards by the tab.X To close: press cap1 onto the filler neckuntil it clicks into place.

Operation

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 181

Z


Tyres and wheels

182

Tyres and wheels

Points to remember! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec-ommends that you only use tyres andwheels which have been approved byMercedes-Benz specifically for your vehi-cle. These tyres have been specially adap-ted for use with the control systems, suchas ABS or ESP®, and aremarked as follows:RMO = Mercedes-Benz OriginalRMOE=Mercedes-BenzOriginal Extended(with run-flat characteristics)*

*Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tyresshould only be used on wheels that havebeen specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.If you use other tyres and wheels,Mercedes-Benz cannot accept any respon-sibility for damage that may result fromthis. Further information about tyres,wheels and approved combinations can beobtained from any Mercedes-Benz ServiceCentre.If you use tyres other than those tested andrecommended for Mercedes-Benz vehi-cles, characteristics such as handling, vehi-cle noise emissions and fuel consumption

may be adversely affected. In addition, thewheels may come into contact with thebody or axle components when heavily loa-ded or when driving with snow chains. Thiscould result in damage to the tyres or thevehicle.

! Retreaded tyres are neither tested norrecommended by Mercedes-Benz, sinceprevious damage cannot always be detec-ted on retreaded tyres. As a result,Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehiclesafety if retreaded tyres are fitted. Do notfit used tyres if you have no informationabout their previous usage.

G Risk of accidentIf wheels or tyres other than those whichhave been tested are fitted:Rthe brakes or chassis components couldbe damagedRwheel and tyre clearances can no longerbe guaranteed

This could cause an accident.

Modification work on the brake system andwheels is not permitted, nor is the use ofspacer plates or brake dust shields. This inva-lidates the General Operating Permit for thevehicle.

Notes on selecting, fitting and replacingtyresROnly fit tyres and wheels of the same typeand make.ROnly fit tyres of the correct size onto thewheels.RAfter fitting new tyres, run them in at mod-erate speeds for the first 100 km as theyonly reach their full performance after thisdistance.RFit new tyres on the front wheels first iftyres of the same size are required on thefront and rear wheels.RReplace the tyres after six years at the lat-est, regardless of wear. This also applies tothe spare wheel*.RDo not drive with tyres which have too littletread depth as this significantly reducesthe traction on wet roads (aquaplaning).

! Store tyres that are not being used in acool, dry and preferably dark place. Protectthe tyres against oil, grease, petrol and die-sel.

Operation

* optional



Tyres and wheels

183

Notes on regularly inspecting wheelsand tyresRRegularly check the wheels and tyres ofyour vehicle for damage (e.g. cuts, punctu-res, tears, bumps on tyres and deforma-tion, cracks or severe corrosion onwheels),at least every 14 days, as well as after driv-ing off-road or on rough roads. Damagedwheels could cause a loss of tyre pressure.RRegularly check the tyre tread depth andthe condition of the tread across the wholewidth of the tyre (Y page 184). If neces-sary, turn the front wheels to full lock inorder to inspect the inner side of the tyresurface.RAll wheels must have a valve cap to protectthe valve against dirt and moisture.RRegularly check the pressure of all yourtyres including the spare tyre*, particularlyprior to long trips, and correct the pressureas necessary (Y page 184).

Notes on drivingRWhile driving, pay attention to vibrations,noises and unusual handling characteris-tics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indi-

cate that the wheels or tyres are damaged.If you suspect that a tyre is defective,reduce your speed and stop the vehicle assoon as possible to check the wheels andtyres for damage. Hidden tyre damagecould also be causing the unusual handlingcharacteristics. If you find no signs of dam-age, have the wheels and tyres examinedat a specialist workshop, for example at aMercedes-Benz Service Centre.RWhen parking your vehicle, make sure thatthe tyres do not get deformed by the kerbor other obstacles. If it is necessary to driveover kerbs, speed humps or similar, try todo so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Oth-erwise, the tyres, particularly the sidewalls,could get damaged.

Direction of rotation

Direction of rotationTyres with a specified direction of rotationhave additional benefits, e.g. if there is a riskof aquaplaning. You will only gain these ben-efits if the correct direction of rotation isobserved.An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indicatesits correct direction of rotation.

i You may fit a spare tyre* against thedirection of rotation.

MOExtended run-flat system*The MOExtended run-flat system allows youto continue driving the vehicle even when oneor more tyres lose all air pressure.The MOExtended run-flat systemmay only beused in conjunction with the tyre pressureloss warning system or the tyre pressuremonitor* and on wheels specifically tested byMercedes-Benz.

i Vehicles with MOExtended run-flat sys-tem are not equipped with the TIREFITkit*19.

19 Only for certain countries

Operation

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 183

Z


Tyres and wheels

184

It is therefore recommended to additionallyequip your vehicle with the TIREFIT kit*when fitting tyres that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tyres.

i A TIREFIT kit* is available from any quali-fied specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

You will find notes on driving with a flat tyrein the "Practical advice" section(Y page 275).

Tyre tread

G Risk of accidentBear in mind that:Rtyre grip decreases rapidly on wet roadswhen the tread depth is less than 3 mm.You should thus replace tyres that haveinsufficient tread.Rwinter tyres should be replaced when thetread depth is 4 mm or less because oth-erwise they no longer provide adequategrip.Rthe tread on a tyre may not wear evenly.You should thus regularly check the treaddepth and the condition of the tread

across the entire width of all tyres. If nec-essary, turn the steering wheel so thatyou can see the tyre tread more easily.

You could otherwise lose control of thevehicle and cause an accident due to thereduced grip of the tyres on the road.

Tyre pressuresi You will find a table of tyre pressures forvarious operating conditions on the insideof your vehicle's fuel filler flap(Y page 175).The valid value for the spare wheel* is sta-ted on the spare wheel and in the technicaldata section.

G Risk of accidentTyre pressure that is either too high or toolow has a negative effect on the vehicle’sdriving safety, which could lead you tocause an accident. You should thereforeregularly check the pressure of all yourtyres (including the spare tyre*), particu-larly prior to long trips, and correct thepressure as necessary.

To test tyre pressure, use a suitable pressuregauge. The outer appearance of a tyre does

not permit any reliable conclusion about thetyre pressure. On vehicles fittedwith the elec-tronic tyre pressure monitor*, the tyre pres-sure can be checked in the on-board com-puter.G Risk of accidentShould the tyre pressure drop repeatedly:RCheck the tyre for foreign bodies.RCheck whether the wheel is losing air orthe valve is leaking.

Tyre pressure that is too low has a negativeeffect on the vehicle’s active safety, whichcould lead to your causing an accident.

Tyre pressure changes by approximately0.1 bar for every 10 °C change in ambienttemperature.If you measure the tyre pressure in enclosedspaces where the temperature differs fromthe outside temperature, you will have to cor-rect the measured value accordingly.When the vehicle is driven, the tyre tempera-ture, and with it the tyre pressure, willincrease depending on the road speed andthe load on the tyres.Therefore, you should only correct tyre pres-sures when the tyres are cold.

Operation

* optional



Tyres and wheels

185

The pressure of warm tyres should only becorrected if it is too low for the current oper-ating conditions.Driving with tyre pressure that is too high ortoo low can:Rshorten the service life of the tyresRincrease the likelihood of tyre damageRhave a negative effect on handling charac-teristics (e.g. by causing aquaplaning)

i The tyre pressure values given for lowloads are minimum values which offer yougood ride comfort characteristics.You can, however, also use the values givenfor higher loads. These are permissible andwill not adversely affect the running of thevehicle.

H Environmental noteCheck the tyre pressure regularly, at leastevery 14 days.

Tyre pressure loss warning system

G Risk of accidentThe tyre pressure losswarning systemdoesnot warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pres-sure. The table on the inside of the fuel fillerflap will help you decide whether the tyrepressures should be corrected.The tyre pressure losswarning systemdoesnot replace the need to regularly checkyour vehicle's tyre pressures, since an evenloss of pressure on several tyres at thesame time cannot be detected by the tyrepressure loss warning system.The tyre pressure loss warning system isnot able to warn you of a sudden loss ofpressure, e.g. if the tyre is penetrated by aforeign object.In the event of a sudden loss of pressure,bring the vehicle to a halt by braking care-fully. Do not make any sudden steeringmovements when doing so.

While the vehicle is in motion, the tyre pres-sure loss warning system monitors the settyre pressure using the rotational speed ofthe wheels. This enables the system to detectsignificant pressure loss in a tyre. If the speedof rotation of a wheel changes as a result ofa loss of pressure, a corresponding warning

message will appear in the multi-function dis-play.The function of the tyre pressure loss warningsystem is limited or delayed if:Rsnow chains are fitted to your vehicle'styresRroad conditions are wintryRyou are driving on sand or gravelRyou adopt a very sporty driving style (cor-nering at high speeds or driving with highrates of acceleration)Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in thevehicle or on the roof)

Restarting the tyre pressure loss warn-ing systemRestart the tyre pressure losswarning systemif you have:Rchanged the tyre pressureRchanged the wheels or tyresRfitted new wheels or tyres

X Before restarting, consult the table of tyrepressures on the inside of the fuel filler flapto ensure that the tyre pressure in all four

Operation


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 185

Z


Tyres and wheels

186

tyres is set correctly for the operating con-ditions concerned.

X Also observe the notes in the section ontyre pressures (Y page 184).

G Risk of accidentThe tyre pressure loss warning system canonly give reliable warnings if you have setthe correct tyre pressure.If an incorrect tyre pressure is set, theseincorrect values will be monitored.A tyre with insufficient pressure results invehicle instability when driving, thusincreasing the risk of an accident.

X Make sure that the key is in position 2 inthe ignition lock.The standard display appears in the multi-function display (Y page 110).

X Pressk orj to select the tyre pres-sure function:Run Flat Indicator activeMenu: R-Buttonæ

X Press the reset button on the left of theinstrument cluster.The following message appears in themulti-function display:Restart Run Flat Indicator?

Yes Cancel

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press theæ button.The following message appears in themulti-function display:Run Flat Indicator restartedAfter a teach-in period, the tyre pressureloss warning system will monitor the settyre pressures of all four tyres.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press theç button.

orX Wait until the messageRestart Run Flat Indicator?Yes Cancel disappears.The tyre pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Checking the tyre pressure electroni-cally*The tyre pressure monitor only functions ifthe correct wheel electronics are fitted to allwheels. Thesemonitor the pressure in all fourtyres, which you have set when restarting thetyre pressuremonitor. Themonitor warns youwhen the pressure drops in one or more ofthe tyres.G Risk of accidentThe tyre pressure monitor does not warnyou of an incorrectly set tyre pressure. Thetable on the inside of the fuel filler flap willhelp you decide whether the tyre pressuresshould be corrected.The tyre pressure monitor is not able towarn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g.if the tyre is penetrated by a foreign object.In the event of a sudden loss of pressure,bring the vehicle to a halt by braking care-fully. Do not make any sudden steeringmovements when doing so.

i The operation of the tyre pressure moni-tor can be affected by interference fromradio transmitting equipment (e.g. radioheadphones, two-way radios) that may bebeing operated in or near the vehicle.

Operation

* optional



Tyres and wheels

187

i If you are carrying a deflated tyre in thevehicle, you may only reactivate the tyrepressure monitor if:Rthe deflated tyre is no longer in the vehi-cleRyou have adjusted the tyre pressure cor-rectly

Calling up the tyre pressure using theon-board computerX Make sure that the key is in position 2 inthe ignition lock.

X Press thej ork button to select thetyre pressure function.

The current tyre pressure for each wheel willbe displayed.

If the vehicle has been parked for longer than20minutes or you have not driven faster than25 km/h since the vehicle was parked, thefollowing message appears:Tyre pressure displayed only afterdriving for a few minutes

i The tyre pressure values indicated by theon-board computer may differ from thosemeasured at a filling stationwith a pressuregauge. The tyres pressures shown by theon-board computer refer to those meas-ured at sea level. The tyre pressure valuesindicated by the on-board computer maydiffer when the vehicle is at high altitude.In this case, do not reduce the tyre pres-sures.

Restarting the tyre pressure monitorIn most cases, the tyre pressure monitor willautomatically detect the new reference val-ues, e.g. if you have:Rchanged the tyre pressureRchanged the wheels or tyresRfitted new wheels or tyresIf you wish to define the new reference valuesmanually:

X Use the table on the inside of the fuel fillerflap to ensure that the tyre pressure is setcorrectly in all four tyres for the currentoperating conditions.Also observe the notes in the section ontyre pressures (Y page 184).

X Make sure that the key is in position 2 inthe ignition lock.The standard display appears in the multi-function display (Y page 110).

X Press thej ork button to select theTyre pressure function orwait until thefollowing message appears:Tyre pressure displayed only afterdriving for a few minutes

X Press the reset button on the left of theinstrument cluster (Y page 193).The following message appears in themulti-function display: Check currenttyre pressure?

X Press theæ button.The following message appears in themulti-function display:Tyre pressure monitor restartedThe tyre pressure monitor has stored thepressure of the tyres as a new referencevalue.

Operation


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 187

Z


Tyres and wheels

188

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press theç button.

If the following message appears in the multi-function display:RReactivate tyre pressure monitorafter correcting tyre pressureRPlease correct the tyre pressure

X Check the tyre pressure on all four wheelsand correct as necessary.

X Start the tyre pressure monitor again.

Interchanging the wheels

G Risk of accidentInterchange the front and rear wheels onlyif they have the samedimensions: for exam-ple size, offset, etc.After every wheel interchange/change,have the tightening torque checked at aqualified specialist workshop that has thenecessary specialist knowledge and toolsto carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use aMercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur-pose. In particular, work relevant to safety

or on safety-related systems must be car-ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.The wheels could work loose if they are nottightened to a torque of 130 Nm.For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use wheel bolts of thecorrect size which have been approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles.

The wear patterns on the front and rear tyresdiffer depending on the operating conditions.Interchange the wheels before a clear wearpattern has formed on the tyres. Front tyrestypically wear more on the shoulders and therear tyres in the centre.Interchange the wheels every 5,000 km to10,000 km depending on the degree of tyrewear, provided that the vehicle has the samesize front and rear tyres. Do not reverse thedirection of tyre rotation.Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel andthe brake disc thoroughly every time a wheelis interchanged. Check the tyre pressure and,if necessary, restart the tyre pressure losswarning system or the tyre pressure moni-tor*.

! On vehicles fitted with a tyre pressuremonitor*, electronic components are loca-ted in the wheel.Tyre fitting tools should not be applied inthe area of the valve, as this could damagethe electronic components.Always have the wheels interchanged/changed at a qualified specialist workshop,e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Operation

* optional



Winter driving

189

Winter driving

Points to rememberHave your vehicle winterproofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-BenzService Centre, at the onset of winter.

! Take care not to damage the sealing stripand the moulding on the side of the rearwindow when scraping ice off the rear win-dow.

Winter tyresUse winter tyres at temperatures below+7 °C and on snow or ice-covered roads. Onlythen can the effect of the ABS and ESP® driv-ing systems be ensured in winter too.Use winter tyres of the same make and treadon all wheels to maintain safe handling char-acteristics.G Risk of accidentWinter tyres with a tread depth of less than4 mm must be replaced immediately. Theyare no longer suitable for winter use, canno longer provide sufficient grip. This couldcause you to lose control of your vehicleand cause an accident.

Always observe the maximum permittedspeed specified for the winter tyres you havefitted. If you fit winter tyres which have alower maximum permitted speed than that ofthe vehicle, affix an appropriate warning signin the driver's field of vision. This can beobtained at a qualified specialist workshop,e.g. from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.Under these circumstances, you should alsorestrict the maximum speed of the vehicleusing permanent Speedtronic20 to the maxi-mum permissible speed for the winter tyres(Y page 136).Once you have fitted the winter tyres:X Check the tyre pressures (Y page 184).X Restart the tyre pressure moni-tor* (Y page 186).

G Risk of accidentIf you fit the spare wheel* when driving withwinter tyres, bear in mind that driving sta-bility will be impaired owing to unstablecornering characteristics caused by the dif-ferent tyres. You should therefore adaptyour driving style and drive carefully.Have the spare wheel* replaced at thenearest qualified specialist workshop

which has the necessary specialist knowl-edge and tools to carry out the workrequired. Mercedes-Benz recommendsthat you use a Mercedes-Benz ServiceCentre for this purpose. In particular, workrelevant to safety or on safety-related sys-tems must be carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Snow chainsFor safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use snow chains whichhave been specially approved for your vehicleby Mercedes-Benz, or are of a correspondingstandard of quality.

! Information about the use of snow chain-compatible AMG winter tyres is applicablefor AMG tyres. Use of snow chains is onlypermissible with these tyres.

If you intend to fit snow chains, please bearthe following points in mind:

20 Only available for certain countries.

Operation

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 189

Z


Driving tips

190

RSnow chains cannot be fitted to all wheel/tyre combinations.RSnow chains must not be fitted to emer-gency wheels, e.g. a collapsible emergencyspare wheel.RFit snow chains only in pairs and only to therear wheels. Comply with the manufactur-er's installation instructions.

On vehicles with Active Body Control (ABC)*(Y page 139), if snow chains have been fitted,you may only drive at raised vehicle level.Do not exceed the maximum permissiblespeed of 50 km/h.

i You may wish to deactivate ESP® whenpulling away with snow chains fitted(Y page 54). This way you can allow thewheels to spin in a controlled manner, ach-ieving an increased driving force (cuttingaction).

Winter driving

G Risk of accidentDo not shift down for additional enginebraking on a slippery road surface. Thiscould cause the drive wheels to lose theirgrip and the vehicle could skid.

You should drive particularly carefully on slip-pery road surfaces. Avoid sudden accelera-tion, steering and braking manoeuvres.If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot bestopped when moving at low speed:X Shift the selector lever to N.X Try to bring the vehicle under control usingcorrective steering.

Driving tips

Rolling with the engine switched off

G Risk of accidentDo not switch off the engine while the vehi-cle is in motion.There is no power assistance for the steer-ing or the service brake when the engine isnot running.Steering and braking require significantlymore effort and you could lose control ofthe vehicle and cause an accident as aresult.

Braking

G Risk of accidentDo not change down for additional enginebraking on a slippery road surface. Thiscould cause the drive wheels to lose theirgrip and the vehicle could skid.

G Risk of accidentMake sure that other road users are notendangered by your braking.

Operation



Driving tips

191

Downhill gradientsOn long and steep downhill gradients, espe-cially if the vehicle is laden, you must selectshift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time.

i This also applies if you have activatedcruise control, Speedtronic or Distronic*.

This uses the braking effect of the engine andyou will not have to brake to such an extentto maintain the same speed. This relieves theload on the brake system and prevents thebrakes from overheating and wearing tooquickly. If you need additional braking,depress the brake pedal repeatedly ratherthan continuously.

Heavy and light loadsIf the brakes have been subjected to a heavyload, do not stop the vehicle immediately, butdrive on for a short while. This allows the air-flow to cool the brakes more quickly.G Risk of accidentNever depress the brake pedal continu-ously while the vehicle is in motion, e.g.never cause the brakes to rub by applyingconstant slight pedal pressure. This causesthe brake system to overheat, increases

the braking distance and can lead to thebrakes failing completely.

If the brakes have been used onlymoderately,you should occasionally test their effective-ness. To do this, brake more firmly from ahigher speed. This improves the grip of thebrakes.

Wet roadsIf driving in heavy rain for a prolonged periodof time without braking, there may be adelayed reaction from the brakes, when brak-ing for the first time. You must brake harder.You must therefore maintain a greater dis-tance from the vehicle in front.Brake firmly after driving on a wet road. Thisway the brake discs will becomewarm, dryingmore quickly, which will protect them againstcorrosion.

Limited braking performance on saltedroads

G Risk of accidentThe layer of salt on the brake discs and thebrake pads/linings may cause a delay inthe braking effect, resulting in a signifi-

cantly longer braking distance, which couldlead to an accident.To avoid this danger, you should:Roccasionally brake carefully, without put-ting other road users at risk, when youare driving on salted roads. This helps toremove any salt that may have started tobuild up on the brake discs and the brakepads/linings.Rmaintain a greater distance to the vehicleahead and drive with particular care.Rcarefully apply the brakes at the end of atrip and immediately after commencing anew trip, so that salt residues areremoved from the brake disc.

New brake pads/liningsFor safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only have brake pads/liningsfitted to your vehicle that have been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which corre-spond to an equivalent quality standard.Brake pads/linings which have not beenapproved for Mercedes-Benz or which are notof an equivalent quality could affect your vehi-cle's operating safety.

Operation

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 191

Z


Driving tips

192

G Risk of accidentNew brake pads/linings only reach theiroptimum braking effect after several hun-dred kilometres of driving. Before this opti-mum braking effect is reached, you shouldcompensate for the reduced braking effectby applying greater pressure when braking.This also applies after the brake discs or thebrake pads/linings have been replaced.

High-performance brake system forAMG vehiclesThe high-performance brake system isdesigned for heavy loads. Braking can there-fore cause noises. This will depend on:RspeedRbraking forceRenvironmental conditions, such as temper-ature and humidity

The wear of individual components of thebrake system, such as the brake pads/liningsor brake discs, depends on the individual driv-ing style and operating conditions.Because of this, it is impossible to state amileage that will be valid under all circum-stances. An aggressive driving style will leadto high wear.

Tyre grip

G Risk of accidentWhereas the vehicle can be fully controlledat a certain speed on dry roads, you mustreduce your speed on wet or icy roads toachieve the same road safety. Otherwiseyou could cause an accident.Pay particular attention to the road condi-tions at temperatures around freezingpoint.If ice has formed on the road surface (e.g.from fog), a light film of water rapidly formson the ice when you brake, considerablyreducing tyre grip. Drive with particularcare in such weather conditions.

Driving on wet roadsIf water has accumulated to a certain depthon the road surface, there is a danger of aqua-planing occurring, even if:Ryou drive at low speedsRthe tyres have adequate tread depthFor this reason, do not drive in tyre ruts, andbrake carefully.

Driving on flooded roadsIf you have to drive on stretches of road onwhich water has collected, please bear inmind that:Rthe maximum permitted still water depth is12 cmRyou should drive no faster than at walkingpace

! Bear in mind that vehicles travelling infront or in the opposite direction createwaves. This may cause the maximum per-missible water depth to be exceeded.You must observe these notes, otherwisedamage may occur to the engine, electricsand transmission.

Operation



Service

193

Driving abroad

Points to rememberAn extensiveMercedes-Benz Service networkis also available in other countries. You canobtain the relevant workshop directoriesfrom any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.Only low-octane fuel is available in certaincountries.You can find further information about fuelgrades on (Y page 175).

Symmetrical dipped beamIf your journey takes you to countries wherevehicles are driven on the opposite side of theroad to the country in which the vehicle isregistered, your headlampsmust be switchedto symmetrical dipped beam or be partiallymasked. Oncoming traffic will be dazzledless.X Vehicleswith headlamps that cannot beswitched over: mask the headlamps withspecial masking tape.

i You can obtain this masking tape from aqualified specialist workshop, e.g. aMercedes-Benz Service Centre.

! Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use genuine Mercedes-Benz maskingtape. Your headlamps could otherwise bedamaged.Remove the masking tape when you areonce again driving on the same side of theroad as in the country in which your vehicleis registered.

X Vehicles with headlamps that can beswitched over: have the headlampsswitched over at a qualified specialist work-shop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz ServiceCentre.

G Risk of accidentHave your headlamps switched back toasymmetrical dipped beam if you visit acountry in which traffic drives on the sameside of the road as in the country in whichyour vehicle was registered. You may oth-erwise dazzle the oncoming traffic andcould cause an accident.

Service

ASSYST PLUS service interval displayASSYST, the service interval display, tells youwhen the next service is due. Whenever aservice is due, the followingmessage appearsin the multi-function display:Service A in .. daysService A in .. kmService A due nowThe symbol and the letter indicate which typeof service is due:9 Short service A½ Long service BThe service interval display ASSYST does notrecord any periods of time during which thebattery is disconnected. In order to maintainthe time-dependent service schedule, youshould call up the service due date and makea note of it before disconnecting the battery.The alternative is to subtract the battery dis-connection periods from the service dateshown on the display.

Operation


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 193

Z


Care

194

Fading out the service message

1 Reset buttonX Press reset button1.

Exceeding the service due dateOne of the following messages appears in themulti-function display:Service A overdue by .. daysService A overdue by .. kmYou will also hear a warning tone.A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. aMercedes-Benz Service Centre, will reset theASSYST service interval indicator after thenecessary service work has been carried out.

i If you fail to have the service performedby the specified date, you may be violatingapplicable laws. Yourwarrantymay be inva-lidated and goodwill settlements may berefused.

Calling up the service due dateUse the buttons on the multi-function steer-ing wheel.X Switch on the ignition.X Pressè orÿ to select the Basicdisplay menu (Y page 110).

X Press thej ork button to select theservice information.The9 or½ service symbol and theservice due date are displayed.

Care

Notes on careRegular and proper care maintains the valueof your vehicle.

i It is advisable to use Mercedes-Benz careproducts.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affectedby corrosion and damage caused by inade-quate care cannot always be completelyrepaired. In such cases, visit a qualified spe-cialist workshop immediately, e.g. aMercedes-Benz Service Centre.Repair damage caused by loose chippingsand remove the following substances imme-diately, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard:RSoak insect remains with insect removerand rinse off afterwards.RSoak bird droppings with water and rinseoff afterwards.RRemove tree resin, oils, fuels and greasesby rubbing gently with a cloth soaked inpetroleum ether or lighter fluid.RUse silicone remover to remove wax.RUse tar remover to remove tar stains.

Operation



Care

195

H Environmental noteDispose of empty packaging, cleaningcloths and polishing wads in an environ-mentally responsible manner.

! Do not affix:RstickersRfilmsRmagnetic plates or similar itemsto painted surfaces, otherwise you coulddamage the paintwork.

Vehicle care! Do not park the vehicle for a long periodof time directly after cleaning, especially ifthe wheels have just been cleaned with awheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could causerapid corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. After cleaning, parkthe vehicle when it is at normal operatingtemperature.

Automatic car wash

G Risk of accidentThe vehicle is braked when SBC® Hold isactivated. Therefore, deactivate SBC®Holdbefore the vehicle is washed in an auto-matic car wash.

You can wash the vehicle in an automatic carwash from the very start.

! It is preferable to use car washes whichdo not use high-pressure cleaners. In carwashes that use high water pressures,there is a danger that water may leak intothe vehicle.

! Do not use a touch-free automatic carwash that uses chemical agents to washthe vehicle.

If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it beforecleaning it in an automatic car wash.

! Make sure that the automatic car wash issuitable for the size of the vehicle. Fold inthe exterior mirrors before the vehicle iswashed. There is otherwise a risk of dam-age to the exterior mirrors.

! Make sure that the sidewindows are com-pletely closed, that the ventilation/heater

blower is fully turned off and that the wind-screen wiper switch is set to 0. Otherwise,the rain sensor may be activated, inadver-tently triggeringwiper operation. This couldcause damage to the vehicle.

After using an automatic car wash, wipe offwax from the windscreen and the wiperblades. This will prevent smears and reducewiping noises caused by residue on the wind-screen.

High-pressure cleaners

G Risk of accidentDo not use high-pressure cleaners with cir-cular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) to cleanyour vehicle or - especially - the tyres. Youcould otherwise damage the tyres andcause an accident.

! Observe the instructions issued by theequipment manufacturer concerning thedistance to be maintained between thenozzle of the high-pressure cleaner and thevehicle (at least 30 cm).Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzlearound when cleaning your vehicle.Do not aim directly at any of the following:

Operation


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 195

Z


Care

196

RtyresRdoor jointRelectrical componentsRbatteryRconnectorsRlightsRsealsDamaged seals or electrical componentscan lead to failures or leaks.

Cleaning the wiper blades and the out-side of the windscreen

G Risk of injuryTurn the key to position 0 in the ignitionlock before cleaning the windscreen or thewiper blades. There is otherwise a risk ofthe windscreen wipers being set in motionand causing injury.

X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignitionlock (Y page 73).

X Set the windscreen wipers to position I onthe combination switch (Y page 92).

X Turn the key to position0 or remove it whenthe wiper arms are vertical (Y page 73).

! Only fold the wiper arms away from thewindscreenwhen they are in a vertical posi-tion, otherwise youwill damage the bonnet.

X Fold the wiper arms away from the wind-screen until you feel them engage.

X Clean thewindscreen and thewiper blades.X Fold the windscreen wipers back againbefore the ignition is switched on.

! Do not clean the wiper blades too oftenas this will result in the rubber becomingporous, leading to wiper noise.

Cleaning the windows! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-vents to clean the inside of the windows.Clean the insides of the windows with adamp cloth or commercially-available glasscleaner. Avoid touching the inside of therear windscreen and the side windows withhard objects, e.g. ice scrapers or rings. Youcould otherwise cause damage to the win-dows, rear window heating or aerial on therear window.

i Anti-glare film retrofitted to the insides ofthe windows could interfere with radio ormobile phone reception, especially if it isconductive or metal-coated film. Informa-tion about anti-glare film can be obtainedfrom any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Cleaning the headlampsX Clean the plastic lenses of the headlampswith a damp sponge.

! Only use washer fluid which is suitablefor plastic lenses. Unsuitable washer fluidcould damage the plastic lenses of theheadlamps.Do not use the following:Rdry clothsRabrasive cleaning agentsRsolventsRcleaning agents containing solventYou could otherwise scratch or damage thesurface of the lenses.

Operation



Care

197

Cleaning the plastic trim! Do not use dry, coarse or hard cloths anddo not scrub. Doing so will scratch or dam-age the surfaces.

! In order to protect the vehicle's high-qual-ity surfaces and to retain the overallappearance, avoid contact with cosmeticsand suntan lotion.

X Wipe plastic parts with a damp, lint-freecloth (e.g. a microfibre cloth).

X Light soiling: use a low-foaming soap (e.g.a light liquid hand soap) diluted in water.

X Heavy soiling: use a cleaning agent that issolvent-free and non-corrosive. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use aMercedes-Benz cleaning product for thispurpose.

Cleaning the steering wheel boss anddashboardX Moisten a clean lint-free cloth with water.X Clean the plastic parts and the dashboard.X If particularly dirty, use a mild detergent.

G Risk of injuryDo not use cleaners and cockpit caresprays containing solvents to clean thecockpit and steering wheel boss. Cleanerscontaining solvents cause the surface tobecome porous and in the event of an air-bag being triggered, plastic parts that havebecome loose could cause considerableinjuries.

Cleaning the leather trim*! CleaningRClean genuine leather covers using adamp cloth, then wipe the covers downusing a dry cloth. When doing this, makesure that the leather does not becomesoaked. For leather care, you should useleather care foam A 001 986 59 71 10.You can purchase this from anyMercedes-Benz Service Centre.RClean artificial leather coverswith a clothmoistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e. g. washing-up liquid).RClean fabric covers with a microfibrecloth moistened with a solution contain-ing 1% detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid).When cleaning, take care not to rub too

vigorously and always wipe entire seatsections to avoid leaving visible lines.Leave the seat to dry afterwards. Clean-ing results depend on the type of dirt andhow long it has been there.RClean Alcantara covers with a dampcloth. Make sure you wipe entire seatsections to avoid leaving visible lines.

i Note that leather covers are a naturalproduct and as such are subject to a naturalageing process and may react differently(e.g. increased formation of wrinkles) tocertain environmental influences (such ashigh humidity, intense heat).Note that regular care is essential to ensurethat the quality (both appearance and com-fort) of the covers is retained over time.

Tail pipe care (AMG vehicles)Impurities combined with the effects of roadgrit and corrosive environmental factors maycause flash rust to form on the surface.Regular care of the exhaust tail pipes willensure that their original shine is restored.

Operation

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 197

Z


Care

198

! Do not clean exhaust tail pipes with alka-line-based cleaning agents such as wheelcleaner.Use the chrome-cleaning agent recommen-ded by Mercedes-Benz for cleaning. Infor-mation about chrome-cleaning agents canbe obtained from any Mercedes-BenzService Centre.

Cleaning Distronic*

1 Distronic* cover


X Clean cover1 in the radiator grille withwater, car shampoo and a soft cloth.

! Do not use dry, coarse or hard cloths anddo not scrub. Doing so will scratch or dam-age the surfaces.

Cleaning Parktronic*The sensors are located in the front and rearbumpers.

1 Parktronic* sensors in the left-hand sideof the front bumper

X Clean sensors1 in the bumper with water,car shampoo and a soft cloth.

! Do not use dry, coarse or hard cloths anddo not scrub. You will otherwise scratch ordamage the sensors. If you intend to use ahigh-pressure cleaner or a steam cleaner toclean the sensors, observe the instructions

issued by the equipment manufacturerconcerning the distance to be maintainedbetween the nozzle of the high-pressurecleaner and the vehicle.

Operation

* optional



199

Where will I find...? ........................... 200Display messages ............................. 202Troubleshooting ................................ 230Locking/unlocking in an emer-gency ................................................. 255Changing the batteries ..................... 258Changing the bulbs ........................... 259Replacing the wiper blades .............. 264Flat tyre ............................................. 266Battery ............................................... 276Towing and tow-starting .................. 280Fuses .................................................. 283

Practical advice



Where will I find...?

200


Warning triangleThe warning triangle is located in the bootbehind the left trim.

1 Locking button

Removing the warning triangleX Turn locking button1 90° anti-clockwise.X Fold the cover to the left.X Remove the warning triangle.

Setting up the warning triangle

1 Retainer2 Side reflectors3 Feet

X Fold feet3 down and out to the side.X Pull side reflectors2 upwards to form atriangle and lock them at the top usingretainer1.

Vehicle tool kit, jack, TIREFIT kit andspare wheel*The vehicle tool kit, TIREFIT kit, jack andemergency spare wheel are in a stowagespace under the luggage compartment floor.G Risk of injuryThe jack is designed only to raise and holdthe vehicle for a short time while a wheelis being changed.If you are carrying out work on the vehicle,you must use stands.Make sure that the jack is placed on a firm,non-slip and level surface. Do not usewooden blocks or similar objects as a jackunderlay. Otherwise, the jack will not beable to achieve its load-bearing capacitydue to the restricted height.Do not start the engine at any time while awheel is being changed.

i When using the jack, you should alsoobserve the safety notes in the "Flat tyre"section (Y page 266).

Practical advice

* optional




201

Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit

1 TIREFIT kit2 Electric air pump3 Vehicle tool kit4 Consumer battery5 Wheel wrench6 Jack

Vehicles with a spare wheel*

1 Spare wheel2 Electric air pump3 Vehicle tool kit4 Consumer battery

1 Jack (underneath the spare wheel)

2 Wheel wrench (underneath the sparewheel)

Fire extinguisher*i Have the fire extinguisher refilled aftereach use and checked every one or twoyears. Otherwise, it may fail in an emer-gency.Observe the legal requirements in all coun-tries concerned.

The fire extinguisher is located in the stowagecompartment under the driver's seat.

1 Handle2 Cap

Practical advice

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 201

Z


Display messages

202

X Pull handle1 upwards.X Fold cover2 forwards in the direction ofthe arrow.

X Remove the fire extinguisher from thestowage compartment.

First-aid kiti Check the expiry date of the first-aid kitannually, and replace the contents whennecessary.

The first-aid kit is located in the stowage com-partment under the front-passenger seat.

1 Handle2 Cap

X Pull handle1 upwards.X Fold cover2 forwards in the direction ofthe arrow.

X Remove the first-aid kit from the stowagecompartment.

Display messages

NotesThe on-board computer shows warnings ormalfunctions in the multi-function display.Certain display messages are accompaniedby a warning tone or a continuous tone.Themulti-function display shows high-prioritydisplay messages in red. In the followingtables, these display messages are printed inred.Please respond in accordance with the dis-play messages and follow the additionalnotes in this Owner's Manual.G Risk of accidentIf the instrument cluster or multi-functiondisplay fails, no display messages can bedisplayed.Thismeans that youwill not see informationabout the driving situation, such as thespeed, outside temperature, warning/indi-cator lamps, display messages or systemfailures. Handling characteristics may beaffected. Adapt your driving style andspeed accordingly.Immediately consult a qualified specialistworkshop which has the necessary special-ist knowledge and tools to carry out the

Practical advice



Display messages

203

work required. Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you use a Mercedes-BenzService Centre for this purpose. In particu-lar, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

When you stop and park the vehicle, pleaseobserve the instructions provided for SBCHold (Y page 137) and parking (Y page 97).The following tables contain all the displaymessages.

Hiding display messagesAfter a few seconds, the on-board computerautomatically hides some low priority displaymessages. Other messages remain visible inthe multi-function display until you hide themyourself.Some high priority display messages cannotbe hidden. The multi-function display showsthese messages continuously until the cau-ses of the messages have been remedied.

Use the buttons on the multi-function steer-ing wheel.X Use theè,·,j ork buttonto select another display.The on-board computer saves certain dis-play messages in the message memory(Y page 115).

Text messages

G Risk of accident and injuryThe operating safety of your vehicle could be compromised if service work is carried out improperly. You could lose control of the vehicle,thereby causing an accident. Safety systems may also not be able to protect you or others as intended.Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools tocarry out the work required.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose.In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Practical advice


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 203

Z


Display messages

204

Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution

120 km/h Maximum speedexceeded

The maximum speed has been excee-ded21.

X Drive more slowly.

ABC Malfunction Stopcar

Vehicles with ABC*: vehicle level is toolow.

X Stop in accordance with the traffic conditions.After a few seconds the vehicle level is adjus-ted and the display message disappears.

ABC Malfunction StopcarThe display mes-sage is shown con-tinuously.

Vehicles with ABC*: the vehicle is losingoil.

X Stop in accordance with the traffic conditions.X Do not continue driving under any circumstan-ces.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

ABC Malfunction StopcarThe display mes-sage is shown con-tinuously.

ABC* is faulty. X Do not exceed a maximum speed of 80 km/h.X Avoid large steering angles. Otherwise, thefront wing or the tyres could be damaged whenyou drive on.

X Listen for scraping sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ABC Vehicle risingPlease wait

Vehicleswith ABC*: the vehicle level is toolow when stationary.

X Do not drive off.X Wait until the display message disappears.The vehicle level is set.


Practical advice

* optional



Display messages

205


ABC Malfunction ABC* function is restricted. The vehicle'shandling characteristics may be affected.

X Do not exceed a maximum speed of 80 km/h.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ABS ABS, ESP unavaila-ble See Owner'sManual

G Risk of accidentABS and ESP® are temporarily unavaila-ble. BAS and hill start assist* (SL 63 AMGonly) are also deactivated. It is possiblethat self diagnosis is not yet complete.The SBCTM brake system continues tofunction normally, but without the func-tions listed above.

X Carefully drive a short distance at a speedabove 20 km/h.If the display message disappears, ABS,ESP®, BAS and hill start assist* (SL 63 AMGonly) are available once again.

ABS ABS, ESP inopera-tive See Owner'sManual

G Risk of accidentABS and ESP® are unavailable due to afault. BAS and hill start assist*(SL 63 AMG only) are also deactivated.The SBCTM brake system continues tofunction normally, but without the func-tions listed above.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immedi-ately.

Practical advice

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 205

Z


Display messages

206


DTR - - - km/h An activation condition for Distronic* isnot fulfilled.

X If conditions permit, drive faster than30 km/h and store the speed (Y page 127).

orX Check the activation conditions for Dis-tronic* (Y page 129).

DTR override Distronic* is no longer controlling thespeed of the vehicle.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC inoperative Distronic* is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Practical advice

* optional



Display messages

207


DISTRONIC currently unavail-able See Owner'sManual

Distronic* is deactivated and is tempora-rily not operational if:Rthe Distronic* cover in the radiatorgrille is dirty.Rits function is impaired due to heavyrain, snow or fog.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarilynot operational, e.g. due to electromag-netic radiation emitted by nearby TV orradio stations or other sources of radi-ationRthe radar sensor system has not detec-ted any vehicles or stationary objects,e.g. traffic signs, for a long time.Rthe system has overheated.

Distronic* becomes available again and the dis-play message disappears when:Rthe dirt (e.g. slush) falls off while you are drivingRthe system detects that the sensors are fullyavailable again

If the display message does not disappear:X Clean the Distronic* cover in the radiator grille(Y page 198).

X If necessary, wait until the system has cooleddown.

X Restart the engine.

Practical advice

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 207

Z


Display messages

208


ESP unavailable SeeOwner's Manual

G Risk of accidentESP® is unavailable due to a malfunctionor interruption in the power supply. Thehill start assist* (SL 63 AMG only) is alsodeactivated. ABS is still operational.The SBCTM brake system continues tofunction normally, but without ESP®.

X Make sure the steering wheel can be turned tofull lock without the wheels touching anyobstacles such as the kerb.

X With the vehicle stationary, turn the steeringwheel to full lock in both directions in order toreset ESP®.

If the display message does not disappear afterseveral attempts:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immedi-ately.

ESP inoperative SeeOwner's Manual

G Risk of accidentESP® is unavailable due to a malfunction.Hill start assist* (SL 63 AMG only) is alsodeactivated. ABS is still operational.The SBCTM brake system continues tofunction normally, but without ESP®.


Practical advice

* optional



Display messages

209


P Selector lever to P You have switched off the engine with theKEYLESSGObutton* and opened the driv-er's door.orWith SBC Hold activated, you have either:Ropened the driver’s door and releasedthe seat belt orRswitched off the engine orRopened the bonnetThe horn may also sound at regular inter-vals. The horn becomes louder if youattempt to lock the vehicle.The engine cannot be started.

X Move the selector lever to P.The engine can be started again.

No Service Your vehicle is outside of the GSM net-work provider transmitter/receiver range.

X Wait until the operational readiness symbolappears in the multi-function display(Y page 123).

Tyre pressure displayed afterdriving for a fewminutes

The tyre pressure monitor* is measuringthe tyre pressure.

X Drive on.The tyre pressures will appear in the multi-function display after you have been driving fora few minutes.

Practical advice

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 209

Z


Display messages

210


Tyre pressuremonitor

inoperative The tyre pressure monitor* is malfunc-tioning.

X Have the tyre pressure monitor* and wheelschecked at a qualified specialist workshop.


inoperative Nowheel sensors

The tyre pressure monitor* is deactivatedbecause the vehicle is fitted with wheelsthat do not have suitable wheel sensors.

X Have wheels with suitable wheel sensors fittedat a qualified specialist workshop.Once wheels with the correct wheel sensorshave been fitted, the tyre pressure monitor*reactivates automatically after a few minutesof driving.


Wheel sensor miss-ing

The tyre pressure monitor* is not receiv-ing signals from one or more wheelsbecause:Ra wheel without a suitable wheel sensoris fitted (e.g. the spare wheel).Rthe battery on one of the wheel elec-tronics unit is discharged.Ra wheel electronics unit has malfunc-tioned.

A line is displayed in the multi-functiondisplay for the tyre concerned instead ofthe tyre pressure value.

X Have the tyre pressure monitor* and wheelschecked at a qualified specialist workshop.Once wheels with suitable wheel sensors havebeen fitted again, the tyre pressures are dis-played in the multi-function display after driv-ing for a few minutes.

Practical advice

* optional



Display messages

211



currently unavail-able

The tyre pressure monitor* is temporarilydeactivated. The voltage of the vehicle'selectrical system is too low or radio inter-ference prevents the reception of sensorsignals.

X Drive on.Once the causes have been eliminated, the tyrepressure monitor* automatically reactivatesafter a few minutes of driving.

Tyre pressure Check tyres G Risk of accidentThe tyre pressure losswarning systemhasdetected a significant pressure loss.

X Stop the vehicle without making any suddensteering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attentionto the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Check the tyres.X Check the tyre pressure and correct it if nec-essary (Y page 184).

X Repair or change the faulty wheel as necessary(Y page 266).

X Then restart the tyre pressure loss warningsystem once the tyre pressure is correct(Y page 185).

Check tyres, then restart RunFlat Indicator

There was a tyre pressure warning mes-sage.

X Make sure that the pressure set is correct forall tyres (Y page 184).

X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system(Y page 185).

Run Flat Indi-cator

Inoperative The tyre pressure loss warning system isdeactivated due to a malfunction.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Practical advice

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 211

Z


Display messages

212


SBC H SBC Hold Off SBC Hold has been deactivated. The vehi-cle is skidding or a condition for activatingSBC HOLD is no longer met when thebrake pedal is firmly depressed.

X Reactivate SBC Hold later.

SBC H SBC Stop Cannot beactivated See Own.Man.

A condition for activating SBC Hold hasnot been met.

Check the conditions for activating SBC Hold(Y page 137):X Close the bonnet.X Close the driver's door.X Start the engine.X Release the parking brake.X Switch off all consumers not required.SBC HOLD can be reactivated as soon as theon-board electrical systemvoltage is sufficient.

SBC H SBC Hold inopera-tive See Owner'sManual

A malfunction has occurred. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

SRS Restraint systemmalfunction Con-sult workshop

G Risk of injuryThe restraint systems are faulty.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immedi-ately.

Cruise controland SPEEDTRONIC

inoperative Speedtronic and cruise control areunavailable.


Practical advice



Display messages

213


DISTRONIC andSPEEDTRONIC

inoperative Distronic* and Speedtronic are unavaila-ble.


- - - km/h Cruise control A condition for activating cruise controlhas not been met.

X Activate ESP® (Y page 54)X If conditions permit, drive faster than30 km/h and store the speed(Y page 126).

Symbol messages



¨ The boot lid is open. X Close the boot lid.

O G Risk of accidentYou are driving with the bonnet open.

X Stop the vehicle. Pay attention to the trafficconditions as you do so.

X Close the bonnet.

Practical advice

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 213

Z


Display messages

214


? G Risk of accidentYou are driving with the bonnet and theboot lid open.


X Close the bonnet and the boot lid.

2 At least one door is open. X Close the doors.

2 Check doors Vehicles with KEYLESS GO*: at least onedoor is open while depressing the lockingbutton on the door handle.

X Close the doors.

D The cooling fan for the coolant is faulty. X If the coolant temperature is less than120 °C, you can continue driving to the nearestqualified specialist workshop.

X In doing so, avoid heavy loads on the engine(e.g. driving in mountainous terrain) and stop-and-go driving.

Practical advice

* optional



Display messages

215


# The battery is not being charged. Possiblecauses are a torn poly-V-belt or a faultyalternator.Bear in mind that the SBCTM brake systemrequires electrical power.

X Stop immediately and safely when traffic con-ditions allow and check the poly-V-belt.

X If it has torn: do not drive on. Contact thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

X If it is not damaged: have the vehicle checkedimmediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

X Observe the additional SBCTM brake systemmessages in the multi-function display(Y page 217).

# The battery was charged with a charger orthe engine was jump-started.


# The battery is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

There is a fault in the electronics. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Practical advice


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 215

Z


Display messages

216


# Battery/AlternatorStop car

The battery is faulty.The SBCTM brake system requires electri-cal power, therefore its operational func-tionality is now limited.You need to use considerably more forceto brake. The brake pedal travel and thebraking distance will increase. If neces-sary, depress the brake pedal with maxi-mum force.

X Pull over as soon as it is safe to do so.X Do not continue driving under any circumstan-ces.

X Consult the nearest qualified specialist work-shop.

2 Brake wear The brake pads/linings have reachedtheir wear limit.

X Have the brake pads/linings replaced as soonas possible at a qualified specialist workshop.

3 Check brake fluidlevel

G Risk of accidentThere is insufficient brake fluid in thebrake fluid reservoir.



X Do not top up the brake fluid. This will not rec-tify the malfunction.

! Release parkingbrake

You are driving with the parking brakeapplied.

X Release the parking brake.

Practical advice



Display messages

217


T Reduced brakingpower Depressbrake pedal fully

G Risk of accidentThe SBCTM brake system is running inemergency mode.You will need to use considerably moreforce to brake. The braking distance isincreased. If necessary, depress the brakepedal with maximum force. The maximumspeed is limited to 90 km/h.


X Secure the vehicle against rolling awaywith theparking brake.


3 Service brake Con-sult workshop

There is a malfunction. The SBCTM brakesystem continues to operate normally.


3 Reduced brakingpower Start engine

The battery has insufficient voltage andcannot supply sufficient power to theSBCTM brake system.G Risk of poisoningNever leave the engine running inenclosed spaces. The exhaust gases con-tain carbon monoxide. Breathing inexhaust fumes is a health hazard. It canlead to loss of consciousness and death.

X Start the engine.The display message disappears.

Practical advice


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 217

Z


Display messages

218


3 Reduced brakingpower Consultworkshop

G Risk of accidentThe SBCTM brake system is running inemergency mode. The full power of thebrake system is not available.


3 Brakes overheatedDrive on, but witheven greater care

The brake system is very hot due toextreme loads.

Reduce the load on the brake system:X Drive with even greater care.X Use engine braking on downhill gradients.Select a lower gear for this purpose.

X Continue driving carefully to allow the airflowto cool the brakes.

3 Brake immediately Amalfunction has occurredwith SBCHoldactivated.The horn may also sound at regular inter-vals. The horn becomes louder if youattempt to lock the vehicle.The engine cannot be started.

X Immediately depress the brake pedal firmlyuntil the display message disappears.

X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away beforeyou leave it (Y page 97).The engine can be started again.

M Close boot separa-tor

The boot separator is open. X Close the boot separator (Y page 156).

Practical advice



Display messages

219


D Coolant Stop car,turn engine off.

The coolant is too hot. X Stop the vehicle. Pay attention to the trafficconditions as you do so.

X Switch off the engine.X Make sure, that the air supply to the radiatoris not blocked, e.g. by slush.

X Wait until the message disappears beforerestarting the engine. There is otherwise a riskof engine damage.

X Observe the coolant temperature gauge.X If the temperature increases again, visit a quali-fied specialist workshop immediately.

D Coolant Stop car,turn engine off.

The poly-V-belt may have torn. X Stop the vehicle. Pay attention to the trafficconditions as you do so.

X Switch off the engine.X Check the poly-V-belt.X If it has torn: do not drive on. Contact thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

X If it is not damaged: do not start the engineagain until the message disappears. There isotherwise a risk of engine damage.

Practical advice


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 219

Z


Display messages

220


B Top up coolant SeeOwner's Manual

The coolant level is too low. X Top up the coolant, observing the warningnotes before doing so (Y page 180).

X Have the coolant system checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop if the coolant needs top-ping up more often than usual.

_ Entry position Donot drive

The steering wheel has not yet moved tothe saved position.

X Wait until the steering wheel has moved to thesaved position.

. Left-hand corner-ing lightorRight-hand corner-ing light

The left-hand and/or right-hand corneringlamp* is faulty.

X Replace the bulb (Y page 259).

. Dipped beam leftorDipped beam right

The right-hand or left-hand dipped-beamheadlamp is faulty.


. Active light func-tion inoperative

The active light function* is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

. AUTO lights inop-erative

The light sensor is faulty. Constant head-lamp mode is switched on.

X Switch the lights to manual control in the on-board computer (Y page 118).

X Switch the lights on and off using the lightswitch.

Practical advice

* optional



Display messages

221


. Turn signal rearleft Back-up bulbonorTurn signal rearright Back-up bulbon

The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turnsignal is faulty.


. Turn signal leftmirrororTurn signal rightmirror

The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is faulty. This mes-sage will only appear if all LEDs havefailed.


. Turn signal frontleft Back-up bulbonorTurn signal frontright Back-up bulbon

The front left-hand or right-hand turn sig-nal is faulty.


Practical advice


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 221

Z


Display messages

222


. Brake lamp leftBack-up bulb onorBrake lamp rightBack-up bulb on

The left-hand or right-hand brake lamp isfaulty.


. 3rd brake lamp The third brake lamp is faulty. This mes-sage will only appear if all LEDs havefailed.


. Main beam leftorMain beam right

The left-hand or right-hand main-beamheadlamp is faulty.


. Intelligent LightSystem inoperative

The Intelligent Light System* is faulty. Thelights remain available without the Intelli-gent Light System*.


. Licence platelamp, leftorLicence platelamp, right

The left-hand or right-hand licence platelamp is faulty.


Practical advice

* optional



Display messages

223


. Switch off lights You did not switch off the lights whenleaving the vehicle.

X Turn the light switch toM orU.

orX If the rear foglamp is switched on: press thelight switch in to the stop.

. Front foglamp leftorFront foglampright

The front left-hand or right-hand foglampis faulty.


. Rear foglamp leftorRear foglamp right

The left-hand or right-hand rear foglamp isfaulty.


. Front left parkinglamp Back-up bulbonorFront right park-ing lamp Back-upbulb on

The front left-hand or right-hand parkinglamp is faulty.


Practical advice


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 223

Z


Display messages

224


. Reversing lampleftorReversing lampright

The left-hand or right-hand reversing lampis faulty.


. Tail lamp leftBack-up bulb onorTail lamp rightBack-up bulb on

The left-hand or right-hand tail lamp isfaulty.


N Close centre com-partment

The stowage compartment under the arm-rest is open. The interior motion sensor*is inoperative.

X Close the stowage compartment under thearmrest (Y page 162).

N Engine oil levelCheck level

Vehicles with an oil dipstick: the engine oillevel has dropped to a critical level.

X Check the engine oil level (Y page 178) and topup the engine oil if necessary.

X Have the engine checked for leaks if the engineoil needs topping up more often than usual.

N Add 1 litre engineoil when next refu-elling

Vehicles without an oil dipstick: theengine oil level is too low.

X Check the engine oil level (Y page 178) and topup the engine oil if necessary.

X Have the engine checked for leaks if the engineoil needs topping up more often than usual.

Practical advice

* optional



Display messages

225


N Engine oil levelStop car, turnengine off.

Vehicles without a dipstick: there is notenough oil in the engine. There is a dangerof engine damage.


X Switch off the engine.X Top up the engine oil and check the level(Y page 178).

N Engine oil levelReduce oil level

Vehicles without an oil dipstick: you haveadded too much engine oil. There is a riskof damaging the engine or catalytic con-verter.

X Siphon off excess engine oil until it is at thespecified level. Observe the legal require-ments.

N Engine oil levelEngine oil levelcannot be measured

Vehicles without an oil dipstick: the meas-uring system is faulty.


± Consult workshop One or more electronic systems areunable to deliver information to the on-board computer. The coolant temperaturegauge and the rev counter may havefailed.


H Tyre pressure Cau-tion tyre defect

G Risk of accidentAt least one tyre is rapidly deflating. Theaffected wheel is highlighted in the tyrepressure display of the tyre pressuremon-itor*.


X Repair or change the tyre (Y page 266).

Practical advice

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 225

Z


Display messages

226


H Tyre pressureCheck tyres

G Risk of accidentThe pressure in one or more tyres hasdropped significantly. The affected wheelis highlighted in the tyre pressure displayof the tyre pressure monitor*.


X Check the tyres.X Repair or change the faulty tyre if necessary(Y page 266).

X Check the tyre pressure and correct it if nec-essary (Y page 184).The warning will disappear automatically afteryou have been driving for a few minutes withthe corrected tyre pressure.

H Please correct thetyre pressure

Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitor*:the pressure of at least one tyre is too lowor there is a significant discrepancybetween the tyre pressures of the individ-ual wheels.

X Check the tyre pressure at the next opportunityand correct it if necessary (Y page 184).

I Change key batter-ies

The KEYLESS GO* key batteries are dis-charged.

X Change the batteries (Y page 259).

I Key not detected TheKEYLESSGO*key is not in the vehicle.If the engine is switched off, the vehiclecan no longer be locked centrally and theengine cannot be started.


X Look for the KEYLESS GO* key.

Practical advice

* optional



Display messages

227


I Key not detected The KEYLESS GO* key is not detectedwhile the engine is running, due to radiointerference.


X Operate the vehicle using the key in the ignitionlock if necessary.

I Key not detected The KEYLESS GO* key cannot be detec-ted.

X Change the location of the KEYLESS GO key*within the vehicle.

X Operate the vehicle using the key in the ignitionlock if necessary.

I Key detected invehicle

The KEYLESS GO key* has been detectedin the vehicle during locking.

X Remove the KEYLESS GO key* from the vehi-cle.

I Remove key You have left the key in the ignition lock. X Remove the key.

I Replace key The key no longer functions. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

¿ There is only a small amount of fuel in thefuel tank.

X Refuel at the nearest filling station.

4 Reserve fuel level The fuel level has fallen below the reserverange.


t Enter PIN You have not yet logged on to your mobilephone*.

X Enter the PIN for the SIM card.

Practical advice

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 227

Z


Display messages

228


t Bluetooth ready The Bluetooth connection between yourmobile phone and COMAND is not activa-ted.

X If desired, activate the Bluetooth connectionbetween your mobile phone and COMAND –please refer to the separate operating instruc-tions.

t No telephoneinserted

Your mobile phone is not inserted in thebracket*.

X Insert mobile phone into the bracket*(Y page 166).

\ Raise roll-overbar

G Risk of injuryThe roll-over bar is faulty.

X Raise the roll-over bar (Y page 46).X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

\ Raise roll-overbar

The roll-over bar has been automaticallydeployed and you have attempted to openor close the roof.

X Manually extend the roll-over bar until you hearit engage (Y page 46).

X Open or close the roof (Y page 154).

K Vario-roof Opera-tion only at stand-still

You tried to open the roofwhile the vehiclewas moving.

X Stop safely when traffic conditions allow andoperate the soft top again.

K Vario-roof lower-ing

The roof is not fully opened or closed. Thehydraulics are depressurised.

X Fully open or close the roof.

K Open / close Vario-roof completely

The roof is not locked. X Stop in accordance with the traffic conditions.X Push or pull the roof switch (Y page 154), untilthe roof is fully open or closed.

Practical advice

* optional



Display messages

229


K Vario-roof oper.Please wait SeeOwner's Manual.

The on-board voltage is too low. X Start the engine.

The roof has been opened and closed sev-eral times in a row. The roof drive has beenswitched off automatically for safety rea-sons.

You can open and close the roof again afterapproximately ten minutes.X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Repeat the opening or closing procedure.

W Top up washer fluid The washer fluid level in the washer fluidreservoir has dropped below the mini-mum.

X Top up the washer fluid (Y page 181).

Practical advice


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 229

Z


Troubleshooting

230

Troubleshooting

Points to remember


Indicator and warning lamps in switches and buttons

Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions

One or all of the indicator lampsin the seat ventilation* button areflashing.

There is insufficient voltagebecause toomany consumers areswitched on. The seat ventila-tion* has switched itself off auto-matically.

X Switch off consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps,interior lighting, etc.The seat ventilation* will automatically switch back on as soon asthere is sufficient voltage again.

One or all of the indicator lampsin the seat heating* button areflashing.

There is insufficient voltagebecause toomany consumers areswitched on. The seat heating*has switched itself off automati-cally.

X Switch off consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps,interior lighting, etc.The seat heating* will automatically switch back on as soon asthere is sufficient voltage again.

Practical advice

* optional



Troubleshooting

231


The AIRSCARF neck-level heat-ing* function has switched itselfoff prematurely or cannot beswitched on.

There is insufficient voltagebecause toomany consumers areswitched on.

X Switch off consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps,interior lighting, etc.

X Switch on the AIRSCARF neck-level heating* function again.

The indicator lamp in the9button on the automatic air con-ditioning control panel flasheswhen you press the button. Thecooling system cannot beswitched on.

Cooling has been deactivateddue to a malfunction.


The indicator lamp in the¯rear-window heating button isflashing. The rear-window heat-ing has switched itself off prema-turely or cannot be switched on.

There is insufficient voltagebecause toomany consumers areswitched on.

X Switch off consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps,interior lighting, etc.The rear-window heating will automatically switch back on as soonas there is sufficient voltage again.

The roof is open. X Close the roof.It is now possible to switch on the rear window heating.

The5 PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF warning lamp on the centreconsole is lit.

A special Mercedes-Benz childseat with automatic child seatrecognition has been fitted to thefront-passenger seat. The front-passenger airbag has thereforebeen disabled.

Practical advice

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 231

Z


Troubleshooting

232


The5 PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF warning lamp on the centreconsole is lit.

G Risk of injuryThere is no child seat fitted to thefront-passenger seat. The auto-matic child seat recognition ismalfunctioning.

X Remove electronic equipment from the front-passenger seat, e.g.:RNotebooksRMobile phonesRCards with transponders, e.g. ski passes or access passes

If the5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp is still lit:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The loading aid switch is flashing.You will also hear a warning tone.

You have closed the boot lidbefore the roof has been loweredcompletely.

X Lower the roof completely (Y page 154).

Practical advice



Troubleshooting

233

Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster


- The yellow ABS warninglamp comes on while theengine is running.

G Risk of accidentABS has been deactivated due toa malfunction. ESP®, BAS and hillstart assist* (SL 63AMGonly) aretherefore also deactivated.The SBCTM brake system contin-ues to function normally, butwithout electronic support. Thewheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard.

X Drive on carefully.X Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display(Y page 202).

X Switch off consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps,interior lighting, etc.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.

E The red distance warninglamp* lights up while thevehicle is in motion.

G Risk of accidentThe distance to the vehicle infront is too short for the speedselected.

X Increase the distance.

E The red distance warninglamp* lights up while thevehicle is in motion. Youwill also hear a warningtone.

G Risk of accidentYou are approaching a vehicle infront at too great a speed or Dis-tronic* has detected a stationaryobstacle in your line of travel.

X Be prepared to brake immediately.X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brakeor take evasive action.

Practical advice

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 233

Z


Troubleshooting

234


v The yellow ABS/ESP®warning lamp flasheswhile you are driving.

G Risk of accidentESP®, ABS or traction control hasintervened because at least onewheel has reached its grip limitand is threatening to spin or lock.Cruise control or Distronic* isdeactivated.

X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pull-ing away.

X Release the accelerator pedal while you are driving.X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.X Do not deactivate ESP®.Exceptions: .(Y page 54).

v All models except SL 63AMG:The yellow ABS/ESP®warning lamp is lit whilethe engine is running.

G Risk of accidentESP® is deactivated. ESP® willnot stabilise the vehicle if it startsto skid or if a wheel starts to spin.

X Reactivate ESP®.Exceptions: .(Y page 55).

X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

v SL 63 AMG:The yellow ABS/ESP®warning lamp is lit whilethe engine is running.

G Risk of accidentESP® Sport is activated. ESP®Sport will only stabilise the vehi-cle to a limited degree if it startsto skid or if a wheel starts to spin.

X Reactivate ESP®.

v¯

SL 63 AMG:The yellow ABS/ESP® andESP® OFF warning lampsare lit while the engine isrunning.

G Risk of accidentESP® is deactivated. ESP® willnot stabilise the vehicle if it startsto skid or if a wheel starts to spin.

X Reactivate ESP®.Exceptions: (Y page 56).

X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

Practical advice

* optional



Troubleshooting

235


v The yellow ESP® warninglamp is lit while the engineis running. In addition, amessage appears in themulti-function display.

G Risk of accidentESP® is unavailable due to a mal-function. ESP® will not stabilisethe vehicle if it starts to skid or ifa wheel starts to spin.

X Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display(Y page 202).

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

1 The red SRS warning lampis lit while the engine isrunning.

G Risk of injuryThe restraint systems are mal-functioning. The airbags or belttensioners may either be trig-gered unintentionally or, in theevent of an accident, not at all.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

3 The red brake systemwarning lamp comes onwhile you are driving. Youwill also hear a warningtone.

You are driving with the parkingbrake applied.

X Release the parking brake.The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases.

3 The red brake systemwarning lamp comes onwhile the engine is run-ning. You will also hear awarning tone.

G Risk of accidentThere is insufficient brake fluid inthe fluid reservoir.There is a malfunction in theSBCTM brake system.

X Do not continue driving under any circumstances.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.X Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display(Y page 202).

X Under no circumstances should you top up the brake fluid. This willnot rectify the fault.

Practical advice


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 235

Z


Troubleshooting

236


D The red coolant warninglamp comes on while theengine is running.

The coolant level is too low.The coolant is too hot and theengine is no longer being cooledsufficiently.

X Stop the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic conditions as you do so.X Allow the engine and coolant to cool.X Check the coolant level (Y page 180). Observe the warning notes.Top up the coolant if necessary.

X Have the coolant system checked at a qualified specialist work-shop if the coolant needs topping up more often than usual.

D The red coolant warninglamp comes on while theengine is running.

If the coolant level is correct, theairflow to the radiator may beblocked or the radiator fan maybe malfunctioning.The coolant is too hot and theengine is no longer being cooledsufficiently.

X Make sure that the airflow to the radiator is not blocked, e.g. bysnow, slush or ice.

X If the coolant temperature is less than 120†, you can continuedriving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid heavy loads on the engine (e.g. driving in mountainous ter-rain) and stop-and-go driving.

D The red coolant warninglamp comes on while theengine is running. You willalso hear a warning tone.

The coolant level is too low.The coolant temperature hasexceeded 120 †. The engine isnot being cooled sufficiently andmay be damaged.

X Stop the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic conditions as you do so.X Allow the engine and coolant to cool.X Check the coolant level (Y page 180). Observe the warning notes.Top up the coolant if necessary.

X Have the coolant system checked at a qualified specialist work-shop if the coolant needs topping up more often than usual.

Practical advice



Troubleshooting

237


D The red coolant warninglamp comes on while theengine is running. You willalso hear a warning tone.

If the coolant level is correct andthe airflow to the radiator is notblocked, the radiator fan may bemalfunctioning.The coolant temperature hasexceeded 120 †. The engine isnot being cooled sufficiently andmay be damaged.

X Do not continue driving under any circumstances.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

± The yellow engine diagnos-tics warning lamp comeson while the engine is run-ning.

There may be a malfunction:Rin the fuel injection systemRin the exhaust systemRin the ignition systemThe emission limit values may beexceeded and the engine may berunning in emergency mode.

X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

\ The yellow roll-over barwarning lamp is lit.

G Risk of injuryThe roll-over bar is not ready foroperation.

X Raise the roll-over bar (Y page 46).X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Practical advice


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 237

Z


Troubleshooting

238


H The yellow tyre pressuremonitor* warning lamp ison.

G Risk of accidentThe tyre pressure monitor* hasdetected a sudden or significantpressure loss in at least one ofthe tyres.

X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmanoeuvres. Pay attention to traffic conditions as you do so.

X Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display(Y page 202).The warning light will go out after the flat tyre has been changedand you have been driving for a few minutes.

< The red seat belt warninglamp lights up for 6 sec-onds after the enginestarts up22.

The seat belt warning lampreminds the driver and frontpassenger to fasten their seatbelts.

X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 83).

< After the engine starts youwill hear awarning tone forup to 6 seconds22.

G Risk of injuryThe driver's seat belt is not fas-tened.

X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 83).The warning tone ceases.

< The red seat belt warninglamp lights up after start-ing the engine, as soon asthe driver's door or thefront-passenger door isclosed.

G Risk of injuryThe driver or front passenger hasnot fastened their seat belt.

X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 83).The warning lamp goes out.

G Risk of injuryThere are objects on the front-passenger seat.

X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow themsafely.The warning lamp goes out.


Practical advice

* optional



Troubleshooting

239


< The red seat belt warninglamp flashes and you hearan intermittent warningtone.

G Risk of injuryThe driver or front passenger hasnot fastened their seat belt andyou are driving faster than25 km/h or have briefly drivenfaster than 25 km/h.

X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 83).The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning toneceases.

G Risk of injuryThere are objects on the front-passenger seat and you are driv-ing faster than 25 km/h or havebriefly driven faster than25 km/h.

X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow themsafely.The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning toneceases.

4 The yellow reserve fuelwarning lamp comes onwhile the engine is run-ning.

The fuel level has fallen below thereserve range.


Practical advice


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 239

Z


Troubleshooting

240

Warning tones


The anti-theft warning alarm istriggered.

You have opened the vehicleusing the emergency key elementwithout deactivating the anti-theft alarm system first.

X Switch off the alarm (Y page 60).

You hear a warning tone. A message appears in the multi-function display.

X See the explanations for the display message (Y page 202).

You hear a warning tone. You are driving with the parkingbrake applied.

X Release the parking brake.

You hear a warning tone. You did not switch off the lightswhen leaving the vehicle.

X Turn the light switch toM orU.

orX If the rear foglamp is switched on: press the light switch in to thestop.

You hear a warning tone. G Risk of injuryThe driver or front passenger hasnot fastened their seat belt.

X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 83).

You hear a continuous tone. You have switched off the engineand opened the bonnet or thedriver's door with SBC Hold acti-vated.

X Deactivate SBC Hold (Y page 137).

Practical advice



Troubleshooting

241

Accident


Fuel is leaking from the vehicle. G Risk of fireThe fuel line or the fuel tank hasbeen damaged. The leaking fuelcreates a risk of fire or explosion.

X Switch off the ignition immediately.X Remove the ignition key.Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. The leaking fuelcreates a risk of fire or explosion.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

You are unable to determine theextent of the damage.


You cannot detect any damage. X Start the engine as normal.

Practical advice


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 241

Z


Troubleshooting

242

Braking system


The brake pedal resistance islower than usual and the pedaltravel longer.

G Risk of accidentRThe SBC® brake system is acti-vated via the brake pedal.RYou have just started theengine.

X Depress the brake pedal again.The pedal resistance and travel return to normal.

The brake pedal resistance islower than usual and the pedaltravel longer.

G Risk of accidentThe SBC® brake system is run-ning in emergency mode.

X Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display(Y page 202).

The brake pedal pulsates. G Risk of accidentThe SBC® brake system pumpruns while the brake pedal isdepressed.

Observe the SBC® messages (Y page 57).

Practical advice



Troubleshooting

243

Fuel and fuel tank


Fuel is leaking from the vehicle. G Risk of explosion or fireThe fuel line or the fuel tank isdefective.

X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock immediately andremove it.

X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flap cannot beopened.

The fuel filler flap is not released. X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 255).

The opening mechanism is jam-med.


Practical advice


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 243

Z


Troubleshooting

244

Engine


The engine will not start. SBC® HOLD is activated. X Deactivating SBC® HOLD (Y page 137).X Start the engine again.

The engine will not start. You canhear the starter motor operating.

RThere is a malfunction in theengine electronics.RThere is a malfunction in thefuel supply.

X Turn the key back to position 0 in the ignition lock before the nextstarting attempt.

X Try to start the engine again (Y page 95).When doing so, rememberthat excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine willdrain the battery.

If the engine does not start after several attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine will not start. You can-not hear the starter motor oper-ating.

The on-board voltage is too lowbecause the starter battery is tooweak or discharged.

X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 279).If the engine does not start despite attempting to jump-start it:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The starter motor was exposed toa thermal load that was too high.

X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately twominutes.

X Try to start the engine again.If the engine still does not start:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Practical advice



Troubleshooting

245


The engine is not runningsmoothly and is misfiring.

There is a malfunction in theengine electronics or a mechani-cal component of the engine con-trol unit.

X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.Otherwise, non-combusted fuelmay get into the catalytic converterand damage it.

A coolant temperature of over120 °C is displayed. The coolantwarning lamp may also be on anda warning tone may sound(Y page 106).

The coolant level is too low. Thecoolant is too hot and the engineis no longer being cooled suffi-ciently.

X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant tocool down.

X Check the coolant level (Y page 180). Observe the warning notesas you do so and top up the coolant if necessary.

If the coolant level is correct, theradiator fan may be faulty. Thecoolant is too hot and the engineis no longer being cooled suffi-ciently.

X If the coolant temperature is less than 120 °C, you can continuedriving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. when driving onmountain roads and stop/start driving.

Practical advice


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 245

Z


Troubleshooting

246



The transmission has problemsshifting gear

The transmission is losing oil. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.

The acceleration ability is deteri-orating.The transmission no longerchanges gear.

The transmission is in emergencymode.It is only possible to shift into2nd gear and reverse gear.

X Stop the vehicle.X Move the selector lever to P.X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock.X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine.X Move the selector lever to position D or R.If D is selected, the transmission shifts into 2nd gear; if R is selec-ted, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.

X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.

Practical advice



Troubleshooting

247

Parktronic*


Only the red segments in theParktronic warning display are lit.You also hear a warning tone forapproximately two seconds.Parktronic is deactivated afterapproximately 20 seconds andthe indicator lamp in the Park-tronic button lights up.

Parktronic has malfunctionedand has switched itself off.

X If problems persist, have Parktronic checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Only the red segments in theParktronic warning display are lit.Parktronic is deactivated afterapproximately 20 seconds.

The Parktronic sensors are dirtyor there is interference.

X Clean the Parktronic sensors (Y page 198).X Switch the ignition back on.

Only the red segments in theParktronic warning display are lit.Parktronic is deactivated afterapproximately 20 seconds.

The problemmay be caused by anexternal source of radio or ultra-sound waves.

X See if Parktronic functions in a different location.

Practical advice

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 247

Z


Troubleshooting

248

Headlamps and turn signals


The headlamps or the turn signalsin the exterior mirrors are mistedup on the inside.

Air humidity is very high. X Drive with the headlamps switched on.The headlamps are demisted after a short distance.

The headlamp housing is notsealed and moisture has beenable to enter.

X Have the headlamps checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Windscreen wipers


The windscreen wipers are jam-med.

Leaves or snow, for example,maybe obstructing the windscreenwiper movement. The wipermotor has been deactivated.

X For safety reasons, you should remove the key from the ignitionlock.

X Remove the cause of the obstruction.X Switch the windscreen wipers back on.

The windscreen wipers fail com-pletely.

The windscreen wiper drive ismalfunctioning.

X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.X Have the windscreen wipers checked at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Practical advice



Troubleshooting

249

Roof


The roof will not open or close. The boot separator is not in place. X Close the boot separator.

The boot lid is open. X Close the boot lid.

The on-board voltage is too low. X Let the engine run.

The roof was opened and closedseveral times in succession. Theroof drive was automaticallydeactivated.

You can open or close the roof again after about ten minutes.X Switch the ignition off and then on again.X Repeat the opening or closing procedure.

The automatic roof mechanism isfaulty.


Practical advice


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 249

Z


Troubleshooting

250

Windows


A side window will not close. An object is blocking the sidewin-dow and preventing it from clos-ing.

X Remove the object(s).X Close the side window.

You cannot see the cause. X Close the side window with increased force or without the anti-entrapment feature (Y page 94).

Mirrors


An exterior mirror has beenpushed out of position.

Vehicles with exterior mirrors that cannot be folded in/out electri-cally:X Push the mirror into the correct position manually.

Vehicles with electrically folding exterior mirrors*:X Press the mirror-folding button* (Y page 80) repeatedly until youhear a distinct click.The mirror housing is engaged again and you can adjust the mirroras usual (Y page 80).

Practical advice

* optional



Troubleshooting

251

Key


You cannot lock or unlock thevehicle using the key.

The key batteries are dischargedor nearly discharged.

X To do this, point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle fromclose range and try to unlock or lock the vehicle again.

If this does not work:X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element(Y page 255).

X Check the key batteries (Y page 259) and replace them if neces-sary (Y page 259).

The key is faulty. X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element(Y page 255).

X Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

The battery charge indicator lampof the key does not go on duringthe test.

The key batteries are discharged. X Change the batteries (Y page 259).

You have lost a key. X Have the key cancelled at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the manual locks changed too.

You have lost the emergency keyelement.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the manual locks changed too.

Practical advice


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 251

Z


Troubleshooting

252


The key cannot be turned in theignition lock.

The key has been in position 0 fora considerable time.

X Remove the key and reinsert it into the ignition lock.X Check the starter battery and recharge it if necessary(Y page 276).

X Start the engine.

The on-board voltage is too low. X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating* or interiorlighting, and try to turn the key again.

If this does not work:X Check the starter battery and recharge it if necessary(Y page 276).

orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 279).orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Practical advice

* optional



Troubleshooting

253

KEYLESS GO*


You cannot lock or unlock thevehicle using the KEYLESS GOkey.

The KEYLESS GO key batteriesare discharged or nearly dis-charged.

X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of thekey. To do this, point the tip of the key at the driver's door handlefrom close range and try to unlock or lock the vehicle again.

If this does not work:X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element(Y page 255).

X Check the KEYLESS GO key batteries (Y page 259) and replacethem if necessary (Y page 259).

There is a fault with KEYLESS GO. X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of thekey. To do this, point the tip of the key at the driver's door handlefrom close range and try to open the vehicle again.

X Have the KEYLESS GO key checked at a qualified specialist work-shop.

There is interference from a pow-erful source of radio waves.

X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element(Y page 255).

The battery check lamp in theKEYLESS GO key does not lightup when tested.

The KEYLESS GO key batteriesare discharged.

X Change the batteries (Y page 259).

Practical advice

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 253

Z


Troubleshooting

254


The vehicle cannot be startedusing the KEYLESS GO key andthe KEYLESSGObutton. The KEY-LESS GO key is in the vehicle.

A door is open. The key thereforecannot be detected so easily.

X Close the door and try to start the vehicle again.

You did not depress the brakewhen starting the engine.

X Depress the brake and press the KEYLESS GO button.

There is interference from a pow-erful source of radio waves.

X Start your vehicle using the KEYLESS GO key in the ignition lock.

You have lost the KEYLESS GOkey.

X Have the KEYLESS GO key cancelled at a Mercedes-Benz ServiceCentre.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the manual locks changed too.

Parking up the vehicle


The vehicle is to be left parked upfor longer than six weeks.

Damage resulting from non-usemay occur if the vehicle is parkedup for long periods.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice.X Disconnect the battery (Y page 277).

Practical advice



Locking/unlocking in an emergency

255


Emergency keyIf the vehicle can no longer be unlocked orlocked with the key or the KEYLESS GOkey*, use the emergency key element.If you use the emergency key element tounlock and open the driver's door or the bootlid, the anti-theft alarm system* will be trig-gered (Y page 59).There are several ways to turn off the alarm:X Press thek orj button on the key.orX Insert the key into the ignition lock.orX Press the KEYLESS GO button* on theselector lever. The KEYLESS GO key* mustbe in the vehicle.

orX Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESSGO*. The KEYLESS GO key* must be out-side the vehicle.

Releasing and removing the emergencykey element

1 Release catch2 Emergency key element

X Push release catch1 in the direction ofthe arrow and at the same time removeemergency key element2 from the key.

Unlocking the vehicleIf the vehicle can no longer be unlocked cen-trally with the key or the KEYLESS GO key*:X Remove the emergency key element fromthe key (Y page 255).

$ To unlock

X Insert the emergency key element into thelock of the driver's door as far as it will go.

X Turn the emergency key element anti-clockwise to position$.The door is unlocked.

i On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn theemergency key element clockwise.

X Turn the emergency key element back andremove it.

Practical advice

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 255

Z



256

Locking the vehicleIf the vehicle can no longer be locked cen-trally with the key or the KEYLESS GO key*:X Open the driver's door.X Close the front-passenger door and theboot lid.

X Press the locking button (Y page 68).X Check whether the locking knob on thefront-passenger door is still visible. Pressdown the locking knob manually if neces-sary.

X Close the driver's door.X Remove the emergency key element fromthe key (Y page 255).

$ To lock

X Insert the emergency key element into thelock of the driver's door as far as it will go.

X Turn the emergency key element clockwiseas far as it will go to position$.

i On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn theemergency key element anti-clockwise.


X Check whether the doors and the boot lidare locked.

Opening/closing the boot

To unlock the boot! The boot lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there isenough space above the boot lid.

If the boot can no longer be unlocked with thekey or the KEYLESS GO key*:X Remove the emergency key element fromthe key (Y page 255).

To unlock the boot1 Boot lock2 Handle

X Insert the emergency key element fully intoboot lock1.

X Turn the emergency key element anti-clockwise as far as it will go and pull bootlid handle2.The boot is unlocked.


Practical advice

* optional




257

Opening the boot manually (remoteboot lid closing feature*)

To open the boot lid1 Handle

X Lift the boot lid by handle1.

Closing the boot manually (remote bootlid closing feature*)

G Risk of injuryMake sure that nobody can become trap-ped as you close the boot lid.


To close the boot lid1 Recess

X Pull the boot lid down using recess1.X If necessary, close the boot lid from theoutside by pushing down the edge.

i With the roof open, the boot lid can onlybe closed if the roof has been lowered(Y page 164).

Unlocking the stowage compart-mentsIf the interior stowage compartments can nolonger be unlockedwith the key, the KEYLESSGO key* or the central locking button, use theemergency key element.The interior stowage compartments include:Rthe glove compartmentRthe stowage compartment under the arm-restRthe stowage compartments in the rear

i Only the glove compartment can beunlocked with the emergency key element.

$ To unlock the glove compartment sepa-rately:

Practical advice

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 257

Z


Changing the batteries

258

X Remove the emergency key element fromthe key (Y page 255).

X Insert the emergency key element into thelock of the glove compartment and turn itto position$.You can open the glove compartment.

Lowering the loading aid manuallyIf it is no longer possible to lower the stowedroof in the boot using the loading aid, and youtherefore cannot close the boot, proceed asfollows:

1 Allen key2 Locking screw

X Remove the inner floor from the boot.X Lift the cover in the boot floor on the left.X Ask another person to lift and hold thestowed roof.

X Use Allen key1 from the vehicle tool kitto carefully turn locking screw2 anti-clockwise by a quarter of a turn.

X Close the boot separator (Y page 156).X Let go of the roof.The roof is lowered slowly.

X Fasten locking screw2 clockwise by aquarter of a turn once the roof has beenlowered completely.

! Do not fasten the screw too tightly.

X Put the cover back on the boot floor.X Place the inner floor back in the boot.X Visit a specialist workshop, e.g. aMercedes-Benz Service Centre, as soon aspossible.

Changing the batteries

NotesIt is advisable to have the batteries replacedat a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at aMercedes-Benz Service Centre.G Risk of poisoningBatteries contain toxic and caustic sub-stances. For this reason, keep batteriesaway from children.If a battery is swallowed, consult a doctorimmediately.

H Environmental noteDo not dispose of batteries with the house-hold rubbish. They contain highly toxic sub-stances.Take discharged batteries to a qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-BenzService Centre, or to a special collectionpoint for old batteries.

Practical advice



Changing the bulbs

259

Key or KEYLESS GO key*

Checking the batteriesX Press thej ork button.The batteries are in order if the batterycharge indicator lamp lights up briefly.

Changing the batteriesYou require two CR 2025 3 V cell batteries.X Remove the emergency key element fromthe key (Y page 255).

1 Emergency key element2 Battery tray

X Insert emergency key element1 into theopening in the key and push in the directionof the arrow.Battery tray2 is released.

X Pull battery tray2 out of the key.

1 Batteries

X Remove old batteries1 from the batterytray.

X Insert the new batteries beneath the con-tact spring with the positive terminal facingupwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so.

X Push the battery tray back into the keyhousing until the battery tray engages.

X Check the function of all key buttons on thevehicle.

Changing the bulbs

Notes on changing bulbsBulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat all bulbs function correctly at all times.G Risk of injuryBulbs and lamps can be very hot. Youshould therefore allow them to cool downbefore you change them. Otherwise, youcould be burned if you touch them.Keep bulbs out of the reach of children.Otherwise, they could damage them, forexample, and injure themselves.Never use a bulb which has been dropped.Such a bulb may explode and injure you.H7bulbs are pressurised and could explodewhen you change them, particularly if theyare very hot. You should therefore wear eyeprotection and gloves when you are chang-ing them.

G Risk of injuryXenon bulbs are under high voltage. Youcould get an electric shock and be seriouslyor even fatally injured if you touch the elec-tric contacts on xenon bulbs. Do not, there-fore, remove the cover on xenon bulbs.

Practical advice

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 259

Z


Changing the bulbs

260

Do not change xenon bulbs yourself, buthave them replaced at a qualified specialistworkshop which has the necessary special-ist knowledge and tools to carry out thework required.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you usea Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for thispurpose. In particular, work relevant tosafety or on safety-related systemsmust becarried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.

! Do not change the LEDs yourself. Youcould otherwise damage the LEDs or partsof the vehicle.

Overview Front bulbs

Bulb Type

1 Additional turnsignal lamp

LEDs23

2 Turn signal PY 24 W23

3 Dipped-beamheadlamps

D1S 35 W24

4 Main-beamheadlamp

H7 55 W

Side lamp/park-ing lamp

W 5 W (BlueVision)

Corneringlight*25

H7 55 W

5 Front foglamp H11 55 W23

23 These bulbs must be replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.24 Vehicles with bi-xenon headlamps: always have these bulbs changed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.25 Vehicles with Intelligent Light System*.

Practical advice

* optional



Changing the bulbs

261

Rear bulbs

Bulb Type

6 Rear foglamp P 21 W

7 Third brake lamp LED23

8 Reversing lamp P 21 W

9 Brake/tail lamp LED23

a Licence platelamp

C 5 W

b Turn signal PY 21 W

Before changing bulbsYou can replace the following bulbs:RMain-beam headlampRSide lamp and parking lampRReplacing the bulb in the cornering light*(vehicles with Intelligent Light System*)RReversing lampRRear foglamp

RTurn signal (rear)RLicence plate lampObserve the following points:RUse only the bulb types specified here.RTo prevent a short-circuit, switch off thelights before changing a bulb.ROnly hold bulbs with a clean, lint-free cloth.RDo not work with wet or greasy fingers.RIf the new bulb still does not light up, con-sult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. aMercedes-Benz Service Centre.

i Have the headlamp setting checked reg-ularly at a qualified specialist workshop,e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Changing the front bulbs

Headlamps1 Housing cover for main-beam headlamp/

side lamp/parking lamp/corneringlight*26

23 These bulbs must be replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.26 Vehicles with Intelligent Light System*.

Practical advice

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 261

Z


Changing the bulbs

262

Headlamps2 Bulb holder for side/parking lamp3 Bulb holder for main-beam headlamp4 Cable outlet for main-beam headlamp5 Bulb holder for cornering light*26

Replacing the bulbs in the main-beamheadlampX Switch off the lights.X Open the bonnet.X Turn housing cover1 anti-clockwise andremove it.

X Pull out bulb holder2.X Turn bulb holder3 anti-clockwise until itis released.

X Remove bulb holder3.X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder3.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder3.X Insert bulb holder3 into the guide in theheadlamp.

X Turn bulb holder3 clockwise until itengages.Left headlamp: cable duct4 of bulbholder3must be pointing down and to theright.Right headlamp: cable duct4 of bulbholder3must be pointing down and to theleft.

X Pull out bulb holder2.X Align housing cover1 and turn it clock-wise.

Changing the bulbs in the side lampsand parking lampsX Switch off the lights.X Open the bonnet.X Turn housing cover1 anti-clockwise andremove it.

X Pull out bulb holder2.

X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder2.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder2.X Insert bulb holder2.X Align housing cover1 and turn it clock-wise.

Replacing the bulb in the corneringlight* (vehicles with Intelligent LightSystem*)X Switch off the lights.X Open the bonnet.X Turn housing cover1 anti-clockwise andremove it.

X Turn bulb holder5 anti-clockwise until itis released.

X Remove bulb holder5.X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder5.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder5.X Insert bulb holder5 into the guide in theheadlamp.

26 Vehicles with Intelligent Light System*.

Practical advice

* optional



Changing the bulbs

263

X Turn bulb holder5 clockwise until itengages.The handle of bulb holder5 must be hor-izontal.

X Align housing cover1 and turn it clock-wise.

Changing the rear bulbs

Opening and closing the side trim pan-elsYou must open the corresponding side trimpanel in the boot to change the bulbs.

Left-hand side trim panel

Left-hand side trim panel1 Release catch

2 Side trim panel

X To open: turn catch1 90° in the directionof the arrow and remove side trim panel2.

X To close: insert side trim panel2 and turncatch1 90° in the opposite direction tothe arrow.

Right-hand side trim panel

Right-hand side trim panel1 Securing lug2 Side trim panel

X To open: press securing lug1 to the sideand remove side panel2.

X To close: insert side panel2.Securing lug1 engages.

Changing the tail lampsX Switch off the lights.X Open the boot.X Open the side trim panel (Y page 263).

Tail lamps1 Reversing lamp2 Driver's side: rear foglamp

Front-passenger side: spare bulb3 Turn signal

Practical advice


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 263

Z


Replacing the wiper blades

264

X Turn the corresponding bulb holder anti-clockwise and remove it.

X Pull the corresponding bulb out of the bulbholder.

X Insert the appropriate new bulb into thebulb holder.

X Insert the corresponding bulb holder andturn it clockwise.

X Close the side trim panel (Y page 263).

Changing the bulbs in the licence platelamps

Licence plate lamp1 Screws

X Switch off the lights.X Open the boot lid.

X Remove screws1.X Remove the licence plate lamp.X Replace the bulb.X Insert the licence plate lamp.X Replace and tighten screws1.


G Risk of accidentThe windscreen will not longer be properlywiped if the wiper blades are worn. Thiscould prevent you fromobserving the trafficconditions, thereby causing an accident.Replace the wiper blades twice a year, ide-ally in spring and autumn.

G Risk of accidentThe wiper arms could start moving andcause an injury if you leave the windscreenwipers switched on.Remove the key from the ignition lockbefore replacing the wiper blades.

! Make sure that you touch only the wiperarm of the windscreen wiper to avoid dam-aging the windscreen wiper blades.

Practical advice




265

Removing

Moving the wiper blades to a verticalposition

Vehicles without KEYLESS GO*X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or2 in the ignition lock.

X Set the windscreen wipers to position II(Y page 93) on the combination switch.

X When the wiper arms have reached a ver-tical position, turn the key to position 0 andremove it from the ignition lock.

X Fold the wiper arm away from the wind-screen until it engages.

X Set the wiper blade at right angles to thewiper arm.

Vehicles with KEYLESS GO*X Switch off the engine.X Take your foot off the brake pedal.X Set the windscreen wipers to position II(Y page 93) on the combination switch.

X Press the KEYLESS GO button repeatedlyuntil the windscreen wipers start.

X When the wiper arms have reached a ver-tical position, press the KEYLESS GO but-ton again.

X Fold the wiper arm away from the wind-screen until it engages.

X Set the wiper blade at right angles to thewiper arm.

Removing the wiper blades

X Remove the wiper blade from the retaineron the wiper arm in the direction of thearrow.

FittingX Slide the new wiper blade into the retaineron the wiper arm in the opposite directionto the arrow.

X Turn the wiper blade parallel to the wiperarm.

X Fold the wiper arm back onto the wind-screen.

Practical advice

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 265

Z


Flat tyre

266

Flat tyre

Flat tyreYour vehicle may be equipped with:Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 201)Ra spare wheel* (Y page 201)Rthe MOExtended run-flat sys-tem* (Y page 275)

Preparing the vehiclei Vehicle preparation is not necessary onvehicles with MOE tyres*.

X Stop your vehicle as far away from trafficas possible on solid, non-slippery, levelground.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.X Firmly depress the parking brake.X Move the selector lever to P.

X All occupants must get out of the vehicle.Make sure that they are not endangered asthey do so.

X Make sure that no one is near the dangerarea whilst a wheel is being changed. Any-one who is not directly assisting in the

wheel change should, for example, standbehind the barrier.

X Switch off the engine.X Remove the key from the ignition lock.

X Get out of the vehicle.X Close the driver's door.X Place the warning triangle (Y page 200) ata suitable distance. Observe legal require-ments.

Using the TIREFIT kitYou can use the TIREFIT kit to seal smallpunctures, particularly those in the tyre tread.You can use TIREFIT in outdoor temperaturesdown to -20 °C.G Risk of accidentIn the following situations, your safety is atparticular risk and tyre sealant is unable toprovide breakdown assistance:Rif there are cuts or punctures in the tyregreater than 4 mmRif the wheel rim is damagedRif you have driven at very low tyre pres-sures or on a flat tyre

Do not drive any further. Consult a qualifiedspecialist workshop which has the neces-sary specialist knowledge and tools to carryout the work required.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you usea Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for thispurpose. In particular, work relevant tosafety or on safety-related systemsmust becarried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.

X Do not remove any foreign objects whichhave penetrated the tyre, e.g. screws ornails.

X Remove TIREFIT, the accompanying "max.80 km/h" sticker and the electric air pumpfrom the stowage well underneath the bootfloor (Y page 200).

Practical advice

* optional



Flat tyre

267

1 Driver's field of vision sticker2 Wheel sticker

X Affix part1 of the sticker within the driv-er's field of vision.

X Affix part2 of the sticker near the valveon the wheel with the defective tyre.

G Risk of injuryTIREFIT must not come into contact withyour skin, eyes or clothing.

RIf TIREFIT comes into contact with youreyes or skin, immediately rinse thor-oughly with clean water.RChange out of clothing which has comeinto contact with TIREFIT immediately.RIf an allergic reaction occurs, consult adoctor immediately.

Keep TIREFIT away from children.RIf TIREFIT is swallowed, immediatelyrinse your mouth out thoroughly withwater and drink plenty of water.RDo not induce vomiting. Consult a doctorimmediately.RDo not inhale TIREFIT fumes.

i If TIREFIT leaks out, allow it to dry. It canthen be removed like a layer of film.If you get TIREFIT on your clothing, have itcleaned as soon as possiblewith perchloro-ethylene.

G Risk of injuryComply with the manufacturer's safetyinstructions shown on the sticker on theelectric air pump.

i Your vehicle may be equipped with one oftwo different air pumps. Version 1 can beidentified by the flap, behind which thehose with the pressure gauge and cable arelocated; version 2 has a pressure gaugeintegrated in the electric air pump.

1 TIREFIT sealant filler bottle2 Flap3 Recess4 On/off switch5 Electric connector with cable6 Air pump hose7 Flange

X Open flap2 on the electric air pump.X Pull connector5 and air pump hose6from the housing.

Practical advice


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 267

Z


Flat tyre

268

X Screw air pump hose6 onto flange7 ofTIREFIT filler bottle1.

X Place TIREFIT sealant filler bottle1 headdownwards into recess3 of the electricair pump.

8 Filler hose9 Valve

X Remove the cap from valve9 on the faultytyre.

a Pressure release screwb Pressure gauge

X Make sure pressure release screwa onpressure gaugeb is fully closed.

X Screw filler hose8 onto valve9.

X Insert plug5 into the socket of the ciga-rette lighter* (Y page 166) or into a 12Vpower socket in your vehicle(Y page 166).

X Turn the key to position 2 (Y page 73) inthe ignition lock.

X Press on/off switch4 on the electric airpump to I.The electric air pump is switched on. Thetyre is inflated.

i First, TIREFIT is pumped into the tyre. Thepressure can briefly rise to around 5 bar.Do not switch off the electric pump dur-ing this phase.

X Let the electric pump run for five minutes.The tyre should then have a pressure of atleast 1.8 bar.

! Do not operate the electric air pump forlonger than six minutes without a break.Otherwise, it may overheat.The air pump can be operated again onceit has cooled down.

If a pressure of 1.8 bar is not reached afterfive minutes:X Switch off and disconnect the electric airpump and drive the vehicle forwards orbackwards approximately 10 m.This distributes the TIREFIT more evenly.

X Remove TIREFIT sealant filler bottle1from the electric pump.

X Pump up the tyre again.

Practical advice

* optional



Flat tyre

269

G Risk of accidentIf a pressure of 1.8 bar is not achieved afterfiveminutes, the tyre is too badly damaged.Do not drive any further. Consult a qualifiedspecialist workshop which has the neces-sary specialist knowledge and tools to carryout the work required. Mercedes-Benz rec-ommends that you use a Mercedes-BenzService Centre for this purpose. In particu-lar, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

If a tyre pressure of 1.8 bar is reached:X Press on/off switch4 on the electric airpump to 0.The electric air pump is switched off.

X Disconnect the electric air pump and stowit away.

X Fold up the warning triangle and stow itaway.

X Pull away immediately.This distributes the TIREFIT more evenlyaround the tyre.

X Stop after driving for approximately tenminutes and check the tyre pressure withthe electric air pump.

G Risk of accidentIf the tyre pressure is now lower than1.3 bar, the tyre is too badly damaged. Donot drive any further. Consult a qualifiedspecialist workshop which has the neces-sary specialist knowledge and tools to carryout the work required. Mercedes-Benz rec-ommends that you use a Mercedes-BenzService Centre for this purpose. In particu-lar, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

X If the tyre pressure is still at least 1.3 bar,correct it (see fuel filler flap for values).To increase the tyre pressure: switch onthe electric air pump.To reduce the tyre pressure: open pres-sure release screwa on pressuregaugeb.

X Drive to the nearest workshop and have thetyre changed there.

X Have the TIREFIT kit replaced as soon aspossible at a qualified specialist workshop,e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

G Risk of accidentDo not exceed the maximum speed of80 km/h.The "max. 80 km/h" stickermust be affixedwithin the driver's field of vision.The vehicle's handling characteristics maybe affected.

H Environmental noteHave the used TIREFIT kit disposed of pro-fessionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-BenzService Centre.

X Have the TIREFIT kit replaced every fouryears at a qualified specialist workshop,e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Practical advice


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 269

Z


Flat tyre

270

Changingawheel and fitting the sparewheel*

G Risk of accidentThe wheel dimensions and tyre size of theemergency spare wheel* may differ fromthose of the standard wheels.Your vehicle's handling characteristics willchange when driving with a collapsibleemergency spare wheel*. Adapt your styleof driving accordingly.The collapsible emergency spare wheel*may only be used for a short time. Do notexceed the maximum speed of 80 km/hand do not deactivate ESP®.Never drive the vehicle with more than onecollapsible emergency spare wheel* fitted.

G Risk of accidentHave the collapsible emergency sparewheel* replaced as soon as possible at aqualified specialist workshopwhich has thenecessary specialist knowledge and toolsto carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use aMercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur-pose. In particular, work relevant to safety

or on safety-related systems must be car-ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Preparing the vehicleX Prepare the vehicle as described(Y page 266).

X Place thewheels in the straight-ahead posi-tion.

X Take the following from the stowage wellbeneath the boot floor:Rthe collapsible emergency spare wheel*Rthe vehicle tool kitRthe wheel chockRthe jackRthe air pump.

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway.On level ground: place chocks or similaritems under the front and rear of the wheelthat is diagonally opposite the wheel youwish to change.

X On downhill gradients: place chocks orsimilar items under both wheels of theother axle.

1 Wheel wrench

X Usingwheel wrench1, loosen the bolts onthe wheel you wish to change by about onefull turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com-pletely.

Raising the vehicle

G Risk of injuryThe jack is designed only to raise the vehi-cle for a short time while a wheel is beingchanged.

Practical advice

* optional



Flat tyre

271

The vehicle must be placed on stands if youintend to work under it.Make sure that the jack is placed on a firm,non-slip, level surface. Do not use woodenblocks or similar items as jacking supports.Otherwise, the jack will not be able to ach-ieve its load-bearing capacity due to therestricted height.Do not start the engine at any time whilethe wheel is being changed.

G Risk of accidentIf you fail to position the jack correctly, thevehicle may:Rslip off the jackRinjure you or othersRbe damagedIt is thus important to ensure that the jackis positioned correctly in the respectivejacking points. Before positioning the jack,remove any dirt that may have collected inthe jacking points.

The jacking sockets are located behind thewheel housings of the front wheels and in

front of the wheel housings of the rearwheels.

Example standard vehicle1 Cap for jacking socket

Example AMG vehicle1 Cap for jacking socket

X Standard vehicles: press the cover firmlyin the direction of arrow1 and pry off thecover with a suitable object, e. g. a screw-driver.

X AMG vehicles: pry off cover1 fromunderneath with a suitable object, e. g. ascrewdriver.

X All vehicles: remove cover1. Make surethe lug does not break off.

1 Jacking pin2 Jacking socket3 Crank

X Push jacking pin1 as far as it will go intojacking socket2.

Practical advice


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 271

Z


Flat tyre

272

X Make sure that the base of the jack is posi-tioned directly under jacking point1.

X Hold the jack in this position and turn crank3 clockwise until the foot of the jacktouches the ground. The jack must thenstand vertically, even on a slope.

X Turn crank3 until the tyre is raised a max-imum of 3 cm from the ground.

X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com-pletely.

1 Centring pin

X In place of the wheel bolt, screw centringpin1 from the vehicle tool kit into thethread.

X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.

! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on adirty surface. This could cause damage tothe bolt and wheel hub threads.

X Remove the wheel.

Fitting a new wheel

G Risk of accidentReplace damaged or corroded wheel bolts.Never oil or grease wheel bolts.

G Risk of accidentIf a wheel hub thread is damaged, you mustnot drive the vehicle any further. Consult aqualified specialist workshopwhich has thenecessary specialist knowledge and toolsto carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use aMercedes-Benz Service Centre or Service24h for this purpose. In particular, work rel-evant to safety or on safety-related systemsmust be carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

G Risk of accidentOnly use wheel bolts that have beendesigned for the wheel and the vehicle. Forsafety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-

mends that you only use wheel bolts whichhave been approved for Mercedes-Benzvehicles. Other bolts could work loose.Do not tighten the wheel bolts completelywhile the vehicle is still jacked up. The vehi-cle could topple off the jack.

X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contactsurfaces.

X Place the collapsible emergency sparewheel* onto the centring pin and push it on.

Practical advice

* optional



Flat tyre

273

X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fin-ger-tight.

X Unscrew the centring pin.X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-tight.

Inflating the collapsible emergencyspare wheel* with the electric air pump

G Risk of accidentPump up the collapsible emergency sparewheel before lowering the vehicle. Other-wise, you could damage the wheel rim.

The electric air pump is located in the stow-age well under the boot floor.

X Take the electric air pump out of the stow-age well under the boot floor.

1 Flap2 On/off switch3 Connector4 Air pump hose with pressure gauge and

pressure release screw5 Union nut

X Open flap1.X Pull connector3 and air hose4 out ofthe housing.

X Make sure that the pressure release screwon the pressure gauge is closed.

X Remove the cap from the valve on the tyre.

X Screw union nut5 on air hose4 onto thevalve.

X Insert plug3 into the cigarette lightersocket* (Y page 166) or into a 12V socketin your vehicle (Y page 166).


X Press on/off switch2 on the electric airpump to I.The electric air pump is switched on. Thetyre is inflated.

X When the tyre pressure is correct, press 0on the electric air pump switch. Correcttyre pressure:Rcollapsible spare wheel* with specifica-tion 185/60-17 93P: 2.5 barRcollapsible spare wheel* with specifica-tion 175/55-18 95P: 3.5 barRcollapsible spare wheel* with specifica-tion 175/55-18 91P: 3.0 barRcollapsible spare wheel* with specifica-tion 175/50-19 97P: 3.5 bar

! Do not operate the electric air pump forlonger than six minutes without a break.Otherwise, it may overheat.

Practical advice

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 273

Z


Flat tyre

274

The air pump can be operated again onceit has cooled down.

If the tyre pressure is too high:X Open the pressure release screw on thepressure gauge until the tyre pressure iscorrect.

X Disconnect the electric air pump and stowit away.

Lowering the vehicleX Lower the vehicle. To do this, turn the crankof the jack anti-clockwise until the vehicleis standing firmly on the ground again.

X Pull the jack out of the jacking socket.X Place the jack to one side.

X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a cross-wise pattern in the sequence indica-ted (1 to5). The tightening torque is130 Nm.

G Risk of accidentHave the tightening torque checked imme-diately after awheel is changed. Thewheelscould work loose if they are not tightenedto a torque of 130 Nm.

X Turn the jack back to its initial position andstore it and the rest of the vehicle tool kitin the boot.

X Push the tab of the jacking socket capunder the top edge of the hole.

X Push on the cap evenly until it snaps intoplace.

i Make sure that the lugs do not break offand that the plastic retainer strap is nottrapped.

X Pack the faulty wheel in the protective filmincluded with the collapsible emergencyspare wheel* and transport the wheel inthe boot.

i When you are driving with the collapsibleemergency spare wheel* fitted, the tyre

pressure loss warning system or the elec-tronic Run Flat Indicator* cannot functionreliably.

Stowing a used collapsible emergencyspare wheel*If you wish to stow a used collapsible emer-gency spare wheel* in the vehicle, you mustfollow the steps below, otherwise you will notbe able to stow it. We recommend that thiswork is carried out at a specialist workshop.

! Only place the collapsible emergencyspare wheel* in the vehicle when it is dry.Otherwise, moisture may remain in theboot.

X Unscrew the valve cap from the valve.X Remove the valve extractor from the vehi-cle tool kit.

X Unscrew the valve insert from the valve andrelease the air.

i Fully deflating the tyres can take a fewminutes.

X Screw the valve insert back into the valve.X Screw the valve cap back on

Practical advice

* optional



Flat tyre

275

X Put the protective film provided for theemergency spare wheel* over the collaps-ible emergency spare wheel*.

X Store the collapsible emergency sparewheel* in the spare wheel well under theluggage compartment.

X Fasten the collapsible emergency sparewheel* in place through the protective filmusing the screw.

MOExtended run-flat system*The MOExtended run-flat system must onlybe used in conjunction with the tyre pressureloss warning system or the tyre pressuremonitor*.

! Themaximumpermissible distancewhichcan be driven in run-flat mode depends onthe load in the vehicle. It is 50 km if thevehicle is partially laden and 30 km if fullyladen.The maximum range that can be driven inemergency operation is measured from thepoint at which the pressure loss warningmessage appears in the multi-function dis-play.

You must not exceed a maximum speed of80 km/h.

G Risk of accidentThe handling characteristics of your vehicledeteriorate in run-flat mode, for example:Rwhen corneringRwhen brakingRwhen accelerating rapidlyAdapt your driving style accordingly andavoid sudden changes in direction and sud-den acceleration, as well as driving overobstacles (i.e. kerbs, potholes), and drivingoff-road. This is particularly the case whenthe vehicle is heavily laden.The maximum permissible distance thatcan be driven in run-flat mode depends toa large extent on the loads placed on thevehicle. It can be shorter due to highspeeds, a heavy load, sudden accelerationand/or manoeuvring, the road surface con-dition, outside temperature, etc., or furtherif you drive carefully and conservatively.Do not continue to drive in run-flat mode if:Ryou hear banging noisesRthe vehicle starts to shakeRyou see smoke and smell rubber

RESP® is intervening constantlyRthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tyreAfter driving in run-flat mode, you musthave the rims checked for damage at aqualified specialist workshopwhich has thenecessary specialist knowledge and toolsto carry out the work required. The faultytyre must be replaced in every case.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you usea Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for thispurpose. In particular, work relevant tosafety or on safety-related systemsmust becarried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.

i On a vehicle with MOExtended tyres, onlyuse MOExtended spare tyres. These mustbe of the size specified for the vehicle.

Practical advice

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 275

Z


Battery

276

Battery

Notes on the vehicle batteryIn order for the battery to achieve the maxi-mum possible service life, it must always besufficiently charged.Have the battery charge checked more fre-quently if you use the vehicle mainly for shorttrips or if you leave it standing idle for alengthy period.To prevent damage from corrosion, onlyreplace the battery with one that has a centralventilation cover.Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre ifyou wish to leave your vehicle parked up fora long period of time.G Risk of injuryComply with safety precautions and takeprotective measures when handling batter-ies.

Risk of explosion

Fire, naked flames andsmoking are prohibitedwhen handling the bat-tery. Avoid creatingsparks.

Battery acid is caustic.Avoid contact with theskin, eyes or clothing.Wear suitable protectiveclothing, in particulargloves, an apron and aface mask.Immediately rinse acidsplashes off with cleanwater. Consult a doctor ifnecessary.Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Observe this Owner'sManual.

H Environmental noteDo not dispose of batteries with the house-hold rubbish. Dispose of defective batteriesin an environmentally responsible manner.Take them to a Mercedes-Benz Service

Centre or to a special collection point forold batteries.

G Risk of injuryFor safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use batteries whichhave been tested and approved for yourvehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These batteriesprovide increased impact protection to pre-vent vehicle occupants from suffering acidburns should the battery be damaged in theevent of an accident.To prevent acid burns, observe the follow-ing safety notes when handling batteries:RDo not lean over batteries.RDo not place any metal objects on a bat-tery. You could otherwise cause a shortcircuit and the battery's highly flammablegas mixture could ignite.RMake sure that you do not create an elec-trostatic charge, e.g. by wearing syn-thetic clothing or as a result of friction onfabrics. Therefore, you should not pull orslide the battery over carpets or othersynthetic materials.RNever touch the battery first. To dis-charge a possible electrostatic charge,

Practical advice



Battery

277

step out of the vehicle first and touch thebodywork.RDo not wipe the battery using a cloth. Thebattery may explode as a result of elec-trostatic charge or due to flying sparks.

! Switch the engine off and remove the keybefore unscrewing or disconnecting theterminal clamps from the battery. You mayotherwise destroy electronic componentssuch as the alternator.

i Mercedes-Benz recommends that youhave all work involving the battery, e.g.removing, charging and replacing, carriedout at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g.a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Installation location of the batteryYour vehicle is equipped with two batteries:RStarter battery in the engine compartmentRConsumer battery in the boot

Starter battery in the engine compartment1 Positive terminal2 Negative terminal

Disconnecting the battery

G Risk of accidentIf the battery is disconnected:Rthe brake boosting effectwill not be avail-able. Greater braking force will then berequired and the brake pedal travel willbe longer. If necessary, depress thebrake pedal with maximum force.Ryou can no longer turn the key in the igni-tion and, on vehicles with KEYLESS

GO*, pressing the KEYLESS GO button*will have no effectRthe selector lever is locked in position P

! Always disconnect the battery inthe order described below. Never swap theterminal clamps. You may otherwise dam-age the vehicle electronics.

Disconnecting the starter batteryX Firmly depress the parking brake and shiftthe selector lever to position P on vehicleswith automatic transmission*.

X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignitionlock and remove it.

X Open the bonnet.X Remove the negative terminal clamp fromthe battery.

X Remove the cover from the positive termi-nal clamp.

X Remove the positive terminal clamp fromthe battery.

X Disconnect the breather hose.

Practical advice

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 277

Z


Battery

278

Disconnecting the consumer batteryX Close the boot separator.X Remove the inner floor from the boot.X Remove the negative terminal clamp fromthe battery.

X Remove the cover from the positive termi-nal clamp.

X Remove the positive terminal clamp fromthe battery.

Removing the battery

Starter batteryX Fold the bar up and remove the battery.

Consumer batteryX Loosen the bolt which holds the battery inplace.

X Take out the support and the battery holderand remove the battery.

Charging and fitting the battery

G Risk of injuryOnly charge the battery in a well-ventilatedarea. As the battery is being charged, gasescan escape and generateminor explosions.This may injure you and other persons orcause damage to the paintwork or acid cor-rosion on the vehicle.You can obtain information about batterychargers which allow the battery to becharged when still installed from a qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-BenzService Centre.

G Risk of injuryThere is a risk of acid burns during thecharging process due to the gases whichescape from the battery. Do not lean overthe battery during the charging process.

G Risk of injuryBattery acid is caustic. Avoid contact withthe skin, eyes or clothing.

! Only charge the installed battery with abattery charger which has been tested andapproved byMercedes-Benz. These batterychargers allow the battery to be charged

while it is still installed. Otherwise, the vehi-cle's electronic system may be damaged.

! Only use battery chargers with a maxi-mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

X Charge the battery. Observe the notes inthe operating instructions for your batterycharger.

X Refit the charged battery.To do this, follow the steps described in"Removing the battery" (Y page 278) inreverse order.

Reconnecting the battery! Always reconnect the battery in thesequence described below. Never swap theterminal clamps. You may otherwise dam-age the vehicle electronics.

X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Connect the positive terminal clamp andsecure the cover.

X Connect the negative terminal clamp.X Connect the breather hose. Make sure thata cell cap is fitted is fitted on the side.

Practical advice



Battery

279

i If the battery power supply has been inter-rupted (e.g. if it has been reconnected), youmust carry out the following tasks:RSet the time (see the COMAND operatinginstructions)RReset the function for folding the exteriormirrors in/out automatically* by foldingthe mirrors out once (Y page 80).

Jump-startingIf your vehicle's battery is discharged, theengine can be jump-started from anothervehicle or from an external battery using jumpleads.Observe the following points:RJump-starting may only be performed whenthe engine and catalytic converter are cold.RDo not start the engine if the battery is fro-zen. Let the battery thaw first.RJump-starting may only be performed frombatteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.ROnly use jump leads which are protectedagainst polarity reversal and which have asufficient cross-section and insulated ter-minal clamps.

i Jump leads which are protected againstpolarity reversal and further informationabout jump-starting can be obtained fromany Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

! Avoid repeated and lengthy startingattempts. Only use the jump-starting pro-cedure for the battery in the engine com-partment.Do not use a rapid-charging device to startthe engine.

G Risk of injuryThere is a risk of acid burns when jump-starting a vehicle due to the gases whichescape from the battery. Do not lean overthe battery while the engine is being jump-started.

G Risk of explosionGases escaping from the battery duringjump-starting may cause minor explosions.Avoid creating sparks. Keep naked flamesaway from the battery, and do not smoke.Comply with safety precautions and takeprotective measures when handling batter-ies. You will find these under "Battery" inthe index.

X Make sure that the two vehicles do nottouch.

X Depress the parking brake.

X Move the selector lever to P.X Switch off all electrical consumers.

1 Positive terminal of donor battery2 Positive terminal on your vehicle3 Negative terminal of donor battery4 Negative terminal on your vehicle

X Connect positive terminal2 on your vehi-cle to positive terminal1 of the donorbattery using the jump lead, beginning withyour own battery.

X Start the engine of the donor vehicle andrun it at idling speed.

Practical advice

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 279

Z


Towing and tow-starting

280

X Connect negative terminal3 of the donorbattery to negative terminal4 of yourvehicle's battery using the jump lead, con-necting the jump lead to the donor batteryfirst.

X Start the engine.X Electrical consumers can be switched onagain. Do not switch the lights on, however,as this will overload the battery.

X Remove the jump lead from earthpoint4 and negative terminal3 first,then from positive terminals1 and2,each time disconnecting from the batteryon your own vehicle first.

X Have the battery checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-BenzService Centre.


Points to remember

G Risk of accidentIf you tow the vehicle, you must use a rigidtowing bar if:Rthe engine is not runningRthere is a brake system malfunctionRthe voltage supply or the vehicle's elec-trical system is damaged

The electric power steering and the brakeforce booster do not work when the engineis not running. Greater braking force willthen be required and the brake pedal travelwill be longer. If necessary, depress thebrake pedal with maximum force.Do not tow the vehicle if the key cannot beturned in the ignition lock. If this is the case,the steering is locked and the vehicle can-not be steered.If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, itsweight must not exceed the maximum per-missible gross vehicle weight of your vehi-cle.

G Risk of accidentThe SBC® brake system requires electricalpower. The SBC® brake system entersemergency mode if there are faults in thepower supply or the vehicle's electrical sys-tem. Greater braking force will then berequired and the brake pedal travel andbraking distance will be longer. If neces-sary, depress the brake pedal with maxi-mum force.The vehicle is braked if SBC® HOLD is acti-vated. Therefore, deactivate SBC® HOLD ifthe vehicle is to be towed.If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, itsweight must not exceed the maximum per-missible gross vehicle weight of your vehi-cle.

It is better to have the vehicle transportedthan to have it towed.When towing, observe the legal requirementsin all countries concerned.

! When towing, pull away slowly and with-out jerking. If the tractive power is too high,the vehicles could be damaged. Do not usethe towing eye for recovery.

Practical advice




281

! You may tow the vehicle for a maximumof 50 km. A towing speed of 50 km/h mustnot be exceeded.With towing distances over 50 km, theentire vehicle needs to be lifted up andtransported.

! Only secure the tow cable or towing barto the towing eyes. You may otherwisedamage the vehicle.RVehicles with an automatic transmissionmust not be tow-started.RIf the engine does not start, try jump start-ing (Y page 279).RIf it is not possible to jump-start the vehicle,have it towed to the nearest qualified spe-cialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-BenzService Centre.RIf the vehicle has suffered transmissiondamage, only tow it with the propeller shaftdisconnected.RThe selector lever must be in position N onvehicles with automatic transmission.RIf you are towing the vehicle over a consid-erable distance, this may only be done withthe rear axle raised.

RThe ignition must be switched off if you aretowing the vehicle with the front/rear axleraised. Intervention by ESP® could other-wise damage the brake system.RBefore towing the vehicle, make sure thatthe battery is connected and charged. Oth-erwise:- You cannot switch on the ignition- You cannot move the selector lever to N- You have no support when braking

i Switch off the automatic locking featurebefore the vehicle is towed (Y page 120).You could otherwise be locked out whenpushing or towing the vehicle.

Fitting the towing eye

Opening the front coverThemountings for the removable towing eyesare located in the bumpers. They are locatedat the front and rear under the covers on theright-hand side of the vehicle when viewed inthe direction of travel.

1 Cover

X Press the upper section of cover1 backin the direction of the arrow while at thesame time pulling the bottom forwards.

X Take cover1 off the opening.

Practical advice


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 281

Z



282

Opening the rear cover

1 Cover

X Use a suitable object such as a screwdriverand insert it in the notch on the left or rightto lever off cover1.

X Fold cover1 down.X Take cover1 off the opening.

Securing the towing eyeX Take the towing eye and the wheel wrenchfrom the vehicle tool kit (Y page 200).

X Screw in the towing eye clockwise to thestop.

X Insert the wheel wrench handle into thetowing eye and tighten.

Towing the vehicle! You may tow the vehicle for a maximumof 50 km. A towing speed of 50 km/h mustnot be exceeded.With towing distances over 50 km, theentire vehicle needs to be lifted up andtransported.

! The engine must be switched off (key inignition lock in position 0 or position 1) ifthe vehicle is being towedwith the rear axleraised or if the parking brake is being testedon a dynamometer. Intervention by ESP®could otherwise damage the brake system.


X Move the selector lever to N.

Removing the towing eyeX Take the wheel wrench from the vehicletool kit (Y page 200).

X Insert the wheel wrench handle into thetowing eye and turn it anti-clockwise.

X Unscrew the towing eye.

X Replace the cover and press it until itengages.

X Return the towing eye and the wheelwrench to the vehicle tool kit.

Transporting the vehicleThe towing eyes can be used to pull the vehi-cle onto a trailer or transporter for transport-ing purposes.

! Only lash the vehicle down by the wheelsor wheel rims, not by parts of the vehiclesuch as axle or steering components. Thevehicle could otherwise be damaged.


X Move the selector lever to N.

Practical advice



Fuses

283

Fuses

Notes on changing fusesThe fuses in your vehicle serve to close downfaulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-nents on the circuit and their functions willfail.Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses ofthe same rating, which you can recognise bythe colour and value. The fuse ratings are lis-ted in the fuse allocation chart. A Mercedes-Benz Service Centre will be happy to adviseyou.G Risk of fireOnly use fuses that have been approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles and which havethe correct amperage for the system con-cerned. Do not attempt to repair or bridgefaulty fuses. A circuit overload could other-wise start a fire. Have the cause traced andrectified at a qualified specialist workshop,e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have thecause traced and rectified at a qualified spe-cialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-BenzService Centre.

! Only use fuses that have been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles and whichhave the correct fuse rating for the systemconcerned. Otherwise, components or sys-tems could be damaged.

G Risk of accidentThe SBCTM brake system requires an elec-trical power supply. If there is a disruptionto the power supply or a malfunction in thevehicle's on-board electronics, the SBCTM

brake system goes into emergency opera-tion mode. In this case you will need topress the brake harder. Braking distancesand brake pedal travel also increase. Youmay have to depress the brake pedal withmaximum force.

The fuses are located in the main fuse box inthe engine compartment on the left-hand sidewhen viewed in the direction of travel.

Fuse allocation chartThe "Relay and fuse information sheet" islocated with the vehicle tool kit(Y page 200) in the stowage well under theboot floor (Y page 161).

Before changing a fuseX Park the vehicle.X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Remove the key from the ignition lock.

Main fuse box in the engine compart-mentX To open: open the bonnet (Y page 176).The main fuse box is located in the enginecompartment on the left when viewed in thedirection of travel.

1 Fuse box lid2 To open3 To close

Practical advice


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 283

Z


Fuses

284

X Push the slide into position2.X Remove cover1.

X To close: hook cover1 to the tabs andclose it.

X Push the slide into position3.

! The cover must be fitted correctly and theslidemust be at thej symbol. Moistureor soiling could otherwise impair the oper-ation of the fuses.

X Close the bonnet (Y page 177).

Practical advice



285

Notes on the technical data ............. 286Mercedes-Benz genuine parts ......... 286Vehicle electronics ........................... 287Vehicle identification plates ............ 288Engine ................................................ 290Performance ...................................... 291Tyres and wheels .............................. 292Vehicle dimensions .......................... 298Vehicle weights ................................. 299Service products and capacities ..... 300Frequencies for garage door open-ers* .................................................... 307

Technical data



Mercedes-Benz genuine parts

286

Notes on the technical data

i The technical data was determined inaccordance with EU directives. All dataapplies to the vehicle's standard equip-ment. The data may therefore differ forvehicles with optional equipment. You canobtain further information from aMercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Mercedes-Benz genuine parts

Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts and con-version parts and accessories which havebeen specifically approved for your vehicle fortheir reliability, safety and suitability. Despiteongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz isunable to evaluate other parts. Mercedes-Benz therefore accepts no responsibility forthe use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehi-cles, even if they have been independently orofficially approved.In Germany and someother countries, certainparts are only officially approved for installa-tion or modification if they comply with legalrequirements. All genuine Mercedes-Benzparts meet this requirement. The use of non-approved parts may invalidate the vehicle'sgeneral operating permit. This is the case if:Rthey cause a change of the vehicle typefrom that for which the vehicle's generaloperating permit was grantedRother road users could be endangeredRthe emission or noise levels are adverselyaffected

The use of non-approved parts could affectyour vehicle's operating safety. Mercedes-Benz therefore recommends genuine

Mercedes-Benz parts and conversion partsand accessories that have been approved foryour vehicle.H Environmental noteDaimler also supplies reconditionedassemblies and parts which are of the samequality as new parts. These parts have thesame warranty as new parts.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts and approvedconversion parts and accessories are availa-ble from Mercedes-Benz Service Centres.There, you can also receive advice about tech-nical modifications and have the parts pro-fessionally fitted.Always quote the vehicle identification num-ber and the engine number when orderinggenuine parts. You will find these numbers onthe vehicle data card in the Service Bookletor on your vehicle's identification plates(Y page 288).

Technical data



Vehicle electronics

287

Vehicle electronics

Tampering with the engine electron-ics

G Risk of accidentOnly have work on the engine electronicsand related components carried out at aqualified specialist workshopwhich has thenecessary specialist knowledge and toolsto carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use aMercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur-pose. In particular, work relevant to safetyor on safety-related systems must be car-ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.The vehicle's roadworthiness could other-wise be affected.

! Only have work done on the engine elec-tronics and its associated parts, such ascontrol units, sensors and connector leads,carried out at a qualified specialist work-shop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz ServiceCentre. Otherwise, vehicle componentsmay wear more quickly and your vehicle'swarranty and operating permitmay be inva-lidated.

Retrofitting electrical and electronicequipmentElectrical and electronic equipment can jeop-ardise the operating safety of your vehicle. Ifequipment of this kind is retrofitted, it mustbe type-approved and bear the e mark. Thee mark may be obtained from the equipmentmanufacturer or an authorised testing centre.

! Damage or consequential damage arisingfrom fitting equipment not approvedby Mercedes-Benz is not covered by theMercedes-Benz warranty.

If you wish to install two-way radios in thevehicle, you must obtain formal approval.Mercedes-Benz approves the installation oftwo-way radios if such equipment is installedprofessionally and a low-reflection exterioraerial is used.The transmission output of the two-way radiomust not exceed the maximum transmissionoutputs listed.G Risk of accidentTwo-way radios may interfere with the vehi-cle electronics and thereby jeopardise theoperational safety of the vehicle and yourown safety if:

Rthey do not have an exterior aerialRthe exterior aerial is not a low-reflectionaerialRthe exterior aerial has been fitted incor-rectly

G Risk of injuryExcessive electromagnetic radiation mayalso cause damage to your health and thehealth of others. Using an exterior aerialtakes into account current scientific dis-cussions relating to the possible health haz-ards that may result from electromagneticfields.For this reason, only have the exterior aerialfitted at a qualified specialist workshopwhich has the necessary specialist knowl-edge and tools to carry out the workrequired. Mercedes-Benz recommendsthat you use a Mercedes-Benz ServiceCentre for this purpose. In particular, workrelevant to safety or on safety-related sys-tems must be carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i Mercedes-Benz recommends the use ofan approved exterior aerial. This ensuresoptimal reception quality for mobile tele-

Technical data


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 287

Z


Vehicle identification plates

288

phones/wireless devices in the vehicle.This also ensures that interferencebetween these devices and the vehicle'selectronics is kept to a minimum. If instal-led, the exterior aerial conducts the elec-tromagnetic fields transmitted by a mobilephone to the exterior of the vehicle.

Frequency range Maximum trans-mission output(watts)

Short wave(< 50 MHz)

100

4 m waveband 20

2 m waveband 50

70 cm waveband 35

25 cm waveband 10

! If electrical or electronic equipmentwhich does not comply with the aboveinstallation conditions is operated insidethe vehicle, the vehicle's operating permitmay be invalidated (EU Directive95/54/EC) - Automotive EMC directive)


Vehicle identification plate with vehi-cle identification number (VIN) andpaint code numberThe vehicle identification plate is located onthe side of the door frame on the front-passenger side.

1 Vehicle identification plate

X Open the driver's door.You will see vehicle identification plate1.

Vehicle identification plate (example)1 Vehicle identification plate2 Vehicle manufacturer3 EU type approval number4 Vehicle identification number (VIN)5 Maximum permissible gross vehicle

weight6 Maximum permissible front axle load7 Maximum permissible rear axle load8 Paint code number

Technical data




289

Vehicle identification number (VIN)As well as being shown on the vehicle identi-fication plate, the vehicle identification num-ber (VIN) is also stamped onto the vehiclebody. It is located underneath the rear stow-age compartment on the front-passengerside.

1 Stowage compartment2 Bulkhead3 Vehicle identification number (VIN)

X Open stowage compartment1(Y page 163).

X Remove bulkhead2.Vehicle identification number (VIN)3 isfound on the metal bars above the floorcovering.

Engine numberThe engine number is stamped on the engineblock (crankcase). More information can beobtained from any Mercedes-Benz ServiceCentre.

Technical data


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 289

Z


Engine

290

Engine

SL 280 SL 350 SL 500 SL 600 SL 63 AMG SL 65 AMG

Rated output 170 kW (231 bhp) 232 kW (316bhp)

285 kW (388 bhp) 380 kW (517 bhp) 386 kW (525bhp)

450 kW (612 bhp)

At enginespeed

6,000 rpm 6,500 rpm 6,000 rpm 5,000 rpm 6,800 rpm 4,800 –5,100 rpm

Rated torque 300 Nm 360 Nm 530 Nm 830 Nm 630 Nm 1,000 Nm

At enginespeed

2,500 – 5,000 rpm 4,900 rpm 2,800 – 4,800 rpm 1,900 –3,500 rpm

5,200 rpm 2,000 –4,000 rpm

Number ofcylinders

6 6 8 12 8 12

Displacement 2,996 cm3 3,498 cm3 5,461 cm3 5,513 cm3 6,208 cm3 5,980 cm3

Maximumengine speed

6,500 rpm 7,200 rpm 6,500 rpm 5,950 rpm 7,000 rpm 5,950 rpm

Technical data



Performance

291

Performance

Speeds


Maximumspeed

250 km/h 250 km/h 250 km/h 250 km/h 250 km/h 250 km/h

Acceleration from 0 to 100 km/h


Acceleration 7.8 seconds 6.2 seconds 5.4 seconds 4.5 seconds 4.6 seconds 4.2 seconds

Technical data


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 291

Z


Tyres and wheels

292

Tyres and wheels

Points to remember! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec-ommends that you only use tyres whichhave been approved by Mercedes-Benzspecifically for your vehicle. These tyres arespecially adapted for use with the controlsystems, such as ABS or ESP®, and aremarked as follows:RMO = Mercedes-Benz OriginalRMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Exten-ded* (with run-flat characteristics)

If you use other tyres, Mercedes-Benz can-not accept any responsibility for damagewhich may occur. Information about tyrescan be obtained from any Mercedes-BenzService Centre.

i Vehicles with MOExtended run-flat sys-tem are not equipped with the TIREFITkit*27.It is therefore recommended to additionallyequip your vehicle with the TIREFIT kit*when fitting tyres that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tyres.

i A TIREFIT kit* is available from any quali-fied specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

! If you fit tyres other than those tested andrecommended by Mercedes-Benz, charac-teristics such as handling, noise levels andfuel consumption, etc. could be adverselyaffected. In addition, when driving with aload, dimensional variations and differenttyre deformation characteristics couldcause the tyres to come into contact withthe bodywork and axle components. Thiscould result in damage to the tyres or thevehicle.

i Further information about tyres andwheels can be obtained from anyMercedes-Benz Service Centre.You will find a table of tyre pressures on theinside of your vehicle's fuel filler flap. Youwill find further information about tyre pres-sures in the "Operation" section(Y page 184).


Technical data

* optional



Tyres and wheels

293

Tyres of the same dimensions

SL 280 / SL 350 SL 500

17" Both axles Summer tyres 255/45 R17 98W –

Winter tyres 255/45 R17 98V M+S 255/45 R17 98V M+S

Light-alloy wheels 8.5J x 17 H2 ET 35 8.5J x 17 H2 ET 35

18" Both axles Summer tyres 255/40 R18 95W 255/40 R18 95W

Winter tyres 255/40 R18 95V M+S 255/40 R18 95V M+S

Winter tyres28, 29 255/40 R18 95V M+S MOExtended 255/40 R18 95V M+S MOExtended


28 Tyres with run-flat characteristics and only in combination with the tyre pressure loss warning or tyre pressure monitor* activated.29Winter tyres for retrofitting. Only certain tyre brands are approved. Ask your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for more information.

Technical data

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 293

Z


Tyres and wheels

294

SL 600 SL 63 AMG SL 65 AMG

18" Bothaxles

Winter tyres 255/40 R18 95V M+S 255/40 R18 95V M+S –

Winter tyres30, 31 255/40 R18 95V M+S MOExtended – –

Light-alloywheels

8.5J x 18 H2 ET 35 8.5J x 18 H2 ET 30 –

19" Bothaxles

Winter tyres – 255/35 R19 96V XL M+S 255/35 R19 96V XL M+S

Light-alloywheels

– 8.5J x 19 H2 ET 30 8.5J x 19 H2 ET 30

30 Tyres with run-flat characteristics and only in combination with the tyre pressure loss warning or tyre pressure monitor* activated.31Winter tyres for retrofitting. Only certain tyre brands are approved. Ask your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for more information.

Technical data

* optional



Tyres and wheels

295

Mixed tyres

SL 280 / SL 350 / SL 500 SL 600

18" Front axle Summer tyres 255/40 R18 95W 255/40 R18 95Y

Summer tyres32 255/40 R18 95Y MOExtended 255/40 R18 95Y MOExtended


Rear axle Summer tyres33 285/35 R18 97W 285/35 R18 97Y

Summer tyres32, 33 285/35 R18 97Y MOExtended 285/35 R18 97Y MOExtended


19" Front axle Summer tyres 255/35 ZR19 96Y XL MO1 255/35 ZR19 96Y XL MO1


Rear axle Summer tyres33 285/30 ZR19 98Y XL MO1 285/30 ZR19 98Y XL MO1


32 Tyres with run-flat characteristics and only in combination with the tyre pressure loss warning or tyre pressure monitor* activated.33 Snow chains not permitted.

Technical data

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 295

Z


Tyres and wheels

296

SL 63 AMG /SL 63 AMG Performance Package

SL 65 AMG

19" Front axle Summer tyres 255/35 ZR19 96Y XL MO1 255/35 ZR19 96Y XL MO1


Rear axle Summer tyres34 285/30 ZR19 98Y XL MO1 285/30 ZR19 98Y XL MO1


AMG equipment

All models

19" Front axle Summer tyres 255/35 ZR 19 96Y XL MO1

Light-alloy wheels 8.5J x 19 H2 ET 30

Rear axle Summer tyres35 285/30 ZR 19 98Y XL MO1

Light-alloy wheels 9.5J x 19 H2 ET 31

34 Snow chains not permitted.35 Snow chains not permitted.

Technical data



Tyres and wheels

297

Spare wheel*Depending on the country, the engine and the wheels fitted, your vehicle may be equipped with TIREFIT or a collapsible emergency sparewheel*.

i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics) are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.

SL 280 / SL 350 /SL 500

SL 600 / SL 63 AMG SL 63 AMGPerformance Package /SL 65 AMG

17" Collapsible emer-gency sparewheel*36

Tyres 185/60 - 17 93P – –

Tyre pressure 2.8 bar – –

Wheels 6B x 17 H2 ET 25 – –


Tyres – 175/55 - 18 95P –

Tyre pressure – 3.5 bar –

Wheels – 6B x 18 H2 ET 25 –


Tyres – – 175/50 - 19 97P

Tyre pressure – – 3.5 bar

Wheels – – 6.5B x 19 H2 ET 14

36 Snow chains not permitted.

Technical data

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 297

Z


Vehicle dimensions

298

Vehicle dimensions


Vehicle length (ECE)Max. when operatingroof

4,562 mm4,740 mm

4,562 mm4,740 mm

4,562 mm4,740 mm

4,562 mm4,740 mm

4,598 mm4,772 mm

4,598 mm4,772 mm

Vehicle width includ-ing exterior mirrors

2,069 mm 2,069 mm 2,069 mm 2,069 mm 2,069 mm

Vehicle heightMax. when operatingroof

1,317 mm1,698 mm

1,317 mm1,698 mm

1,298 mm1,677 mm

1,298 mm1,677 mm

1,298 mm1,680 mm

1,298 mm1,680 mm

Wheelbase 2,560 mm 2,560 mm 2,560 mm 2,560 mm 2,560 mm 2,560 mm

Technical data


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 298

2,069 mm


Vehicle weights

299

Vehicle weights

The unladen weight includes the driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment increase theunladen weight and reduce the maximum payload. Specific weight specifications can be found on the vehicle identification plate(Y page 288).


Unladen weight (inaccordance with ECdirective)

1,825 kg 1,825 kg 1,910 kg 2,045 kg 1,970 kg 2,120 kg

Maximum permissiblegross vehicle weight

2,110 kg 2,120 kg 2,205 kg 2,320 kg 2,225 kg 2,385 kg

Maximum permissiblefront axle load

1,020 kg 1,025 kg 1,080 kg 1,175 kg 1,105 kg 1,195 kg

Maximum permissiblerear axle load

1,130 kg 1,135 kg 1,165 kg 1,195 kg 1,165 kg 1,230 kg

Maximum luggagecompartment load

100 kg 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg

Technical data


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 299

Z


Service products and capacities

300


Notes on service products and capaci-tiesService products are:RfuelsRlubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)RcoolantRbrake fluidRwindscreen washer fluidMercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyuse those products which have been testedand specially approved by Mercedes-Benz foryour vehicle and are listed in the Mercedes-Benz Owner's Manual in the relevant chaptersince:Rparts and service products are matchedRdamage caused by the use of non-approvedservice products is not covered by the war-ranty

You can recognise service products approvedby Mercedes-Benz by the following inscrip-tion on the containers:RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51)

Other designations or recommendations thatrelate to a level of quality or a specification inaccordance with an MB Approval have notnecessarily been approved by Mercedes-Benz.You can obtain further information from anyMercedes-Benz Service Centre.G Risk of injuryWhen handling, storing and disposing ofany service products, please observe therelevant regulations, as you could other-wise endanger yourself and others.Keep service products away from children.To protect your health, do not allow serviceproducts to come into contact with youreyes or open wounds. See a doctor imme-diately if any service product is swallowed.

H Environmental noteDispose of service products in an environ-mentally-responsible manner.

Fuels

G Risk of explosionFuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flamesand smoking are therefore prohibited whenhandling fuels.Switch off the engine before refuelling.

G Risk of injuryDo not allow fuel to come into contact withskin or clothing.Allowing fuels to come into direct contactwith your skin or inhaling fuel vapours isdamaging to your health.

Tank capacity

Total capacity 80 l

Of which reservefuel

Approximately 10 l

Of which reservefuel on AMG vehi-cles

Approximately 14 l

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with apetrol engine. Never mix petrol with diesel.

Technical data




301

Even small amounts of diesel result in dam-age to the injection system. Damage result-ing from adding diesel is not covered by thewarranty.

More information about refuelling and fuelscan be found in the "Operation" section.

Introduction to fuel consumptionThe vehicle will use more fuel than usual inthe following situations:Rat very low temperaturesRin urban trafficRon short tripsRin mountainous terrainThe consumption figures have been deter-mined according to EU DirectiveRL80/1268/EEC.

i Only for certain countries: the respectivecurrent consumption and emission valuesof your vehicle can be found in the COCpapers (EC-CERTIFICATE OF CONFORM-ITY). These documents are supplied whenthe vehicle is delivered.

! Do not use any special additives, as theycan cause malfunctions and engine dam-

age. Damage resulting from the use of suchadditives is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty.

H Environmental noteCO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which sci-entists believe to be principally responsiblefor global warming (the greenhouse effect).Your vehicle's CO2 emissions are directlyrelated to fuel consumption and thereforedepend on:Refficient use of the fuel by the engineRdriving styleRother non-technical factors, such as envi-ronmental influences or road conditions

You can minimise your vehicle's CO2 emis-sions by driving carefully and having it serv-iced regularly.

Technical data


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 301

Z



302

Fuel consumptionThe figures stated have been determined in accordance with the applicable EU directives and do not relate to individual vehicles. In realconditions these values may differ.


Urban 13.5 l/100 km 14.3 l/100 km 18.1 l/100 km 21.3 l/100 km 21.4 l/100 km 23.4 l/100 km

Extra-urban

7.0 l/100 km 7.4 l/100 km 8.3 l/100 km 9.5 l/100 km 9.5 l/100 km 10.4 l/100 km

Technical data




303


Overall(NEDC)

9.4 l/100 km 9.9 l/100 km 11.9 l/100 km 13.9 l/100 km 13.9 l/100 km 15.1 l/100 km

CO2 emis-sions

224 g/km 236 g/km 284 g/km 330 g/km 330 g/km 362 g/km

Engine oilA list of engine oils tested and approved in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products is available from anyMercedes-Benz Service Centre. Oils approved by Mercedes-Benz are indicated by the MB Sheet Number on the oil container. The table showswhich MB Sheet Number applies to which engine:

SL 280SL 350SL 500

SL 600 SL 63 AMG SL 65 AMG

MB Sheet Number 229.3/229.5 229.5 229.537 229.537

i In the event that theRengine oil brandRgrade (MB sheet number)RSAE classification (viscosity)

of the oil currently in your vehicle is notavailable, you can use another mineral orsynthetic engine oil which has beenapproved by Mercedes-Benz.Mixing oils reduces the benefits of high-grade engine oil.

! Do not use lubricant additives, since theycan lead to increased wear and damage tothe mechanical assemblies. The use oflubricant additiveswill result in a restrictionof your warranty.

37 Restriction: only SAE 0W-40 engine oils may be used.

Technical data


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 303

Z



304

CapacitiesThe following values refer to an oil change including the oil filter.

Engine with oil fil-ter

SL 280SL 350

SL 500 SL 600 SL 63 AMG SL 65 AMG

Replacementamount

8.0 l 8.5 l 8.0 l 8.0 l 8.0 l

CoolantThe coolant is a mixture of water and anti-freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs thefollowing tasks:Ranti-corrosion protectionRantifreeze protectionRraising the boiling point

i When the vehicle is first delivered, it istopped up with a coolant that will ensureadequate antifreeze and corrosion protec-tion.

! Only top up with coolant that has beenpremixed with the desired antifreeze pro-tection. You could otherwise damage theengine.

There is more information about coolantand topping it up on Mercedes-Benz Spec-ifications for Service Products Sheet310.1.

! Always use a suitable coolant mixture,even in countries where high temperaturesprevail.Otherwise, the cooling system will not besufficiently protected from corrosion, andthe boiling point will be too low.

If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present inthe correct concentration, the boiling point ofthe coolant will be around 130 °C.The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentra-tion in the cooling system should:

Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the coolingsystem against freezing down to around–37 °C.Rnot exceed 55% concentration (antifreezeprotection down to –45 °C), otherwise heatwill not be effectively dissipated.

If the vehicle has lost coolant, top it up withequal amounts of water and antifreeze/cor-rosion inhibitor. Mercedes-Benz recom-mends using an antifreeze/corrosion inhibi-tor which has been approved for Mercedes-Benz.

! The cooling system contains a fillingwhich must be renewed after 15 years, orafter 250,000 km at the latest. Have therenewal confirmed in the Service Booklet.The warranty is only valid if you top up withan antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor which

Technical data




305

has been approved by Mercedes-Benz, andobserve the recommended mixing ratios.

Technical data


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 305

Z



306

CapacitiesThe following values indicate the total cooling system capacities.


Coolant 11.0 l 10.8 l 11.6 l 15 l 11.3 l 17.2 l

Amount of antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor required for antifreeze protection

Down to–37 °C(approx. 50%)

5.5 l 5.4 l 5.8 l 7.5 l 5.6 l 8.6 l

Down to–45 °C(approxi-mately 55%)

6.0 l 5.9 l 6.4 l 8.3 l 6.2 l 9.5 l

Brake fluidOver a period of time, the brake fluid absorbsmoisture from the air; this lowers its boilingpoint.G Risk of accidentIf the boiling point of the brake fluid is toolow, vapour pockets may form in the brakesystem when the brakes are applied hard(e.g. when driving downhill). This wouldimpair braking efficiency.

Have the brake fluid renewed every twoyears with a brake fluid that has beenapproved by Mercedes-Benz and have thisconfirmed in the Service Booklet.

i There is usually a notice in the enginecompartment to remind you when the nextbrake fluid change is due.

Windscreen washer systemThe washer fluid reservoir holds approxi-mately 7 litres.The headlamp cleaning system* and thewindscreen washer system are both suppliedfrom the washer fluid reservoir.X At temperatures above freezing point:top up the washer fluid reservoir with amixture of water and windscreen washerconcentrate (Y page 181).

X At temperatures below freezing point:

Technical data

* optional



Frequencies for garage door openers*

307

top up the washer fluid reservoir with amixture of water, antifreeze and wind-screen washer concentrate (Y page 181).Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside tem-peratures.

G Risk of fireWindscreen washer concentrate is highlyflammable. Fire, naked flames and smokingare prohibited when windscreen washerconcentrate is being handled.


Country Radio registration number MHz frequency range

Egypt W-KLE-17 / 08 March 06 27, 30, 40, 418, 433, 868

Andorra 20 July 27, 30, 40, 433, 868

Australia 28 June 27, 30, 40, 433, 868

Barbados Registration not required 27, 40, 433, 868

Belgium Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868

Bulgaria Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 12 April 07 27, 40, 433, 868

Chile 38447/F-23 No.3.3634 40, 433

Technical data

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 307

Z



308


Denmark Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE20 April 05 27, 40, 433, 868

Germany Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE7519301 29 April 05 27, 40, 433, 868

Estonia Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE11 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868

Finland Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 13 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868

France Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 13 May 05 27, 30, 40, 433, 868

French Guyana Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 13 May 05 27, 30, 40, 433, 868

Gibraltar Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE13 May 05 (UK) 27, 40, 418, 433, 868

Greece Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE11409/18/4/2005 18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868

United Kingdom Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 418, 433, 868

Guadeloupe Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 13 May 05 27, 30, 40, 433, 868

Ireland Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868

Iceland Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868

Technical data

* optional




309


Italy DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/15347DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/15348DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/15350DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/15357DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/15358DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/15359

27, 40, 433, 868

Jordan TRC/LPD/2005/23 27, 30, 40, 433, 868

Canary Islands 000438/2005, 000439/2005000440/2005, 000441/2005000445/2005, 000446/2005000447/2005, 3 June 2005

27, 40, 433, 868

Croatia SDR 224/06 27, 40, 433, 868

Kuwait 5 October 2005 27, 30, 40, 418, 433, 868

Latvia 2920/O&M/2006 / 26 April 06 27, 40, 433, 868

Lebanon Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 27.4-1B-1609 6 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868

Liechtenstein Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 14357 27 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868

Lithuania Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE27.4-1B-1609 6 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868

Luxembourg Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE150405/9538 24 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868

Technical data

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 309

Z



310


Malta Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868

Martinique Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE11 July 05 27, 30, 40, 433, 868

Monaco Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 13 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868

New Zealand 20 March 06 27, 30, 40, 433

The Netherlands Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868

Norway Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE05/02424-SA644 18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868

Austria Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868

Poland Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE21 April 05 27, 40, 433, 868

Portugal ANCOM-S08399/05 27, 40, 433, 868

Reunion Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE11 July 05 27, 40, 433, 868

Romania Article 6.4 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 27, 30, 40, 433, 868

Russia 13 May 05 433

Saudi Arabia 11_02_05/5024-5-6 418, 433

Sweden Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868

Switzerland Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE14357 27 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868

Technical data

* optional




311


Slovakia Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTESlovak206/11/2005 4 May 05

27, 40, 433, 868

Slovenia Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 500-1/2005-437 9 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868

Spain 000438/2005, 000439/2005, 000440/2005000441/2005, 000445/2005, 000446/2005000447/2005

27, 40, 433, 868

South Africa 11 October 2005 27, 40, 433

Syria 279/4/14 / 05 March 06

Czech Republic General Licence GL-30/R/2000 Reg. No. 844 13 May 05 27, 40, 433

Hungary Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868

United Arab Emirates 1623/5/10-2/26/76 433

Cyprus Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE5 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868

Technical data

* optional


2008-04-08T15:09:54+02:00 - Seite 311

Z


312



Mercedes-Benz SL 2008 Roadster Owner's Manual PDF ...

Documents

Transcript of Mercedes-Benz SL 2008 Roadster Owner's Manual PDF ...